SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Cat. No. H101-E1-3




                     E5GN
                     Temperature Controller




                        USER MANUAL
Preface


The E5GN compact temperature controller features the following:




• The E5GN can be mounted on compact panels
• The user can select from thermocouple, platinum resistance thermometer, nonĆconĆ
    tact temperature sensor and analog voltage inputs.

• The user can select AT (autoĆtuning) and ST (selfĆtuning) as tuning functions.
• The user can use the communications function (when the communications function
    is supported).

• The user can calibrate sensor input.
• The E5GN features a watertight construction (NEMA4X: equivalent to IP66).
• The E5GN conforms to UL/CSA/IEC safety standards and EMC standards.

This User's Manual describes how to use the E5GN.

Before using your E5GN, thoroughly read and understand this manual in order to

ensure correct use.

Also, store this manual in a safe place so that it can be retrieved whenever necessary.

* For an additional description of the communications function, also refer to the

    E5AN/EN/CN/GN             Temperature          Controller,       Communications            Function        User's

    Manuals (Cat. No. H102)




E   OMRON, 1998

      All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted,

      in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior

      written permission of OMRON.

      No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because

      OMRON is constantly striving to improve its highĆquality products, the information contained in this manual is
      subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. NevertheĆ

      less, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages

      resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.




E   OMRON, 1998

      All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted,

      in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior

      written permission of OMRON.

      No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because

      OMRON is constantly striving to improve its highĆquality products, the information contained in this manual is
      subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. NevertheĆ

      less, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages

      resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.




                                                                                                                         I
PRECAUTIONS
     When the product is used under the circumstances or environment described in this

     manual always adhere to the limitations of the rating and functions. Also, for safety,

     take countermeasures such as fitting fail safe installations.


     DO NOT USE :
     •   In circumstances or environments that have not been described below in this manual.

     •   For control in nuclear power railway aircraft, vehicle, incinerator medical, entertainment,
                                     ,       ,                              ,

         or safety applications.

     •   Where death or serious property damage may occur or where extensive safety precautions
                                                         ,

         are required.




II
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
J Safety Signal Words
        This manual uses the following signal words to mark safety precautions for the E5GN.
        These precautions provide important information for the safe application of the product. You
        must be sure to follow the instructions provided in all safety precautions.


                          Indicates information that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or
         WARNING          serious injury.




                          Indicates information that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or
         CAUTION          minor injury damage to the product, or faulty operation.
                                      ,




J Safety Precautions
                                                CAUTION
F Electric Shock Warning
Do not touch the terminals while the power is ON.
Doing so may cause an electric shock.

Do not allow metal fragments or lead wire scraps to fall inside this product.
These may cause electric shock, fire or malfunction.

Never disassemble, repair or modify the product.
Doing so may cause electric shock, fire or malfunction.

Do not use the product in flammable and explosive gas atmospheres.


The life expectancy of the output relays varies greatly with the switching capacity and other switching
conditions. Always use the output relays within their rated load and electrical life expectancy If an outĆ
                                                                                               .
put relay is used beyond its life expectancy its contacts may become fused or burned.
                                            ,

Use the product within the rated load.
Not doing so may cause damage or burning.

Use this product within the rated supply voltage.
Not doing so may cause damage or burning.

Tighten the terminal screws properly Tighten them to a torque of 0.24 N m (2.5kgfcm) max on termiĆ
                                    .
nals 1 to 6. Tighten them to a torque of 0.13 Nm (1.4kgfcm) max on terminals 7 to 9.
Loose screws may cause malfunction.

Set all settings according to the control target of the product.
If the settings are not appropriate for the control target, the product may operate in an unexpected manĆ
ner, resulting in damage to the product or resulting in accidents.

To maintain safety in the event of a product malfunction, always take appropriate safety measures, such
as installing an alarm on a separate line to prevent excessive temperature rise.
If a malfunction prevents proper control, a major accident may result.




                                                                                                                III
NOTICE
     Be sure to observe these precautions to ensure safe use.
     (1) Do not wire unused terminals.
     (2) Be sure to wire properly with correct polarity of terminals.
     (3) To reduce induction noise, separate the highĆvoltage or largeĆcurrent power lines from other lines,
          and avoid parallel or common wiring with the power lines when you are wiring to the terminals.
          We recommend using separating pipes, ducts, or shielded lines.
     (4) Do not use this product in the following places:
            • Places subject to dust or corrosive gases (in particular, sulfide gas and ammonia gas)
            • Places subject to high humidity, condensation or freezing
            • Places subject to direct sunlight
            • Places subject to vibration and large shocks
            • Places subject to splashing liquid or oily atmosphere
            • Places directly subject to heat radiated from heating equipment
            • Places subject to intense temperature changes
     (5) To allow heat to escape, do not block the area around the product. (Ensure that enough space is
          left for the heat to escape.) Do not block the ventilation holes on the casing.
     (6) When you have removed the terminal plate, never touch electric components inside or subject the
          internal mechanism to shock.
     (7) Cleaning: Do not use paint thinner or the equivalent. Use standard grade alcohol to clean the prodĆ
          uct.
     (8) Use AWG24 to AWG14 leads for terminal Nos.1 to 6 and AWG28 to AWG22 leads for terminal
          Nos.7 to 9 (with lead cover peel back allowance of 5 or 6 mm).
     (9) Allow as much space as possible between the E5GN and devices that generate powerful highĆfreĆ
          quency noise (e.g. highĆfrequency welders, highĆfrequency sewing machines) or surges.
     (10) When executing selfĆtuning, turn the load (e.g. heater) ON simultaneously or before you turn the
          E5GN ON. If you turn the E5GN ON before turning the load ON, correct selfĆtuning results and
          optimum control may no longer be obtained.
     (11) Use a 100 to 240 VAC (50/60 Hz), 24 VAC (50/60 Hz) or 24 VDC power supply matched to the power
          specifications of the E5GN. Also, make sure that the rated voltage is attained within two seconds
          of turning the power ON.
     (12) Attach a surge suppresser or noise filter to peripheral devices that generate noise (in particular,
          motors, transformers, solenoids, magnetic coils or other equipment that have an inductance comĆ
          ponent).
     (13) When mounting a noise filter on the power supply, be sure to first check the filter's voltage and
          current capacity, and then mount the filter as close as possible to the E5GN.
     (14) Use within the following temperature and humidity ranges:
            • Temperature: Ć10 to 55_C, Humidity: 25 to 85% (with no icing or condensation)
          If the E5GN is installed inside a control board, the ambient temperature must be kept to under
          55_C, including the temperature around the E5GN.
          If the E5GN is subjected to heat radiation, use a fan to cool the surface of the E5GN to under 55_C.
     (15) Store within the following temperature and humidity ranges:
            • Temperature: Ć25 to 65_C, Humidity: 25 to 85% (with no icing or condensation)
     (16) Never place heavy objects on, or apply pressure to the E5GN as it may cause it to deform and deteriĆ
          orate during use or storage.
     (17) Avoid using the E5GN in places near a radio, television set, or wireless installation. These devices
          can cause radio disturbances which adversely affect the performance of the E5GN.

IV
Conventions Used in This Manual

J Meanings of Abbreviations
      The following abbreviations are used in parameter names, figures and in text explanations.
      These abbreviations mean the following:

                Symbol                   Term
                     PV      Process value
                     SP      Set point
                     SV      Set value
                     AT      AutoĆtuning
                     ST      SelfĆtuning
                     EU      Engineering unit *1
      *1 EU stands for Engineering Unit. EU is used as the minimum unit for engineering units
                 _
         such as C, m, and g.
         The size of EU varies according to the input type. For example, when the input temperature
                                         _          _
         setting range is -200 to +1300 C, 1 EU is 1 C, and when the input temperature setting range
                            _
         is -20.0 to +500.0 C, 1 EU is 0.1 C._
         In the case of analog input, the size of EU varies according to the decimal point position of
         the scaling setting, and 1 EU becomes the minimum scaling unit.


J How to Read Display Symbols
      The following tables show the correspondence between the symbols displayed on the displays
      and alphabet characters.




            A BCDE FGH I J K LM


            NOPQR S T UVWXY Z
J Reference mark
      This mark indicates that extra, useful information follows, such as supplementary explanations
      and how to apply functions.




                                                                                                     V
J How This Manual is Organized
        Purpose                    Related title                   Description
 F Learning about the   Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION            This chapter describes the

     E5GN                                                 features, names of parts and

                                                          typical functions.




 F Setting up           Chapter 2 PREPARATIONS            This chapter describes

                                                          installation and wiring.




 F Basic operations     Chapter 3 BASIC OPERATION and

                        Chapter 5 PARAMETERS
                                                          These chapters describe

                                                          basic control examples.




 F Applied operations   Chapter 4 APPLIED OPERATION and

                        Chapter 5 PARAMETERS
                                                          These chapters describe

                                                          advanced functions to fully

                                                          use the E5GN.




 F Calibration          Chapter 6 CALIBRATION             This chapter describes

                                                          calibration method.




 F Appendix                                               This chapter describes the

                                                          unit specifications. There is

                                                          also a parameter operations

                                                          list to be used as a backup

                                                          guide to the parameter setĆ

                                                          tings.




VI
Table of Contents
                                                                     Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I
                                                                     Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II
                                                                     Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III
                                                                     Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV
                                                                     Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V


CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                                                    1Ć1
   1.1 Names of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                     1Ć2
           Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      1Ć2
           Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    1Ć2
           How to use keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            1Ć3
   1.2 I/O Configuration and Main Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                                       1Ć4
           I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          1Ć4
           Main functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         1Ć5
   1.3 How Setup Levels Are Configured and
       Operating the Keys on the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                                        1Ć6
           Selecting parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               1Ć8
           Fixing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        1Ć8
   1.4 Communications Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                                1Ć9

CHAPTER 2 PREPARATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                                                    2Ć1
   2.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                               2Ć2
           Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         2Ć2
           Panel cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       2Ć2
           Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     2Ć3
           Removing and attaching the terminal plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                              2Ć3
   2.2 Wiring Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                     2Ć4
           Terminal arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                 2Ć4
           Precautions when wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                  2Ć4
           Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   2Ć4
   2.3 Requests at Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                         2Ć7
           To ensure prolonged use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                  2Ć7
           To reduce the influence of noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                     2Ć7
           To ensure high-precision measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                               2Ć7
           About waterproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              2Ć8


CHAPTER 3 BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                                                     3Ć1
   3.1 Initial Setup Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                         3Ć2
   3.2 Setting the Input Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                         3Ć4
           Input type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     3Ć4
   3.3 Selecting _C/_F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                      3Ć5
           Temperature unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           3Ć5
   3.4 Selecting PID Control or ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                                          3Ć6
   3.5 Setting Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                              3Ć7
           Control period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         3Ć7
           Direct/reverse operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               3Ć7
3.6     Setting the SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                 3Ć9
          Changing the SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              3Ć9

  3.7     Executing ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                            3Ć10
          ON/OFF control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            3Ć10
          Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   3Ć11

  3.8     Determining PID Constants (AT, ST, manual setup) . . . . . . . . . . .                                                              3Ć12
          AT (autoĆtuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          3Ć12
          ST (selfĆtuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          3Ć13
          Manual setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          3Ć15

  3.9     Alarm Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                3Ć17
          Alarm type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        3Ć18
          Alarm value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         3Ć19

  3.10 Requests during Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                              3Ć20



CHAPTER 4                APPLIED OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                                          4Ć1
  4.1     Shifting Input Values                       .....................................                                                    4Ć2
          Shifting input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         4Ć2
          How to calculate input shift values (2Ćpoint shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                4Ć3
          1Ćpoint shift method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               4Ć4
          2Ćpoint shift method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               4Ć4
          Example of 2Ćpoint temperature input shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                               4Ć5

  4.2     Alarm Hysteresis                     ........................................                                                        4Ć6
          Standby sequence                  ..................................................                                                 4Ć6
          Alarm latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        4Ć6
          Close in alarm/open in alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                     4Ć7

  4.3     Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits (analog input) . . . . . . . .                                                                4Ć8
          Analog input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         4Ć8

  4.4     Executing Heating and Cooling Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                                      4Ć9
          Heating and cooling control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                    4Ć9
          Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   4Ć10

  4.5     Setting MultiĆSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                  4Ć11
          Setting the SP by key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                       4Ć11
          Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   4Ć11

  4.6     Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values                                                   ...............                       4Ć13
          Set point limitter            ....................................................                                                  4Ć13
          Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   4Ć14

  4.7     Executing the SP Ramp Function (limiting the SP change rate)                                                                        4Ć15
          SP ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       4Ć15

  4.8     To Move to the Advanced Function Setting Level                                                       ............                   4Ć17

  4.9     Using the Key Protect level                               ...............................                                           4Ć18
          Key protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       4Ć18



CHAPTER 5                PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                                   5Ć1
  Conventions Used in this Chapter                                    ..............................                                           5Ć2

  Protect Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                              5Ć3

  Operation Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                  5Ć4

  Adjustment Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                  5Ć10

  Initial Setting Level                 ...........................................                                                           5Ć17
Advanced Function Setting Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                            5Ć25

     Communications Setting Level                               .................................                                             5Ć36




CHAPTER 6                  CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                              6Ć1

     6.1    Parameter Structure                        .....................................                                                   6Ć2

     6.2    User Calibration                  .........................................                                                        6Ć3

     6.3    Calibrating Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                          6Ć4

     6.4    Calibrating Analog Input                          ..................................                                               6Ć7

     6.5    Calibrating Platinum Resistance Thermometers                                                     .............                     6Ć8

     6.6    Checking Indication Accuracy                                 .............................                                         6Ć9




APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                            AĆ1

     SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                    AĆ2

            Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    AĆ2

            Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        AĆ3

     ERROR DISPLAY                      ............................................                                                           AĆ4

     PARAMETER OPERATIONS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                                     AĆ6

     SENSOR INPUT SETTING,
     INDICATION AND CONTROL RANGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                                          AĆ10

     SETUP LEVELS DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                             AĆ11

     PARAMETER FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                       AĆ12
CHAPTER 1              INTRODUCTION




CHAPTER 1    1
   INTRODUCTION




     1.1   Names of Parts            . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    1Ć2

           Front panel         . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    1Ć2

           Display      . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   1Ć2

           How to use keys             . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    1Ć3

     1.2   I/O Configuration and Main Functions . . .                                   1Ć4

           I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              1Ć4

           Main functions            . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    1Ć5

     1.3   How Setup Levels Are Configured and

           Operating the Keys on the Front Panel . . .                                  1Ć6

           Selecting parameters                . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    1Ć8

           Fixing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            1Ć8

     1.4   Communications Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                          1Ć9




                                                                                              1-1
CHAPTER 1       INTRODUCTION




1.1         Names of Parts




J     Front panel


                        Temperature unit         No.1 display


                                                        CMW     STP   OUT
                                                                                      Operation
                                                                                      indicators

                                                                                     No.2 display


            Level key                                                                   Up key



                                      Mode key                Down key


J     Display


      F   No.1 display           Displays the process value or parameter type.
                                 Lights for approximately one second during startup.

      F   No.2 display           Displays the set point, parameter operation read value or the manipulated
                                 variable.
                                 Lights for approximately one second during startup.

      F   Operation              (1) AL (alarm)
          indicators                 Lights when alarm is ON.
                                 (2) CMW (communications writing control)
                                     Lights when communications writing is enabled and is out when it
                                     is disabled.
                                 (3) STP (stop)
                                     Lights when control of the E5GN has been stopped.
                                     During control, this indicator lights when the run/stop function has
                                     been stopped.
                                 (4) OUT (control output 1, control output 2)
                                     Lights when control output 1, or control output 2 is ON.

      F   Temperature unit       The temperature unit is displayed when the display unit parameter is set
                                 to a temperature. Indication is determined by the currently selected temĆ
                                                                                                      _
                                 perature unit parameter set value. When this parameter is set to  C,
                                                                      _
                                   is displayed, and when set to  F,   is displayed.
                                 Flashes during ST operation.


1-2
1.1 Names of Parts




J   How to use keys      The following describes the basic functions of the front panel keys.


    F      (level) key   Press this key to select the setting levels. The setting level is selected in orĆ
                         der operation level ↔ adjustment level and initial setting level ↔
                         communications setting level.


    F      (mode) key    Press this key to select parameters within each level.


    F      (up) key      Each press of this key increments values displayed on the No.2 display.
                         Holding down this key continuously increments values.


    F      (down) key    Each press of this key decrements values displayed on the No.2 display.
                         Holding down this key continuously decrements values.


    F      +   key       This key combination sets the E5GN to the protect mode. For details on
        combination      the protect level, see Chapter 5 parameters.




                                                                                                       1-3
CHAPTER 1      INTRODUCTION




1.2       I/O Configuration and Main Functions




J     I/O configuration
                                                          OUT1
                                               Control output 1                         Controloutput 1
             Temperature input/
             analog input
                                                          OUT2
                                                                  Heating and cooling
                                               Control output 2

                                                          ALM1                          Alarmoutput 1

                                  Controller      Alarm 1            Standard



                                                 Input error



                                               Communications
                                               function




1-4
1.2 I/O Configuration and Main Functions




J Main functions     The following introduces the main functions of the E5GN. For details on
                     each function and how to use the functions, see Chapter 3 onwards.


  F Input sensor     • The following input sensors can be connected for temperature input:
    types              Thermocouple      : K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B
                       NonĆcontact temperature sensor ES1A
                                         : K (10 to 70_C), K (60 to 120_C), K (115 to 165_C),
                                           K160 to 260_C
                       Platinum resistance thermometer
                                         : JPt100, Pt100
                       Analog input      : 0 to 50 mV


  F Control output   • Control output is either relay or voltage output depending on the model
                       of E5GN.
                                                                             j jj, alarm 1
                     • If heating and cooling control is selected on the E5GNĆ 1
                       output is used as alarm 2 output.


  F Alarms           • Alarms are supported on the E5GNĆ 1   j jj  . Set the alarm type and
                       alarm value, or upperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarms.
                     • If necessary, a more comprehensive alarm function can be achieved by
                       setting the standby sequence, alarm hysteresis and close in alarm/
                       open in alarm, and alarm latch ON/OFF parameters.
                     • When the input error output is set to ON, alarm output 1 turns ON
                       when an input error occurs.


  F Control          • Optimum PID constants can be set easily by AT (autoĆtuning) and ST
    adjustment         (selfĆtuning).


  F Communications   • Communications according to CompoWay/F *1 and Sysway*2 are supĆ
    function                                j j
                       ported on the E5GNĆ 03 .
                       Communications are carried out over the RSĆ485 interface.

                     *1 CompoWay/F is a generalĆpurpose serial communicationsĆbased unified

                     communications procedure developed by OMRON. CompoWay/F uses
                     commands compliant with the wellĆestablished FINS, together with a uniĆ
                     fied frame format on OMRON programmable controllers to facilitate
                     communications between personal computers and components.
                     *2   Sysway communication does not support alarm 3 output.




                                                                                           1-5
CHAPTER 1   INTRODUCTION




1.3    How Setup Levels Are Configured and Operating

       the Keys on the Front Panel



                        Parameters are divided into groups, each called a level. Each of the set
                        values (setup items) in these levels is called a parameter. The parameĆ
                        ters on the E5GN are divided into the following seven levels:
                        When the E5GN is turned ON, all items in the display light for about one
                        second.
                                Power ON




                             Operation level                    Adjustment level
                                                         key                                        +    key                 +    key

                                                   Less than                                    1 second min.         The PV display
                                                   1 second                                                           flashes .

                                                               key    3 seconds min.
                                    key
                             1 second min.
                                                                      key The PV flashes after one second.

                                                                      Control stops.                                         +    key

                                                                                                                      3 seconds min.



                                                                           CommuĆ

                                Initial setting level                      nications
                                                                                                         Protect level
                                                                           setting level
                                                                     key
                                                            Less than
                                                            1 second
                                                                                                    * The key pressing time can
                                                                                                      be changed in protect leve
                                    key                    Password input                             move time.
                             1 second min.                 set value Ć169



                                             Advanced
                                             function setting level

                                                                                       Note :
                                                                                       Communicationssetting level is displayed
                                                           Password input
                                                           set value 1201
                                                                                       only when E5GNĆ     V03V with communicaĆ
                                                                                       tions function is used.



                                                                                                        Control in progress
                                               Calibration level
                                                                                                        Control stopped




                                                                                       Control in
                                                                                                               Control Stopped
                                                                                       Progress


                        Protect level                                                      f                             Ć

                        Operation level                                                    f                             Ć

                        Adjustment level                                                   f                             Ć

                        Initial setting level                                               Ć                            f
                        Advanced function setting level                                     Ć                            f
                        Calibration level                                                   Ć                            f
                        Communications setting level                                        Ć                            f
                        f : Indicates items that can be set.
                        Of these levels, the initial setting level, communications setting level,
                        advanced function setting level and calibration level can be used only
                        when control has stopped. Note that the controller outputs are stopped
                        when these four levels are selected.


1-6
1.3 How Setup Levels Are Configured and Operating the Keys on the Front Panel



F Protect level           • To move the mode at this level, simultaneously press the         and
                            keys for at least three seconds in the operation level or adjustment level.
                            This level is for preventing unwanted or accidental modification of
                            parameters. Protected levels will not be displayed, and so the parameĆ
                            ters in that level cannot be modified.
                            * The key pressing time can be changed in protect level move time.

F Operation level         • This level is displayed when you turn the power ON. You can move to the
                            protect level, initial setting level and adjustment level from this level.
                          • Normally, select this level during operation. During operation, the proĆ
                            cess value, set point and manipulated variable can be monitored, and the
                            alarm value and upperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarms can be monitored and
                            modified.

F Adjustment level        • To move the mode at this level, press the         key for less than one seĆ
                            cond.
                          • This level is for entering set values and offset values for control. This
                            level contains parameters for setting the AT (autoĆtuning), communicaĆ
                            tions writing enable/disable, hysteresis, multiĆSP input shift values and
                                                                              ,
                            PID constants. You can move to the top parameter of the initial setting
                            level, protection level and operation level from here.

F Initial setting         • To move the mode at this level, press the      key for at least three seconds
  level                     in the operation level or adjustment level. The PV display flashes after one
                            second.
                          • This level is for specifying the input type, selecting the control method,
                            control period, setting direct/reverse action and alarm type. (When you
                            move to the operation level from the initial setting level, all items in the
                            display light.)
                          • You can move to the advanced function setting level or communications
                            setting level from this level. To return to the operation level, press the
                                 key for at least one second. To move to the communication setting
                            level, press the      key for less than one second.

F Advanced                • To move the mode at this level, after setting the Initial/communicaĆ
  function setting          tions protection of the Protection level to 0, input the password
  level                     (Ć169) in the initial setting level.
                          • You can move to the calibration level or initial level from this level.
                          • This level is for setting the automatic return of display mode, MV limitĆ
                            ter, standby sequence, alarm hysteresis, ST (selfĆtuning) and for moving
                            to the user calibration level.

F Communications          • To move the mode at this level, press the      key for less than one second
  setup level               in the initial setting level.
                          • When the communications function is used, set the communications
                            conditions in this level. Communicating with a personal computer (host
                            computer) allows set points to be read and written, and manipulated
                            variables to be monitored.
                            NOTE This level is available only on the E5GNĆ 03 .    V V
                                                                                                      1-7
CHAPTER 1      INTRODUCTION



      F Calibration level   • To move the mode at this level, you must enter the password 1201 in
                              the advanced function setting level. This level is for offsetting deviation
                              in the characteristics on the input circuit.
                            • You cannot move to other levels by operating the keys on the front panel
                              from the calibration level. To cancel this level, turn the power OFF then
                              back ON again.


J Selecting                 • To select parameters in each level, press the    key. Each press of the
      parameters                   key advances to the next parameter. For details on each parameter,
                              see Chapter 5.


                                          Parameter
                                              1


                                          Parameter
                                              2


                                          Parameter
                                              3


                                          Paramete
                                              n




J Fixing settings           • If you press the   key at the final parameter, the display returns to the
                              top parameter for the current level.
                            • To change parameter settings or setup, specify the setting using the
                              or    keys, and either leave the setting for at least two seconds or press
                              the     key. This fixes the setting.
                            • When another level is selected, the parameter and setting on the display
                              are fixed.
                            • When you turn the power OFF, you must first fix the settings or parameĆ
                              ter setup (by pressing the    key or selecting another mode). The setĆ
                              tings and parameter setup are sometimes not changed by merely pressĆ
                              ing the      or     keys.




1-8
1.4 Communications Function




1.4         Communications Function



                           The E5GN can be provided with a communications function that allows
                           you to check and set controller parameters on a host computer. If the comĆ
                           munications function is required, use the model supporting the commuĆ
                                                         j j
                           nications function E5GNĆ 03 . For details on the communications funcĆ
                           tion, see the separate Communications Functions User's Manual.
                           Follow the procedure below to move to the communication setting level.


                           (1) Press the    key for at least three seconds in the operation level.
                               The level moves to the initial setting level.
                           (2) Press the     key for less than one second. The initial setting level
                               moves to the communications setting level.
                           (3) Pressing the         key advances the parameters as shown in the followĆ
                               ing figure.
                           (4) Press the       or         keys to change the parameter setups.


                                                        Communications unit No.




                                                        Baud rate



                                                        Data bit



                                                        Stop bit




                                                        Parity




  F      Setting up        Set the E5GN communications specifications so that they match the comĆ
         communications    munications setup of the host computer. In the case of a oneĆtoĆN connecĆ
         data              tion, match the communications setup of all units.


           Parameter      Symbol              Setting                    Set value              Default   Unit

Communications unit No.             0 to 99                                                       1       None


Baud rate                           1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2        . , . , . ,       . ,   .     9.6     kbps


Data bit                            7, 8                                                          7        Bit


Stop bit                            1, 2                                                          2        Bit


Parity                              None, even, odd                      ,        ,              Even     None




                                                                                                                 1-9
CHAPTER 2 PREPARATIONS




CHAPTER 2      2
   PREPARATIONS




     2.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     2Ć2
         Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       2Ć2
         Panel cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       2Ć2
         Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       2Ć3
         Removing and attaching the terminal plate                                2Ć3
     2.2 Wiring Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             2Ć4
         Terminal arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                   2Ć4
         Precautions when wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                    2Ć4
         Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   2Ć4
     2.3 Requests at Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                 2Ć7
         To ensure prolonged use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                  2Ć7
         To reduce the influence of noise . . . . . . . . .                       2Ć7
         To ensure high-precision measurement . .                                 2Ć7
         About waterproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                2Ć8




                                                                                        2-1
CHAPTER 2              PREPARATIONS




2.1                   Installation




J     Dimensions


      F     E5GN                            •     External dimensions (Unit: mm)

                                     48                               3                                  100




                                                             (36.8)
                 24
  35




                                                                                                                                              22
                                 44.8




                                                                      * When carrying out maintenance on the E5GN, only the terminal plate
                                                        22




                                                                          can be drawn out with the terminal leads still attached.




J     Panel cutout
 When mounted separately (unit : mm)                                                    When groupĆmounted (unit: mm)

                                                                                                  (48  number of units Ć2.5)
                                                                                                                                +1.0
                                                                                                                                 0


                                                                                                                                       +0.3
                                                                                                                                         22.2 0
       40 min.




                              +0.6
                         45                                                             Waterproofing is not possible when
                               0
                                                                                        ground mounting several units.
                                          +0.3
                                           0
                                           22.2




                                            •     The recommended panel thickness is 1 to 5 mm.

                                            •     Several units cannot be ground mounted close together vertically.
                                                  (Observe the recommended mounting space limits.)

                                            •     When two or more E5GNs are mounted, make sure that the surrounding
                                                  temperature does not exceed the allowable operating temperature given
                                                  in the specifications.




2-2
2.1 Installation




J Mounting        (1) To ensure waterproofing, enclose the unit in the waterproof packing
                      prior to mounting. Waterproofing is not possible when ground
                      mounting several units.

                  (2) Insert the E5GN into the mounting hole in the panel from the front.

                  (3) Push the adapter along the E5GN body from the terminals up to the
                      panel, and fasten temporarily.

                  (4) Tighten the two fixing screws on the adapter. When tightening
                      screws, tighten the two screws alternately keeping the torque to
                      within approximately 0.29 to 0.39 Nm.



                                                              Adapter

                                                                   Waterproof

                                                                    Panel




J Removing and    The E5GN can be replaced by removing the terminal plate.

 attaching the    (1) Press down hard on the fasteners on both sides of the terminals to

 terminal plate       unlock the terminal plate and pull upwards.




                  (2) Draw out the terminal plate as it is.




                  (3) Before you insert the terminal plate again, make sure that the pins
                      match the positions of the holes in the terminal plate.




                                                                                           2-3
CHAPTER 2       PREPARATIONS




2.2         Wiring Terminals




J     Terminal              E5GN

      arrangement

                             1              2           3         4          5             6             7               8    9




                                                    +                 -                                                           TC
                            Input power                 Control output          B(+)        A(-)
                                                                            Communications
                                 supply             Voltage output              specifications                                    PT
                           100 to 240 VAC               DC12V 21mA                                       A               B   B
                             24 VAC/DC                                                                               -            +

                                                    Relay output           Alarm output 1/Control                    Analog input
                                                            (OUT1)          output 2/Input error
                                                                                  (ALM1/OUT2)


J     Precautions           •    Separate input leads and power lines in order to protect the controller
                                 and its lines from external noise.
      when wiring
                            •    Use AWG24 to AWG14 leads for terminal Nos.1 to 6 and AWG28 to
                                 AWG22 leads for terminal Nos.7 to 9.

                            •    Tighten the terminal screws using a torque no greater than 0.24 N m
                                 (2.5kgfcm) for terminal Nos.1 to 6, and a torque no greater than 0.13
                                 Nm (1.4kgfcm) for terminal Nos.7 to 9.



J     Wiring

      F   Power supply      •    Connect to terminal Nos.1 and 2. The power supply specifications are as
                                 follows:
                                    100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 7 VA
                                                        or
                                    24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 4 VA
                                    24 VDC, 2.5 W (no polarity)

                            •    Standard insulation is applied to the power supply I/O sections. If reinĆ
                                 forced insulation is required, connect the input and output terminals to
                                 a device without any exposed currentĆcarrying parts or to a device with
                                 standard insulation suitable for the maximum operating voltage of the
                                 power supply I/O section.



      F   Input             •    Connect to terminal Nos.7 to 9 as follows according to the input type.



                                    7       8   9                7    8     9                7       8       9

                                        -           +                                            -               +
                                                                                                         V
                                                                A     B     B
                                                              Platinum resistance
                                  Thermocouple                   thermometer               Analog input

                                                              E5GNĆ       jjjj



2-4
2.2 Wiring Terminals




F   Control output 1   • Terminal Nos.3 and 4 are for control output. The following diagram
                         shows the available outputs and their internal equalizing circuits.
                       Temperature
                                                                           +V
                       controller


                                                                                GND
                                             3         4               3        4

                                                                   +                -
                                                                            L

                                          Relay output              Voltage output

                                                               jjjj
                                                           E5GNĆ


                       • The following table shows the specifications for each output unit.
                          Output type                                  Specifications

                              Relay             250 VAC, 2A, electrical life: 100,000 operations

                         Voltage (PNP)          PNP type, 12 VDC, 21 mA (with shortĆcircuit protection)

                       • The voltage output (control output) is not electrically insulated from the
                         internal circuits. When using a grounding thermocouple, do not connect
                         the control output terminals to the ground. If the control output termiĆ
                         nals are connected to the ground, errors will occur in the measured temĆ
                         perature values as a result of leakage current.
F   Alarm output 1/                         jj
                       • On the E5GNĆ 1 , alarm output 1 (ALM1) is across terminal Nos.5
    control output 2     and 6.
                         The following diagram shows the internal equalizing circuits for alarm
                         output 1.
                       • When utilizing heating and cooling control, alarm output 1 becomes
                         alarm output 2.
                       • When the input error output is set to ON, alarm output 1 turns ON
                         when an input error occurs.


                                      5      6



                               ALM1/OUT2/Input error

                                    E5GNĆ jj1

                       • Relay specifications are as follows:
                            SPSTĆNO,       250 VAC,     1A




                                                                                                           2-5
CHAPTER 2   PREPARATIONS




      F Communications   •   When carrying out communications on the E5GNĆ
                             communications cable across terminal Nos.5 and 6.
                                                                                       j j03   , connect the


                                         5      6



                                         B(+) A(-)

                                         RSĆ485

                                     E5GNĆ   j j03


                         Communications Unit Wiring Diagram
                                Host computer
                                RSĆ485          Shielded cable


                                    Ć
                                    +

                                                        E5GN (No.1)             E5GN (No.31)
                                    FG                     RSĆ485                     RSĆ485
                                                         No   Abbr.               No   Abbr.

                                                          6      A (-)            6    A(-)
                                AB : d1c
                                                          5      B (+)            5     B(+)
                                AB : d0c


                                                                         Terminator (120Ω, 1/2 W)


                         •   The RSĆ485 connection can be either oneĆtoĆone to oneĆtoĆN. Up to 32
                             units including the host computer can be connected in oneĆtoĆN systems.
                             Use shielded, twisted pair cable (AWG 24 to AWG 14), and keep the total
                             cable length to 500 m.
                         •   Specify both ends of the transmission path including the host computer
                             as the end node (that is, connect terminators to both ends).
                             The maximum terminal resistance is 54 Ohms.




2-6
2.3 Requests at Installation




2.3 Requests at Installation

J To ensure                 Use the temperature in the following operating environment:
                            Temperature : -10 to +55°C (icing and condensation not allowed)
  prolonged use
                            Humidity : 25 to 85%
                            When the temperature controller is incorporated in a control panel, make
                            sure that the controller's ambient temperature and not the panel's ambiĆ
                            ent temperature does not exceed 55°C.
                            The life of electronic equipment such as temperature controllers is inĆ
                            fluenced not only by the life determined by the relay switching count but
                            also by the life of the electronic components used internally. The service
                            life of components is dependent on the ambient temperature: the higher
                            the ambient temperature becomes, the shorter the service life becomes,
                            and vice versa. For this reason, the service life of the temperature controlĆ
                            ler can be extended by lowering its internal temperature.
                            Gang-mounting two or moretemperature controllers,or mountingtemperĆ
                            ature controllers aboveeach other may causeheat to build up inside thetemĆ
                            perature controllers, which will shorten their service life. When mounting
                            temperature controllers like this, forced cooling measures such as a cooling
                            fan for cooling thetemperature controllers must betaken into consideration.
                            Prevent only the terminal block from being cooled. Otherwise, this may
                            result in a measurement error.

J To reduce the      To reduce induction noise, the leads on the temperature controller's terĆ
  influence of noise minal block must be wired separately from large-voltage/large-current
                     power leads. Also, avoid wiring leads in parallel with power leads or in the
                     same wiring path. Other methods such as separating conduits and wiring
                     ducts, or using shield wire are also effective.
                     Attach a surge absorber or noise filter to peripheral equipment that generĆ
                     ates noise (in particular, motors, transformers, solenoids, or other equipĆ
                     ment that has a magnetic coil or other inductance component).
                     When a noise filter is used at the power supply, first check the voltage or
                     current, and attach the noise filter as close as possible to the temperature
                     controller.
                     Also, install the temperature controller as far away as possible from equipĆ
                     ment that generates strong, high frequency (e.g. high-frequency welders,
                     high-frequency sewing machines) or surges.

J To ensure                 When the thermocouple leads are extended, be sure to use a compensating
                            lead wire matched to the type of thermocouple.
  high-precision
                            When the platinum resistance detector leads are extended, use the lead
  measurement               having the smallest resistance to equalize the resistance of the three leads.
                            Install the temperature controller so that it is horizontal.
                            If there is a large error in the measurement values, make sure that input
                            compensation has been set correctly.

                                                                                                      2-7
CHAPTER 2 PREPARATIONS




J About               The protective structure of this controller conforms to the following stanĆ


      waterproofing   dards. Parts that are not indicated as being protected or that are indicated

                      as IP   j
                              0 are not waterproof.

                      Front panel: NEMA4X NEMA4X for indoor use (equivalent to IP66)

                      Rear case: IP20

                      Terminals: IP00




2-8
CHAPTER 3 BASIC OPERATION




CHAPTER 3     3
   BASIC OPERATION



     3.1   Initial Setup Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                   3Ć2

     3.2   Setting the Input Type                  .................                  3Ć4

           Input type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       3Ć4

     3.3   Selecting       _C/_F      ........................                        3Ć5

           Temperature unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               3Ć5

     3.4   Selecting PID Control or
           ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               3Ć6

     3.5   Setting Output Specifications                      ...........             3Ć7

           Control period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           3Ć7

           Direct/reverse operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                   3Ć7

     3.6   Setting the SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           3Ć9

           Changing the SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              3Ć9

     3.7   Executing ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .                        3Ć10

           ON/OFF control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              3Ć10

           Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   3Ć11

     3.8   Determining PID Constants
           (AT ST, manual setup)
              ,                                    .................                 3Ć12

           AT (autoĆtuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            3Ć12

           ST (selfĆtuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          3Ć13

           Manual setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          3Ć15

     3.9   Alarm Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            3Ć17

           Alarm type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        3Ć18

           Alarm value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         3Ć19

     3.10 Requests during Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                      3Ć20




                                                                                            3-1
CHAPTER 3 BASIC OPERATION




3.1            Initial Setup Examples



                                           On previous controllers, sensor input type, alarm type and control period

                                           were set by the DIP switches. These hardware settings are now set in

                                           parameters in setup menus. The                              and           keys are used to switch

                                           between setup menus, and the amount of time that you hold the keys down

                                           for determines which setup menu you move to. This section describes two

                                           typical examples.


      F   Typical example 1


  Input type                                     _
                   : 0 K thermocouple Ć200 to 1300 C
                                                       Setup procedure
                                                               Power ON                                           Power ON
  Control method   : ON/OFF control

  Alarm type       : 2 upper limit
                                                                                          Operation level
  Alarm value 1        _
                   : 20 C (deviation)

  Set point             _
                   : 100 C                                                                                                      Process value/set

                                                                                                                                point




                                                                                                                        Press       key for at least

                                                                                                                        three seconds.

                                            Initial setting level                                                       Control stops.
                                                                                          Initial setting level
                                                          Set input specifications     Check input type.                        Input type




                                                                                       Check that control                       In ON/OFF
                                                          Set control specifications
                                                                                       is ON/OFF control.                       control

                                                                                                                                In PID control



                                                                                       Check alarm type.
                                                                                                                                Alarm 1 type
                                                            Set alarm type




                                                                                                                        Press       key for at

                                                                                                                        least one second.




                                                                                                                        Control starts

                                                                                          Operation level

                                                                                       Press         keys
                                                                                                                                 Process value/


                                                                                           _
                                                                                       to set set point to
                                                                                                                                 set point
                                                                                       100 C.

                                                                                                                                 During run
                                                                                       Make sure that
                                                                                                                                 During stop
                                            Operation level                            control is running.



                                                                                       Press         keys
                                                           Set alarm values                                                      Alarm value 1


                                                                                               _
                                                                                       to set alarm value

                                                                                       to 20 C.




                                                                                                             Start operation

                                                            Start operation




3-2
3.1 Initial Setup Examples



F Typical example 2
   Input type            : 4 T thermocouple Ć200 to 400 C_
   Control method        : PID control

   ST (selfĆtuning)      : OFF

   Calculate PID constants by AT (autoĆtuning)

   execution.

   Alarm type            : 2 upper limit

   Alarm value 1               _
                         : 30 C (deviation)

   Set point             : 150 C_
           Setup procedure
                      Power ON                                                               Power ON




                                                                       Operation level

                                                                                                             Process value/set

                                                                                                             point




                                                                                                     Press        key for at least three seconds.

                                                                                                     Control stops.
 Initial setting level                                                 Initial setting level
                                                                    Press
                  Set input specifications                                                                    Input type
                                                                    keys to select

                                                                    input type.


                                                                    Press
                                                                                                             In ON/OFF
                       Set control
                       specifications
                                                                    keys to select                           control
                                                                    PID control.                             In PID control


                                                                    Press
                                                                                                              To execute ST
                                                                    keys to set ST                            To cancel ST
                    Set alarm type
                                                                    to OFF.

                                                                    Check the                                 Control period (heat)
                                                                                                              (unit: seconds)
                                                                    control period.



                                                                                                             Alarm 1 type
                                                                     Check alarm

                                                                     type.




                                                                                                     Press        key for at least one second.
                                                                      Operation level
                                              After AT execution    Press



                                                                                   _
                                                                    keys to set set                           Process value/

                                                                    point to 150 C.                         set point

                                              During AT execution

                                                                                                     Press        key for less than 1 second.

 Adjustment level                                                      Adjustment level
                                                                      Execute AT
                                                                                                              To execute AT
                    AT execution                                      (autoĆtuning).
                                                                                                              To cancel AT
                                              After AT execution

   (when PID control                                                                                 Press        key for less than 1 second.

   is selected)
                                              During AT execution
                                                                       Operation level                 Control starts


                                                                                                              Process value/
                                                                    Make sure that
                                                                                                              set point

                                                                         _
                                                                    set point is

                                                                    150 C.
                                                                                                               During run
                                                                    Make sure that                             During stop

                                                                    control is running.
 Operation level
                                                                    Press
                                                                                                              Alarm value 1
                  Set alarm values

                                                                                   _
                                                                    keys to set alarm

                                                                    value to 30 C.




                                                                                        Start program execution




                   Start operation




                                                                                                                                                    3-3
CHAPTER 3              BASIC OPERATION




3.2           Setting the Input Type




                                              The E5GN supports four input types: platinum resistance, thermocouple,
                                              nonĆcontact temperature sensor and analog inputs. Set the input type
                                              matched to the sensor connected to the E5GN in the input type parameter.
                                              The E5GN specifications support two types of inputs, platinum resistance
                                              thermometer and nonĆcontact temperature sensor, thermocouple and anaĆ
                                              log input, whose set values differ. Check the type of E5GN at purchase.

J     Input type


Operation Procedure
                                              Setting the input type thermocouple KĆ20.0 to 500.0 C.                               _
 Operation level
                                              (1) Press the       key for at least three seconds to move from the operaĆ
                                                  tion level to the initial setting level.
 Initial setting level
                         Input type
                                              (2) Press the      key to enter the set value of the desired sensor. When
                                                                                                _
                                                  you use K thermocouple (Ć20.0 to 500.0 C), enter 1 as the set value.
                                              Hint: The set value is fixed if you do not operate the keys on the front panel

                                                    for two seconds after changing the parameter, or by pressing the
                                                         or     keys.

                                List of Input Types
                                                                                     Set
                                                        Input type       Name                   Input Temperature Setup Range
                                                                                     Value

                                 Platinum resistance   Platinum          Pt100        0      Ć200 to 850 ( C)    _               / Ć300 to 1500 ( F)    _
                                 thermometer
                                  h                    resistance
                                                          i                           1                                      _
                                                                                             Ć199.9 to 500.0 ( C) / Ć199.9 to 900.0 ( F)                    _
                                 input type            thermometer
                                                                                      2      0.0 to 100.0 ( C)   _               / 0.0 to 210.0 ( F)_
                                                                        JPt100        3                                      _
                                                                                             Ć199.9 to 500.0 ( C) / Ć199.9 to 900.0 ( F)                    _
                                                                                      4      0.0 to 100.0 ( C)   _               / 0.0 to 210.0 ( F)_
                                                                                     Set
                                                        Input type       Name                   Input Temperature Setup Range
                                                                                     Value

                                 Thermocouple
                                          p            Thermocouple
                                                                p          K          0      Ć200 to 1300 ( C)       _           / Ć300 to 2300 ( F)  _
                                 input type
                                 i   tt                                               1      Ć20.0 to 500.0 ( C)         _       / 0.0 to 900.0 ( F)_
                                                                           J          2      Ć100 to 850 ( C)    _               / Ć100 to 1500 ( F)  _
                                                                                      3      Ć20 to 400.0 ( C)    _              / 0.0 to 750.0 ( F)_
                                                                           T          4      Ć200 to 400 ( C)    _               / Ć300 to 700 ( F) _
                                                                                      17                                     _
                                                                                             Ć199.9 to 400.0 ( C) / Ć199.9 to 700.0 ( F)                    _
                                                                           E          5                  _
                                                                                             0 to 600 ( C)                                   _
                                                                                                                                 / 0 to 1100 ( F)

                                                                           L          6      Ć100 to 850 ( C)    _               / Ć100 to 1500 ( F)    _
                                                                           U          7      Ć200 to 400 ( C)    _               / Ć300 to 700 ( F) _
                                                                                      18                                     _
                                                                                             Ć199.9 to 400.0 ( C) / Ć199.9 to 700.0 ( F)                    _
                                                                           N          8      Ć200 to 1300 ( C)       _           / Ć300 to 2300 ( F)    _
                                                                           R          9      0 to 1700 ( C)  _                                  _
                                                                                                                                 / 0 to 3000 ( F)

                                                                           S          10     0 to 1700 ( C)  _                                  _
                                                                                                                                 / 0 to 3000 ( F)

                                                                           B          11     100 to 1800 ( C)    _               / 300 to 3200 ( F) _
                                                       NonĆcontact             _
                                                                      10 to 70 C      12             _
                                                                                             0 to 90 ( C)                                   _
                                                                                                                                 / 0 to 190 ( F)
                                                       temperature              _
                                                                      60 to 120 C     13                 _
                                                                                             0 to 120 ( C)                                  _
                                                                                                                                 / 0 to 240 ( F)
                                                       sensor
                                                                                _
                                                                      115 to 165 C    14                 _
                                                                                             0 to 165 ( C)                                  _
                                                                                                                                 / 0 to 320 ( F)

                                                                                _                        _                                  _
                                                       ES1A
                                                                      160 to 260 C    15     0 to 260 ( C)                       / 0 to 500 ( F)

                                                       Analog input    0 to 50mV      16     One of the following ranges depending on
                                                                                             the results of scaling:
                                                                                             Ć1999 to 9999, Ć199.9 to 999.9


                                Shaded ranges indicate default settings.


3-4
3.3 Selecting _C/_F




3.3          Selecting _C/_FF
             Selecting C/             _ _

J   Temperature unit                      • Select either _C or _F as the temperature unit.
                                          • Set the temperature unit in the temperature unit parameter of initial
                                            setting level. Default is  : _C.


                                          Select _C
Operation Procedure




Operation level
                                          (1) Press the       key for at least three seconds to move from the operaĆ
                                              tion level to the initial setting level.
Initial setting level
                        Input type        (2) Select the temperature unit parameter by pressing the          key.
                                              Press the      or      keys to select either _C or _F.
                                                      : _C             : _F
                                          (3) To return to the operation level press the        key for at least one
                        Temperatureunit
                                              second.




                                                                                                                   3-5
CHAPTER 3 BASIC OPERATION




3.4         Selecting PID Control or ON/OFF Control



                           The E5GN supports two control methods, 2ĆPID control and ON/OFF
                           control. The control method is selected by the PID / ON/OFF parameter
                           in the initial setting level. When this parameter is set to  , 2ĆPID
                           control is set, and when set to      , ON/OFF control is set (default).



      F   2ĆPID control    PID control is set by AT (autoĆtuning), ST (selfĆtuning) or manual setup.
                           For PID control, set the PID constants in the proportional band (P),
                           integral time (I) and derivative time (D) parameters.



      F   ON/OFF control   In ON/OFF control, the control output is turned ON when the process
                           value is lower than the current set point, and the control output is turned
                           OFF when the process value is higher than the current set point (reverse
                           operation).




3-6
3.5 Setting Output Specifications


3.5        Setting Output Specifications




J   Control period                 • Set the output period (control period). Though a shorter period provides
                         Control     better control performance, we recommend setting the control period to
                         period      20 seconds or more taking the life expectancy in the case of relay output
                         (OUT1)      into consideration. If necessary, readjust the control period by trial
                                     operation, for example, when the control period parameters are set to
                                     their defaults.
                                   • Set the control period in the control period (OUT1) parameter (initial
                                     setting level). Default is 20 seconds.


J   Direct/reverse                 • Direct operation refers to control where the manipulated variable is
                                     increased according to the increase in the process value. Alternatively,
    operation
                                     reverse operation refers to control where the manipulated variable is
                                     decreased according to the increase in the process value.



 Manipulated variable                                     Manipulated variable
  100%                                                     100%




      0%                                                      0%
           Low temperature Set value       High temperature        Low temperature Set value High temperature
                        Direct operation                                         Reverse operation
                                    For example, when the process value (PV) (temperature) is lower than
                                    the set point (SP) (temperature) in a heating control system, the manipĆ
                                    ulated variable increases by the difference between the PV and SP valĆ
                                    ues.
                                    Accordingly, this becomes reverse operation in a heating control sysĆ
                                    tem, or alternatively, direct operation in a cooling control system.
                                   • Direct/reverse operation is set in the direct/reverse operation parameĆ
                                     ter (initial setting level). The direct/reverse operation parameter
                                     default is reverse operation.




                                                                                                            3-7
CHAPTER 3              BASIC OPERATION




                                            In this example, let's monitor the input type, temperature unit,
Operation Procedure
                                            direct/reverse operation and control period (heat) parameters.
                                               input type =  : K thermocouple
                                               temperature unit =  : _C
                                               direct/reverse operation =        : reverse operation
                                               control period (OUT1) = 20 (secs)


 Operation level                            (1) Press the       key for at least three seconds to move from the operaĆ
                         PV/SP
                                                tion level to the initial setting level.
                                            (2) The input type is displayed. When you are setting the input type for
 Initial setting level
                         Input type
                                                the first time,  : K thermocouple is set. (0 is set in the case of a
                                                platinum resistance thermometer.) To select a different sensor, press
                                                the     or     keys.
                         Temperature unit   (3) Select the temperature unit parameter by pressing the             key.
                                                Default is  : _C. To select  : _F, press the key.
                                            (4) Select the control period (OUT1) parameter by pressing the
                         Control period         key.
                         (OUT1)
                                                Default is 20.
                                            (5) Select the direct/reverse operation parameter by pressing the
                         Direct/reverse
                         operation
                                                key. Default is       : reverse operation. To select     : direct
                                                operation, press the       key.
 Operation level
                                            (6) To return to the operation level press the       key for at least one
                         PV/SP
                                                second.




3-8
3.6 Setting the SP




3.6        Setting the SP



Operation level       The operation level is displayed when the E5GN is turned ON. The left
                      display (No.1 display) displays the process value, and the right display
                      (No.2 display) displays the set point.


J   Changing the SP   • The set point cannot be changed when the operation/adjustment
                        protection parameter is set to 3. For details, see 4.8 Using the Key
                        Protect Levels.
                      • To change the set point, press the        or       keys in the PV/SP
                        parameter (operation level), and set the desired set value. The new set
                        point is selected two seconds after you have specified the new value.


                      In this example, let's change the set point from 0_C to 200_C.
Operation Procedure




Operation level       (1) Normally, the PV/SP parameter is displayed. The set point is 0_C.
                      (2) Press the      or     keys until the set point changes to 200_C.




                                                                                             3-9
CHAPTER 3        BASIC OPERATION




 3.7       Executing ON/OFF Control




                              In ON/OFF control, the control output turns OFF when the currently
                              controlled temperature reaches a preset set point. When the manipulated
                              variable turns OFF, the temperature begins to fall and the control output
                              turns ON again. This operation is repeated at a certain point. At this time,
                              how much the temperature must fall before control turns ON again is
                              determined by the hysteresis (OUT1) parameter. Also, how much the
                              manipulated variable must be adjusted in response in the increase or
                              decrease in the process value is determined by direct/reverse operation
                              parameter.


 J   ON/OFF control           • Switching between 2ĆPID control and ON/OFF control is carried out by
                                the PID / ON/OFF parameter (initial setting level). When this paramĆ
                                eter is set to  , 2ĆPID control is selected, and when set to      ,
                                ON/OFF control is selected. Default is       .


     F   Hysteresis           • In ON/OFF control, the hysteresis is used as a differential for switching
                                the output ON when the temperature moves away from the required set
                                point, and is used to give stability around the set point.
                              • The hysteresis width is called the hysteresis band. The control output
                                (OUT1) function is set by hysteresis (OUT1).
                              • In standard control (heating or cooling control), the hysteresis
                                (OUT1) setting is used as the hysteresis setting in the adjustment level
                                regardless of the control type, heating control or cooling control.

                                                               Reverse operation

                                                                          Hysteresis (OUT1)


                                                    ON




                                                    OFF                                   PV

                                                                   Set point




     F   3Ćposition           • In heating and cooling control, a dead band (an area where both control
                                outputs are 0) can be set to either the heating or cooling side. So,
         control
                                3Ćposition control is made possible.
                                                               Reverse operation

                                                                                   Dead band



                                         Hysteresis (OUT1)                           Hysteresis (OUT2)


                                              ON

                                                     Heating                       Cooling
                                                     side                          side
                                              OFF                                                        PV

                                                                     Set point




3-10
3.7 Executing ON/OFF Control




Parameters
                                        Symbol        Parameter Name: Level                     Description

                                                 Standard/heating and cooling:       For specifying control method
                                                     Initial setting level

                                                 PID / ON/OFF:                       For specifying control method
                                                     Initial setting level

                                                 Direct/reverse operation:           For specifying control method
                                                     Initial setting level

                                                 Dead band:                          Heating and cooling control
                                                     Adjustment level

                                                 Cooling coefficient:                Heating and cooling control
                                                     Adjustment level

                                                 Hysteresis (OUT1):                  ON/OFF control
                                                     Adjustment level

                                                 Hysteresis (OUT2):                  ON/OFF control
                                                     Adjustment level



J   Setup                              To execute ON/OFF control, set the set point, PID / ON/OFF and
                                       hysteresis parameters.


•   Setting the PID / ON/OFF parameter


                                       In this example, let's first check that the PID / ON/OFF parameter is set
Operation Procedure
                                       to        in the initial setting level.


Operation level                        (1) Press the       key for at least three seconds to move from the operaĆ
                        PV
                                           tion level to the initial setting level.
                                       (2) The input type is the first parameter displayed when you have
Initial setting level
                        Input type
                                           moved to the initial setting level.
                                       (3) Select the PID / ON/OFF parameter by pressing the                key.
                                       (4) Check that the set value is           (default).
                        PID / ON/OFF
                                       (5) To return to the operation level press the           key for at least one
                                           second.




                                       Next, set the set point value.
•   Setting the SP


                                       In this example, set the set point value (200). The lower display (No.2 disĆ
Operation Procedure
                                       play) shows the set value (SP value).


Operation level                        (1) Select PV/SP at the operation level.
                        PV/SP
                                       (2) Use the         keys to set the SP value. (For example, 200) To set the
                                           value either press the      key or wait more than two seconds.




                                                                                                                     3-11
CHAPTER 3 BASIC OPERATION




 3.8       Determining PID Constants (AT, ST, manual setup)



 J   AT (autoĆtuning)   • When you execute autoĆtuning, the optimum PID constants for the set
                          point during program execution are automatically set by forcibly changĆ
                          ing the manipulated variable to calculate the characteristics (called the
                          limit cycle method) of the control target.
                        • To execute AT (autoĆtuning), specify  : AT execute, and to cancel AT
                          (autoĆtuning), specify   : AT cancel.
                        • AT (autoĆtuning) cannot be executed during ON/OFF control or STOP.
                        • The result of AT (autoĆtuning) is mirrored in the proportional band
                          (P), integral time (I) and derivative time (D) parameters in the
                          adjustment level.
                              Adjustment level
                                                 Proportionalband



                                                 Integratedtime



                                                 Derivative time




     F   Description    AT (autoĆtuning) is started when the AT execute/cancel parameter is set
                        to ON. During execution of AT, the No.1 display for the AT execute/canĆ
                        cel parameter blinks. When AT ends, the AT execute/cancel parameter
                        turns OFF, and the No.1 display stops blinking.


                        AT execute/cancel                                            No.1 display
                                                                          During AT execution

                        If you move to the operation level during AT execution, the No.2 display
                        blinks to indicate that AT is being executed.

                        PV/SP                                                        No.2 display


                                                                          During AT execution

                        Only the communications writing, run/stop and AT execution/canĆ
                        cel parameters can be changed during AT execution. Other parameters
                        cannot be changed.




3-12
3.8 Determining PID Constants (AT, ST, manual setup)




                                      Execute autoĆtuning (AT).
Operation Procedure




Adjustment Level                      (1) Press the       key for less than one second to move from the operaĆ
                        AT execute/
                        cancel            tion level to the adjustment level.
                                      (2) Press the     key to start execution of AT (autoĆtuning).
                                            is displayed during AT execution.
                                      (3)       is displayed when AT ends.
                                      (4) To return to the operation level, press the          key.
Operation level
                        PV




J    ST (selfĆtuning)                 The ST (selfĆtuning) function executes tuning from the start of program
                                      execution to calculate the PID constants matched to the control target.
                                      Once the PID constants have been calculated, ST is not executed when the
                                      next control operation is started as long as the set point remains
                                      unchanged.


                                      ST (selfĆtuning) is executed when the ST parameter is set to ON in the
                                      initial setting level.
                                      When the ST function is in operation, be sure to turn the power supply of
                                      the load connected to the control output ON simultaneously with or before
                                      starting operation of the E5GN.
                                      Execute selfĆtuning (ST).
Operation Procedure




Initial setting level                 (1) Press the       key for at least three seconds to move from the operaĆ
                        Input type
                                          tion level to the initial setting level.
                                      (2) Select the ST parameter by pressing the            key.
                                      (3) Press the       key to select      (default).
                                      (4) To return to the operation level, press the  key. The temperature
                                          display blinks during selfĆtuning (ST) execution.

ST




            About PID parameĆ         When control characteristics are already known, the PID constants can be set
            ters                      directly to adjust control.
                                      PID parameters are set in the proportional band (P), integrated time (I) and
                                      derivative time (D) parameters in the adjustment level.


                                                                                                                  3-13
CHAPTER 3 BASIC OPERATION

    F   ST start                      SelfĆtuning by step response tuning (SRT) is started when the following
        conditions                    conditions are met after program execution is started and the set point is
                                      changed.
                                              At Start of Program Execution                     When Set Point Is Changed

                                      1. Theset point at the start of program execuĆ    1. The new set point differs from the set point
                                         tion differs from the set point (See Note 1)      (See Note 1) used when the previous SRT
                                         when the previous SRT was executed.               was executed.
                                      2. The difference between the temperature at      2. The set point change width is larger than(curĆ
                                         start of program execution is larger than         rentproportionalband 1.27+4_C)orthe(ST
                                         (current proportional band 1.27+4_C) or           stable range) whichever is larger.
                                         the (ST stable range) whichever is larger.     3. Duringreverse operation, the new set point
                                      3. The temperature at the start of program           is larger than the set point before the
                                         executionis smaller than the set point            change; and during direct operation, the
                                         duringreverse operation, and is larger than       new set point is smaller than the set point
                                         the set point during direct operation.            beforethe change.
                                      4. No reset from input error                      4. The temperature is in a stable state (See
                                                                                           Note2). (An equilibrium state is acceptable
                                                                                           when the output is 0% when the power is
                                                                                           turned ON.)
                                      Note:

                                        (1) The previous SRT-implemented set point is called the set point obĆ
                                            tained by calculating the PID constant by the previous SRT.
                                        (2) In this state, the measurement point is within the ST stable range.
                                        (3) In this state, the change width of the PV every 60 seconds is at the
                                            ST stable range or less.


                                      PID constants are not modified for the currently preset set point by self-
                                      tuning (ST) in the following instances:
                                        (1) When the PID constants have been changed manually with ST set
                                            to ON.
                                        (2) When auto-tuning (AT) has been executed.



    F   ST stable range


                                      The ST stable range is a condition for determining the conditions under
 Operation Procedure
                                      which ST (selfĆtuning) functions.
                                      In this example, let's set the ST stable range to 20_C.


 Advanced function setting level      (1) Select the ST stable range parameter by pressing the     key in the
                    ST stable range       advanced function setting level.
                                          To move to this level, see 4.7 To Move to the Advanced Function SetĆ
                                          ting Level.
                                      (2) Set to 20_C (deviation) using the                    key.




3-14
3.8 Determining PID Constants (AT, ST, manual setup)




J Manual setup                       The individual PID constants can be manually set in the Proportional
                                     band, Integral time and Derivative time parameters in the adjustĆ
                                     ment level.


                                     In this example, let's set the proportional band parameter to 10.0, the
Operation Procedure
                                     integrated time parameter to 250 and the derivative time parameĆ
                                     ter to 45.


Adjustment level                     (1) Press the    key to move from the operation level to the adjustĆ
                      AT execute/
                      cancel
                                         ment level.
                                     (2) Select proportional band by pressing the               key.
                      Proportional
                      band           (3) Press the        or       key to set the parameter to 10.0.
                                     (4) Select integrated time by pressing the              key.
                                     (5) Press the        or       key to set the parameter to 250.

                      Integrated
                                     (6) Select derivative time by pressing the             key.
                      time           (7) Press the        or       key to set the parameter to 45.
                                     (8) To return to the operation level, press the                key.


                      Derivative
                      time




          Proportional               When PID constants I (integral time) and D (derivative time) are set to 0, control
          Operation                  is executed according to proportional operation. The default set point becomes the
                                     center value of the proportional band.
                                     Related parameter
                                     manual reset value (adjustment level)


                                                                                                                     3-15
CHAPTER 3   BASIC OPERATION




                         •   When P (proportional band) is adjusted


                                       Set                          The curve rises gradually, and a long
                         When P is     Value                        stable time is achieved, preventing
                         increased                                  overshoot.


                                                                    Overshoot and hunting occur, howĆ
                                       Set
                         When P is     Value                        ever the set point is quickly reached
                         decreased                                  after which the curve stabilizes.




                         •   When I (integral time) is adjusted

                         When I is                                  It takes a long time for the process
                         increased     Set                          value to reach the set point. It takes
                                       Value
                                                                    time to achieve a stable state, howĆ
                                                                    ever there is little overshoot/underĆ
                                                                    shoot and hunting.

                         When I is     Set
                                                                    Overshoot/undershoot     and   hunting
                         decreased     Value                        occur, and the curve rises quickly.




                         •   When D (derivative time) is adjusted

                         When D is                                  Overshoot/undershoot     and    stable
                                       Set
                         increased     Value                        time are reduced, however, fine huntĆ
                                                                    ing occurs on changes in the curve
                                                                    itself.

                         When D is     Set
                                                                    Overshoot/undershoot increase, and
                         decreased     Value                        it takes time for the process value to
                                                                    reach the set point.




3-16
3.9 Alarm Output




3.9   Alarm Output



                • Alarm output conditions are determined by the combination of alarm
                  type, alarm value and alarm hysteresis. For detail, see 4.2 Alarm
                  hysteresis.
                • Alarms are supported on the E5GNĆ 1 j jjj     (1Ćalarm model).
                • The following describes the alarm type, alarm value, upperĆlimit
                  alarm and lowerĆlimit alarm parameters.




                                                                                     3-17
CHAPTER 3   BASIC OPERATION




 J Alarm type                                                                      Alarm Output Operation
                             Set               Alarm Type
                            Value                                        When alarm value        When alarm value
                                                                           X is positive            X is negative
                               0      Alarm function OFF                                                     Output OFF



                      *1                                                                         L       H
                                      UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit                 ON
                               1                                                                                              *2
                                      (deviation)                            OFF
                                                                                                 SP

                                                                                                         X                          X
                                                                             ON                                               ON
                               2      UpperĆlimit(deviation)
                                                                             OFF                                              OFF
                                                                                                 SP                                 SP

                                                                                                 X                                      X
                                                                             ON                                               ON
                               3      LowerĆlimit(deviation)
                                                                             OFF                                              OFF
                                                                                                 SP                                 SP

                      *1                                                                         L       H
                                      UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit                 ON
                               4                                                                                              *3
                                      range (deviation)                      OFF
                                                                                                 SP

                      *1              UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit                                     L       H
                                                                             ON
                               5      with standby sequence                                                                   *4
                                                                             OFF
                                      (deviation)                                                SP

                                                                                                         X                          X
                                      UpperĆlimit with standby               ON                                               ON
                               6
                                      sequence (deviation)                   OFF                                              OFF
                                                                                                 SP                                 SP

                                                                                             X                                              X
                                      LowerĆlimit with standby               ON                                               ON
                               7
                                      sequence (deviation)                   OFF                                              OFF
                                                                                                 SP                                 SP

                                                                                                     X                                  X
                                                                             ON                                               ON
                               8      AbsoluteĆvalueupperĆlimit
                                                                             OFF                                              OFF
                                                                                         0                                                      0

                                                                                                     X                                  X
                                                                             ON                                               ON
                               9      AbsoluteĆvaluelowerĆlimit
                                                                             OFF                                              OFF
                                                                                             0                                                  0

                                                                                                     X                                  X
                                      AbsoluteĆvalue upperĆlimit             ON                                               ON
                              10
                                      with standby sequence                  OFF                                              OFF
                                                                                             0                                                  0

                                                                                                     X                                  X
                                      AbsoluteĆvalue lowerĆlimit             ON                                               ON
                              11
                                      with standby sequence                  OFF                                              OFF
                                                                                             0                                                  0

                           *1 : The upperĆ and lowerĆlimit values, expressed as L and H, can be set independently for each alarm
                                                                                  
                                point with set values 1, 4 and 5.
                           *2 : Set value : 1 UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm
                                   Case 1            Case 2              Case 3 (Normally ON)
                                                                                                             H  0, L  0
                                       L    H SP       SP L    H                  L    SP        H


                                                                                                                    y
                                      H  0, L  0     H  0, L  0                                          H  0, L  0
                                        |H|  |L|        |H|  |L|           H        L SP                    |H|       |L|



                                                                                                                    x
                                                                                                             H  0, L  0
                                                                                       SP H          L        |H|       |L|
                           *3 : Set value : 4 UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit range
                                   Case 1            Case 2              Case 3 (Normally OFF)
                                                                                                             H  0, L  0

                                       L    H SP       SP L   H                  L     SP        H


                                                                                                                    y
                                                                                                             H  0, L  0
                                      H  0, L  0     H  0, L  0
                                                                             H        L SP                    |H|       |L|
                                        |H|  |L|        |H|  |L|


                                                                                                                    x
                                                                                                             H  0, L  0

                                                                                       SP H          L        |H|       |L|
                           *4 : Set value : 5 UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm with standby sequence
                                *For the above upperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm
                                Ć In cases 1 and 2, the alarm is normally OFF if upperĆ and lowerĆlimit values of hysteresis overlap.
                                Ć In case 3, the alarm is normally OFF.
                           *5 : Set value : 5 UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm with standby sequence
                                The alarm is normally OFF if upperĆ and lowerĆlimit values of hysteresis overlap.
                           • Set the alarm type in the alarm 1 type parameter (initial setting level).
                             Default is 2: upperĆlimit alarm (deviation).




3-18
3.9 Alarm Output




J Alarm value                               • Alarm values are indicated by X in the table on the previous page.
                                              When the upper and lower limits are set independently, H is displayed
                                LowerĆlimit
                                alarm value1 for upper limit values, and L is displayed for lower limit values.
                                                                           
                                               • To set the upperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm values for deviation, set the
                                UpperĆlimit
                                alarm value1     upper and lower limits in each of the Upper limit alarm value 1 and
                                                 Lower limit alarm value 1 parameters (operation level).
                                Alarm value1




                                               Set alarm 1 to the upperĆlimit alarm. The following shows related
Operation Procedure
                                               parameters and setups. In this example, the alarm output is active when
                                               the set point is exceeded by 10_C. (The temperature unit in this example
                                               is _C.)
                                                      alarm 1 type      = 2: upperĆlimit alarm (deviation)
                                                      alarm value 1 = 10


Initial setting level                          (1) Press the       key for at least three seconds to move from the operaĆ
                        Input type
                                                   tion level to the initial setting level.
                                               (2) Select the alarm 1 type parameter by pressing the      key. Check
                        Alarm 1 type
                                                   that the alarm type parameter is set to 2 (default, upperĆlimit
Operation level                                    alarm).
                        PV/SP
                                               (3) To return to the operation level press the       key for at least one
                                                   second.
                        Alarm value 1
                                               (4) Select alarm value 1 by pressing       .
                                               (5) Press the      key to set the parameter to 10.




                                                                                                                      3-19
CHAPTER 3 BASIC OPERATION




 3.10 Requests during Operation



                       1)   About two seconds is required for outputs to turn ON when the power

                            is turned ON. Take this into consideration when the temperature conĆ

                            troller is incorporated into a sequence circuit.

                       2)   Allow at least 30 minutes for warming up.

                       3)   When self-tuning is used, turn the temperature controller and load

                            (e.g. heater) ON simultaneously or turn the load ON before the temĆ

                            perature controller. If the load is turned ON before the temperature

                            controller, correct self-tuning and optimum control are no longer

                            possible.

                            When operation is started after warm-up, turn the power OFF once

                            after warm-up is completed, and then turn the temperature controlĆ

                            ler and load ON simultaneously (Instead of turning the temperature
                                                          .

                            controller power ON again, moving from the STOP to the RUN mode

                            also is possible.)

                       4)   The temperature controller may be subject to the influence of radio

                            interference if used near a radio, TV or wireless equipment.




3-20
CHAPTER 4 APPLIED OPERATION




CHAPTER 4     4
   APPLIED OPERATION


     4.1   Shifting Input Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                4Ć2
           Shifting input            .........................                        4Ć2
           How to calculate input shift values
           (2Ćpoint shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        4Ć3
           1Ćpoint shift method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               4Ć4

           2Ćpoint shift method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               4Ć4

           Example of 2Ćpoint temperature
           input shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      4Ć5

     4.2   Alarm Hysteresis               ......................                      4Ć6
           Standby sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               4Ć6
           Alarm latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        4Ć6
           Close in alarm/open in alarm . . . . . . . . . . . .                       4Ć7
     4.3   Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits
           (analog input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           4Ć8
           Analog input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           4Ć8
     4.4   Executing Heating and Cooling Control . .                                  4Ć9
           Heating and cooling control . . . . . . . . . . . . .                      4Ć9
           Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   4Ć10
     4.5   Setting MultiĆSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            4Ć11
           Setting the SP by key operation                        .........          4Ć11
           Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   4Ć11
     4.6   Setting the SP Upper and
           Lower Limit Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              4Ć13
           Set point limitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          4Ć13
           Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   4Ć14
     4.7   Executing the SP Ramp Function
           (limiting the SP change rate) . . . . . . . . . . . .                     4Ć15
           SP ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       4Ć15
     4.8   To Move to the Advanced Function
           Setting Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         4Ć17
     4.9   Using the Key Protect level                     .............             4Ć18
           Key protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       4Ć18


                                                                                            4-1
CHAPTER 4 APPLIED OPERATION




4.1         Shifting Input Values




J     Shifting input                     • The input shift type matched to the sensor currently selected in the
                                           input type parameter is displayed.


      F   1Ćpoint shift                  • 2Ćpoint shift is applied only for nonĆcontact temperature sensors.
                            TemperaĆ     • With 1Ćpoint shift, only the value set to the Temperature input shift
                            ture input
                            shift          parameter (adjustment level) is applied to the entire temperature input
                                           range. For example, if the input shift value is set to 1.2_C, the process
                                           value is treated as 201.2_C after input shift is applied when the proĆ
                                           cess value is 200_C.
                                                         Temperature

                                                   UpperĆlimit
                                                   value
                                                                      After shift
                                                                                              Before
                                                                                              shift
                                                   LowerĆlimit                Input shift value
                                                   value
                                                                                                        Input
                                                             0
                                                                                                  100



                                         In this example, let's shift the input of the K sensor by 1_C by 1Ćpoint
Operation Procedure

                                         input shift.


 Operation level                         Operation level
                                         (1) Press the    key to move from the operation level to the adjustĆ
 Adjustment level                            ment level.
                                         (2) Select the temperature input shift parameter by pressing the
                                             key.
                      Temperatureinput (3) Press the             or        keys to set 1.
                      shift
                                         (4) To return to the operation level, press the                      key. The process
                                             value 1_C larger than before shift is applied.
 Operation level




4-2
4.1 Shifting Input Values




    F   2Ćpoint shift                    • The input temperature range of nonĆcontact temperature sensors can
                        UpperĆlimit        be shifted by setting an individual value for the upper and lower points
                        temperature
                        input shift valĆ
                                           of the sensor range. This means that the shift can be applied equally
                        ue                 across the range with separate values for each end of the range. For
                        LowerĆlimit
                        temperature        example, if the upperĆlimit value is set to 2_C and the lowerĆlimit
                        input shift valĆ
                        ue                 value is set to 1_C, the sensor range is shifted by an average of 1.5_C
                                           at 50% input.
                                         • Set the upperĆlimit value in the upperĆlimit temperature input shift
                                           value parameter and the lowerĆlimit value in the lowerĆlimit temperaĆ
                                           ture input shift value parameter.
                                                            Temperature    UpperĆlimit temperature input shift value



                                                 UpperĆlimit
                                                 value                After shift


                                                                                       Before shift



                                              LowerĆlimit value
                                                                                                           Input
                                                               0
                                                                   LowerĆlimit temperature
                                                                                                 100
                                                                   input shift value




J   How to calculate input shift values (2Ćpoint shift)
                                 When the nonĆcontact temperature sensor model ES1A is connected to the
                                 E5GN, an offset of several to several tens of a degree can occur.
                                 For this reason, offset the readout value by 1Ćpoint or 2Ćpoint shift as
                                 described in this item. This offset occurs as a bias current for detecting
                                 controller sensor error flows to the output impedance of the nonĆcontact
                                 temperature sensor. 2Ćpoint shift can be carried out only on nonĆcontact
                                 temperature sensors, and cannot be set for other input types.
                                 [Preparations]

                                 (1) Set to the temperature range matching the input specifications of the
                                     nonĆcontact temperature sensor. (ES1A is supported only in thermoĆ
                                     couple input types on the E5GN.)
                                 (2) Prepare a thermometer capable of measuring the temperature of the
                                     control target as shown in Figure 1 so that 1Ćpoint shift or 2Ćpoint
                                     shift can be carried out.




                                                   NonĆcontact                                           (C) Control target
                                                   temperature
                                                   sensor




                                                                                                            (B) Thermometer



                                                                                          (A) E5GN

                                             Figure 1 Configuration When Compensating a NonĆcontact
                                                                     Temperature Sensor




                                                                                                                              4-3
CHAPTER 4         APPLIED OPERATION




J 1Ćpoint shift                         (1) In the configuration shown in Figure 1, bring the set point to near the
                                            value at which the temperature of the control target is to be conĆ
      method                                trolled. Let's assume that the control target temperature (C) and the
                                            control target temperature (B) are matching.
                                        (2) Check the control target temperature (B) and the controller readout
                                            (A). Take the following value as the input shift value, and set the same
 Adjustment level                           numerical values to         and       .
                    UpperĆlimit
                    temperature inĆ            control target temperature (B) Ć controller readout (A)
                    put shift value

                                            Figure 2 shows the effect of 1Ćpoint temperature input shift.
                    LowerĆlimit
                    temperature inĆ
                                        (3) After you have set the input shift values, check controller readout (A)
                    put shift value         and control target temperature (B). If they are almost the same, this
                                            completes temperature input shift.
                                                      Controller readout (A)

                                                                                                         After shift
                                               Temperature readout
                                               after shift (e.g. 120_C)                                         Input shift value (e.g. 10_C)

                                               Temperature readout
                                               before shift (e.g. 110_C)                                         Before shift




                                                                                                                            Temperature readout of
                                                                          0                           Near set point        control target (B)
                                                                                                      (e.g. 120_C)

                                                                Figure2 1Ćpoint Temperature Input Shift

J 2Ćpoint shift                         Use 2Ćpoint input shift if you want to increase the accuracy of the readout
                                        values across the range of the sensor.
      method
                                        (1) Shift the controller readout by two points, near room temperature
                                            and near the value at which the temperature of the control target is
                                            to be controlled. For this reason, bring the control target temperature
                                            to near room temperature and to near the set point, and check control
                                            target temperature (B) and controller readout (A).
                                        (2) Using equations (1) and (2) calculate the upperĆ and lowerĆlimit temĆ
                                            perature input shift values from the readout and temperature to be
                                            shifted that you obtained in step 1.
                                            Figure 3 shows the effect of shift by 2Ćpoint temperature input shift.
                                                          Controller readout (A)


                                                      Set temperature
                                                      upper limit YH                                            After shift
                                                      (e.g. 260_C)

                                                                                                                       UpperĆlimittemperature
                      Temperature readout
                                                                                                                       input shift value
                      after input shift X2 (e.g. 110_C)

                                                                                                                Before shift
                      Temperature readout
                      before input shift Y2 (e.g. 105_C)


                      Temperature readout
                      before input shift Y1 (e.g. 40_C)

                      Temperature readout
                                                                                                                           Temperature readout of
                      after input shift X1 (e.g. 25_C)
                                                                              0 X1 room temperature                        control target (B)
                           LowerĆlimit temperature
                                                                               (e.g. 25_C)       Near X2 set point (e.g. 110_C)
                           input shift value
                                                                   Set temperature
                                                                   lower limit YL (e.g. 0_C)

                                                      Figure3 2Ćpoint Temperature Input Shift


4-4
4.1 Shifting Input Values



                                          • Use the following equation to calculate the lowerĆlimit temperaĆ
                                            ture input shift value.

                                                     + YL ĆĆ Y1
                                                       Y2
                                                             Y1     {(X2 Ć Y2) Ć (X1 Ć Y1)}   ) (X1 Ć Y1)...equation 1
                                          • Use the following equation to calculate the upperĆlimit temperaĆ
                                            ture input shift value.

                                                     + YH ĆĆ Y1
                                                       Y2
                                                             Y1     {(X2 Ć Y2) Ć (X1 Ć Y1)}   ) (X1 Ć Y1)...equation 2
                                     (3) After you have set the calculated values to     and     , check
                                         controller readout (A) and control target temperature (B).
                                     (4) Although the input shift was carried out at two points, close to room
                                         temperature (ambient temperature), and near to the set point, select
                                         points close to each end of the sensor range to improve accuracy across
                                         the full range of the sensor measurement range.
                                         NOTE Before selecting these values, check that they will not damage
                                         the controller if applied.


J Example of                         In this example, we use the ES1A K 0 to 260_C specification.
   2Ćpoint                           YL an YH in equations 1 and 2 are set temperature lower limit YL is 0_C
   temperature input                 and set temperature upper limit YH is 260_C. Check the temperature of
                                     the control target.
   shift
                                     When the room temperature X1 is 25_C, the readout on the controller Y1
                                     is 40_C, and when the temperature near the set point X2 is 110_C, the
                                     readout on the controller Y2 becomes 105_C.

Adjustment level                     LowerĆlimit temperature input shift value
                   LowerĆlimittemĆ
                   perature input
                   shift value
                                              + 105Ć Ć40
                                                 0
                                                       40
                                                            {(110 Ć 105) Ć (25 Ć 40)}   ) (25 Ć 40) + Ć27.3(°C)
                   UpperĆlimittemĆ   UpperĆlimit temperature input shift value
                   perature input
                   shift value
                                              + 260 ĆĆ 40
                                                105 40
                                                            {(110 Ć 105) Ć (25 Ć 40)}   ) (25 Ć 40) + 52.7(°C)




                                                                                                                     4-5
CHAPTER 4 APPLIED OPERATION




4.2         Alarm Hysteresis



                       • The hysteresis of alarm outputs when alarms are switched ON/OFF can
                         be set as follows:
                            UpperĆlimit                                   LowerĆlimit
                            alarm                                         alarm
                                                 Alarm hysteresis                               Alarm hysteresis

                      ON                                            ON



                      OFF                                           OFF

                                          Alarm value                             Alarm value

                       • Alarm hysteresis is set independently for each alarm in the alarm hysĆ
                         teresis 1 parameters (advanced function setting level). Default is
                         0.2EU.


J     Standby          • Standby sequence is a function which allows the alarm outputs to be
                         temporarily disabled while the first alarm condition occurs. From here
      sequence
                         on, the alarm output is active for future alarm conditions.
                       • For example, in a standard heating application, if you used the standard
                         low alarm, the alarm would be active from switching the controller
                         ON. However, with Standby Sequence, the alarm output is disabled
                         during the first warmup, and the temperature has to rise above the
                         alarm set point before the alarm can become active. Then, if the temperĆ
                         ature falls below the alarm set point, the output is active.

      F   Restart      • The standby sequence is canceled when an alarm is output. It is, howĆ
                         ever, restarted later by the standby sequence parameter (advanced
                         function setting level).
                         For details, see the standby sequence parameter in Chapter 5, PaĆ
                         rameters.


J     Alarm latch      • Alarm latch is a function where alarm output once turned ON stays
                         ON regardless of the temperature.
                       • The alarm latch can be canceled by turning the power OFF. (Note, howĆ
                         ever, that it can also be canceled by switching to the initial setting level,
                         communications setting level, advanced function setting level or calĆ
                         ibration level.




4-6
4.2 Alarm Hysteresis




J   Close in alarm/        • When the E5GN is set to close in alarm, the status of the alarm output
                             is normally open. When set to open in alarm, the status of the alarm
    open in alarm
                             output is output inverted, or normally closed.
                           • Alarm type and close in alarm (normally open)/open in alarm (normally
                             closed) can be set independently for each alarm.
                           • Close in alarm/open in alarm is set in the alarm 1 open in alarm
                             parameters (advanced function setting level). Default is       : close in
                             alarm.
                           • When alarm 1 open in alarm (advanced function setting level) is set
                             to open in alarm, the heater burnout alarm and input error output
                             also become open in alarm.
                                            Alarm Output Function                     Output               Alarm LCD


                                                        ON                                  ON                 Lit
                           Close in
                           alarm                        OFF                              OFF                   Out

                                                        ON                               OFF                   Lit
                           Open in
                           alarm                        OFF                                 ON                 Out


                           Alarm output turns OFF (relay contact open) at a power interruption and
                           for about two seconds after the power is turned ON regardless of the close
                           in alarm/open in alarm setting.

    F   Summary of         The figure below visually summarizes the above description of alarm
        alarm operations   operations (when alarm type is set to lowerĆlimit alarm with standby
                           sequence and E5GN is set to close in alarm).
                                                       Alarm type: lowerĆlimit alarm with
                                                       standby sequence


                                                      PV

                                   Alarm value

                                                                                     Alarm hysteresis




                                                                                                    Time

                                                       Standby sequence
                                                       canceled                                  ON
                                          Alarm
                                                                                                 OFF
                                                                                                 ON (closed)
                                          output
                                                                                                 OFF (open)




Parameters
                            Symbol               Parameter : Level                           Description

                                      Alarm 1 hysteresis:
                                                                                 Alarm
                                          Advanced function setting level

                                      Standby sequence reset method:
                                                                                 Alarm
                                          Advanced function setting level

                                      Alarm 1 open in alarm:
                                                                                 Alarm
                                          Advanced function setting level




                                                                                                                       4-7
CHAPTER 4 APPLIED OPERATION


4.3          Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits (analog
             input)



J     Analog input                         • When an analog input (voltage input) is selected, scaling matched to the
                              Scaling        control is possible.
                              upperlimĆ    • Scaling is set in the scaling upper limit, scaling lower limit and decĆ
                              it             imal point parameters (initial setting level). These parameters cannot
                              Scaling        be used when temperature input type is selected.
                              lowerlimit   • The scaling upper limit parameter sets the physical quantity to be
                              Decimal        expressed by the upper limit value of input, and the scaling lower limit
                              point          parameter sets the physical quantity to be expressed by the lowerĆlimit
                                             value of input. The decimal point parameter specifies the number of
                                             digits past the decimal point.
                                           • The following figure shows a scaling example of 0 to 5 mV input. After
                                             scaling, the humidity can be directly read.

                                                                    Readout
                                                                    (humidity)

                                                       UpperĆlimit value (95.0%)


                                                       LowerĆlimit value (10.0%)
                                                                                    0mV
                                                                                                                 Input (mV)
                                                                               0
                                                                                                       50


                                           In this example, let's set the scaling upperĆ and lowerĆlimits so that inputs
Operation Procedure
                                           0 to 50 mV are 10.0% to 95.0%.


 Initialsettinglevel                       (1) Press the       key for at least three seconds to move from the operaĆ
                       Inputtype               tion level to the initial setting level.
                       Scaling upper       (2) Select scaling upper limit by pressing            .
                       limit
                                           (3) Press the         or         key to set the parameter to 950.
                                           (4) Select scaling lower limit by pressing           .
                       Scaling lower
                       limit               (5) Press the         or         key to set the parameter to 100.
                                           (6) Select the decimal point position by pressing            .
                       Decimalpoint        (7) Press the         or         key to set the parameter to 1.
                                           (8) To return to the operation level press the            key for at least one
                                               second.




4-8
4.4 Executing Heating and Cooling Control




4.4       Executing Heating and Cooling Control




J   Heating and                          Heating and cooling control can be used on E5ANĆ 3
                                         Heating and cooling control operates when 
                                                                                                       controllers.
                                                                                          : heating and cooling is
                                                                                                                    j jjj
    cooling control
                                         selected in the standard/heating and cooling parameter. Select the stanĆ
                                         dard heating control or cooling control according to the following table:
                                                              Setting                                               Output

                                                                        Pirect/reverse
                                           Control Method                                        Control output 1           Control output 2
                                                                           operation


                                           standard control           Reverse operation         Control output (heat)                   Ć

                                           standard control            Direct operation         Control output (cool)                   Ć

                                          Heating and cooling
                                                                      Reverse operation         Control output (heat)      Control output (cool)
                                                 control

                                          Heating and cooling
                                                                       Direct operation         Control output (cool)      Control output (heat)
                                                 control


                                         (The parameter default is heating control (standard).)
                                         • When heating and cooling control is selected, the dead band and coolĆ
                                           ing coefficient parameters can be used.
    F   Dead band                        The dead band is set with the set point as its center on the E5GNĆ 1     .                         j jj
                                         The dead band width is the set value of the dead band parameter (adjustĆ
                                         ment level). Setting a negative value produces an overlap band.
                                         Default is 0.0 EU.
                                                      Dead band:                                                        Overlap band:
                  Output                              dead band width = positive    Output                              dead band width = negative




                          Heating side                      Cooling side                     Heating side                Cooling side

                                                                            PV                                                                PV
                      0                                                                0
                                          Set point                                                         Set point



    F   Cooling                          If the heating and cooling characteristics of the control target greatly difĆ
        coefficient
                                         fer, preventing satisfactory control characteristics from being obtained by
                                         the same PID constants, adjust the proportional band (P) at the cooling
                                         side using the cooling coefficient to balance control between the heating
                                         and cooling sides. In heating and cooling control, P at the heating or coolĆ
                                         ing side is calculated by the following formula:
                                         Heating side P = P
                                                                    
                                         Cooling side P = P cooling coefficient
                                         The cooling coefficient is applied to control output 1 side P to obtain conĆ
                                         trol whose characteristics (control output 2 side P) differ from those on the
                                         control output 1 side.




                                                                                                                                               4-9
CHAPTER 4 APPLIED OPERATION



                                 Output                                                                 Output


                                                                                                                  Control output 1 side
                                                                                Control output 1 side
                                                                                  
                                                                                P 1.0                              
                                                                                                                  P 1.0




                                           Control output        Control output 2 side P                   Control output         Control output 2 side P
                                           1 side P                                                        1 side P
                                                                                           PV                                                           PV
                                       0                                                                   0
                                                        Set point                                                      Set point
                                                                              
                                                        Control output 1 side P 0.8                                                       
                                                                                                                   Control output 1 side P 1.5




 J Setup                                           To set heating and cooling control, set the standard/heating and cooling,
                                                   dead band and cooling coefficient parameters.


 • Setting heating and cooling control

                                                   standard/heating and cooling = heating and cooling
 Operation Procedure

 Initial setting level                             (1) Press the              key for at least three seconds to move from the operaĆ
                         Standard/heating
                         and cooling                        tion level to the initial setting level.
                                                   (2) Select standard heating and cooling control in the initial setting
                                                       level.
                                                                 : Standard control
                                                                      :    Heating and cooling control



 • Setting dead band

                                                   Dead band = 5
 Operation Procedure

 Adjustment level                                  (1) Select dead band in the adjustment level.
                         Dead band
                                                   (2) Use the          keys to set the parameter to 5.0.
                                                       The setting range is Ć199.9 to 999.9.




 • Setting cooling coefficient

                                                   Cooling coefficient = 10
 Operation Procedure

 Adjustment level                                  (1) Select cooling coefficient in the adjustment level.
                         Cooling
                         coefficient                   In this example, set the parameter to 10.
                                                   (2) Use the          keys to set the parameter to 10.00.
                                                       The setting range is 0.01 to 99.99.


4-10
4.5 Setting MultiĆSP




4.5          Setting MultiĆSP




J   Setting the SP by                      You can select set points 0 to 3 by changing the set value of the multiĆSP
                                           parameter. The multiĆSP display conditions are as follows:
    key operation
                                           The following table shows the relationship between the multiĆSP
                                           parameter set value and the selected set point.
                                                MultiĆSP               Selected Set Point

                                                    0                       Set point 0
                                                    1                       Set point 1
                                                    2                       Set point 2
                                                    3                       Set point 3



J   Setup                                  Before you set the MultiĆSP, cancel protection and move to the
                                           advanced function setting level.
                                           Set MultiĆSP uses to ON in the advanced function setting level.


                                           In the following example, let's set the set point to 2.
Operation Procedure




protect level                              (1) Press the     key and       key simultaneously for at least three
                        Operation

                        /adjustment
                                               seconds to move from the operation level to the protect level.
                        protection
                                                * The key pressing time can be changed in protect level move time
                                                  (advanced function level).

                        Initial setting/   (2) Select initial setting/communecations protection by pressing the
                                                    key.
                        communications

                        protection




                        Initial setup/     (3) Set the parameter to 0 (move to advanced function setting level
                        communications

                        protection
                                               enabled).
Operation level                            (4) Press the    key and      key simultaneously for at least one second
                        PV/SP

                                               to move from the protect level to the operation level.
Initial setting level                      (5) Press the      key for at least three seconds to move to the initial setĆ
                                               ting level.

                                           (6) Select move to advanced function setting level by pressing the
                                               key.
                                           (7) Press the      key to enter the Ć169 (password).

Advanced function                          (8) Select MultiĆSP uses by pressing the         key.
setting level
                                               Set the parameter to ON.

Initial setting level                      (9) Press the      key for at least one second to move to the initial setting
                                               level.
Operation level                            (10) Press the      key for at least one second to move to the operation
                                                level.


                                                                                                                     4-11
CHAPTER 4 APPLIED OPERATION



              MultiĆSP   (11) Select MultiĆSP by pressing the        key.



              MultiĆSP   (12) Press the       key to set the parameter to 2 (set point 2).




 Parameters
                          Symbol          Parameter Name: Level                   Description

                                   MultiĆSP      : Operation lenel       For setting the set points
                                   Set point 0   : Adjustment level
                                   Set point 1   : Adjustment level
                                                                         Set point 0 to 3
                                   Set point 2   : Adjustment level
                                   Set point 3   : Adjustment level


4-12
4.6 Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values




4.6     Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values




J   Set point limitter        The setting range of the set point is limited by the set point limitter. The
                              set point limitter is used to prevent the control target from reaching
                              abnormal temperatures. The upperĆ and lowerĆlimit values of this set
                              point limitter are set by the set point upper limit and set point lower
                              limit parameters in the initial setting level, respectively. However, note
                              that when the set point limitter is reset, the set point is forcibly changed
                              to the upperĆ or lowerĆlimit value of the set point limitter if the set point
                              is out of the limitter range. Also, when the input type and temperature
                              unit are changed, the set point limitter is forcibly reset to the sensor setĆ
                              ting range.

                                                                   Sensor range

                                                                Set point limitter

                          Setting range                                                                       Set point


                                                                                     Ę
                                                        Changed to the               A        B
                                                        new upper limit
                                                        value

                      Changed to upper
                                                                                                              Set point
                      limit value
                                                                              C

                      Input type changed
                                                                                                              Set point

              Set point    UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit values of the limitter
                                                                                              Ę
                                                                                              B
              Sensor upperĆ and lowerĆlimit values                                                (setting possible)
                                                                                                  (setting impossible)




Parameters
                                Symbol                  Parameters : Level                              Description

                                           Set point upper limit    : Initial setting level        For limiting SP setting

                                           Set point lower limit    : Initial setting level        For limiting SP setting




                                                                                                                          4-13
CHAPTER 4 APPLIED OPERATION




 J Setup                                   To set the set point upper and lower limits, set in the set point upper
                                           limit and set point lower limit parameters in the initial setting level.
                                           This example describes how to set the set point limitter Ć200 to 1300_C
                                           to input type K thermocouple.
                                                    Ć200                                                    1300
                                                                            Sensor range




                                                                            Set point limitter
                                                             Ć100                                   1000
 • Setting the set point upper limit

                                           Set the set point upper limit parameter to 1000.
 Operation Procedure

 Initial setting level                     (1) Press the       key for at least three seconds to move from the operaĆ
                         Input type
                                               tion level to the initial setting level.
                                           (2) Select set point upper limit.
                         Set point
                         upper limit       (3) Press the       or     key to set the parameter to 1000.




 • Setting the set point lower limit

                                           Set the set point lower limit parameter to Ć100.
 Operation Procedure

                         Set point lower   (1) Select set point lower limit in the initial setting level.
                         limit
                                           (2) Press the       or     key to set the parameter to Ć100.




4-14
4.7 Executing the SP Ramp Function (limiting the SP change rate)




4.7    Executing the SP Ramp Function (limiting the SP
       change rate)



J   SP ramp       With the SP ramp function, the controller operates according to the value
                  (set point during SP ramp) limited by a change rate. The interval in which
                  the set point during SP ramp is limited is referred to as the SP ramp.
                                           SP


                                                          SP ramp
                        SP after change




                                                                                 SP ramp set value


                                                                      Time unit of ramp rate (min.)

                      SP before change                                               Time


                                             Change point


                  The change rate during SP ramp is specified by the SP ramp set value
                  parameter. The SP ramp set value default is OFF, and the SP ramp
                  function is disabled.
                  Changing of the ramp set point can be monitored in the set point during
                  SP ramp parameter (operation level). Use this parameter during mountĆ
                  ing of the SP ramp.




Parameters
                   Symbol                Parameters : Level                   Description

                              MV upper limit :                      For limiting manipulated variable
                                  Advanced function setting level

                              MV lower limit :                      For limiting manipulated variable
                                  Advanced function setting level

                              Set point upper limit:                For limiting SP setting
                                  Initial setting level

                              Set point lower limit:                For limiting SP setting
                                  Initial setting level

                              SP ramp set value:                    For limiting SP change rate
                                  Advanced function setting level




                                                                                                      4-15
CHAPTER 4 APPLIED OPERATION



   F Operation at start     If the SP ramp function is enabled when the E5GN is turned ON, and when
                            run is switched to from stop, the process value may reach the set point
                            after SP ramp in the same way as when the set point is changed. In this
                            case, operation is carried out with the process value regarded as the set
                            point before the change was made.
                            The direction of the SP ramp changes according to the relationship
                            between the process value and the set point.

                                                 PV  SP                          PV  SP
                                      SP                                   SP
                                                                                 SP ramp
                                                  SP ramp
                          Set point                                  PV                     Same
                                                                                            change rate

                                                               Set point


                               PV
                                                            Time                                     Time
                                           Power ON                         Power ON

   F Restrictions           • Execution of autoĆtuning starts after the end of SP ramp.
       during SP ramp       • When control is stopped or an error occurs, the SP ramp function is disĆ
       operation              abled.




4-16
4.8 To Move to the Advanced Function Setting Level




4.8          To Move to the Advanced Function Setting Level



                                             To move to the advanced function setting level, you must cancel initial
                                             setting/communications protection in the protect level.
                                             In the default setting, you cannot move to the advanced function setting
                                             level.


                                             (1) Press the     and       keys simultaneously for at least three seconds
                                                 in the operation level.
                                                  * The key pressing time can be changed in protect level move time
                                                    (advanced function level).

Protect level                                (2) The controller moves to the protect level, and operation/adjustment
                        operation/adjustĆ
                        ment protection         protection is displayed.


                        initial setting/    (3) Press the       key once to move to initial setting/communications
                        communications
                        protection              protection.


                                             (4) Set the set value to 0



Operation level                              (5) Press the       and        keys simultaneously to return to the operaĆ
                        PV/SP
                                                 tion level.

Initial setting level                        (6) Press the      key for at least three seconds to move to the initial setĆ
                        Input type
                                                 ting level from the operation level.


                        Move to advanced     (7) Select the Move to advanced function setting level parameter by
                        function setting
                        level                    pressing the    key.



Advanced function                            (8) Press the    key to enter the password (Ć169), and either press the
setting level
                                                     key or leave the setting for at least two seconds to move to the
                                                 advanced function setting level from the initial setting level.




                                                                                                                       4-17
CHAPTER 4       APPLIED OPERATION




 4.9       Using the Key Protect level




 J   Key protect             • To move to the protect level, press the              and      keys simultaneously
                               for at least three seconds.
                              * The key pressing time can be changed in protect level move time
                                (advanced function level).
                             • The protect level protects parameters that are not changed during conĆ
                               troller operation until operation is started to prevent them from being
                               modified unintentionally. Three levels of protection are provided on the
                               E5GN, operation/adjustment protection, initial setting/communicaĆ
                               tions protection and setting change protection.
                             • The protect level setting restricts the range of parameters that can be used.


     F   Operation/adjustĆ   The following table shows the relationship between set values and the
         ment protection     range of protection.
                                                                Set value
                                        Level
                                                           0     1     2        3


                                           PV              f f f f                        : Can be displayed and
                              Operation
                              O     i
                                           PV/SP                 f                    f
                                                                                           changed


                                                                                      
                                                                                          : Can be displayed

                                                                    
                                level
                                                                                          : Cannot be displayed
                                           Other


                                                                   
                                                                                           and move to other levels
                                Adjustment level                                           not possible


                             • When this parameter is set to 0, parameters are not protected.
                             • Default is 0.


     F   Initial setting/    This protect level restricts movement to the initial setting level, commuĆ
         communications      nication setting level and advanced function setting level.
         protection
                                                                                     Move to communications
                              Set value         Move to initial setting level
                                                                                           setting level


                                           Possible (move to advanced function
                                  0        setting level enabled parameter disĆ              Possible
                                           played)

                                           Possible (move to advanced function
                                  1        setting level enabled parameter not               Possible
                                           displayed)

                                  2        Not possible                                      Not possible



                             • Default is 1.


     F   Setting change      This protect level protects setup from being changed by operating the keys
         protection          on the front panel.
                              Set value                                     Description


                                OFF        Setup can be changed by key operation.

                                 ON        Setup cannot be changed by key operation. (The protect level can be
                                           changed.)


                             • Default is OFF.


4-18
CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS




CHAPTER 5       5
   PARAMETERS




     Conventions Used in this Chapter                          . . . . . . . . . . . .     5Ć2

     Protect Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           5Ć3

     Operation Level            . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    5Ć4

     Adjustment Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               5Ć10

     Initial Setting Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              5Ć17

     Advanced Function Setting Level . . . . . . . . . . . . .                            5Ć25

     Communications Setting Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                           5Ć36




                                                                                                 5-1
CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS
       Conventions Used in this Chapter

J Meanings of icons used in this chapter
                       Describes the functions of the parameter.


      Function


                       Describes the setting range and defaults of the parameter setting.


      Comment


                       Describes the monitor range.


      Monitor


                       Describes the parameter operations.


      Example
      of use
                       Describes related parameters and items.


        See




J About parameter display
              Parameters are displayed only when the Conditions of Use on the right of the parameter headĆ
              ing are satisfied. However, note that the settings of protected parameters are still valid, and are
              not displayed regardless of the conditions of use.




                                               AT Execute/cancel       The control must be
                                                                       2ĆPID control.




                            Displayed symbol      Parameter name       Conditions of use


J About the Order in Which Parameters Are Described in This Chapter
              Parameters are described level by level.
              The first page of each level lists the parameters available in that level. The parameter names in
              this list are listed in the order that they are displayed on the E5GN.




5-2
Protect Level


      Three levels of protection are provided on the E5GN, operation/adjustment protection, initial
      setting/communications protection and setting change protection. These protect levels preĆ
      vent unwanted operation of the keys on the front panel in varying degrees.
             Power ON
                                                                                        +       key
                                                                                                                     Protect level
                                                                                    3 seconds min.

            Operation                    Adjustment
            level                        level                                                                                                           Page
                                   key
                             1 second

                                 min.                                                                                         Operation/adjustment
                                                                                                                                                          5Ć3
                                                                  +       key
                                                                1 second min.
                                                                                                                              protection
                                                                                                                              Initial setting/commuĆ
                                                                                                                              nications protection        5Ć3
                                                                                Protect
                                                                                level
                                                                                                                              Setting change
                                                                                                                                                          5Ć3
                                             Control in progress                                                              protection

      To    move    from   the   operation   level   to   the    protect    level,      press
      the     and      keys for at least three seconds.


                                                                                                            The settings of protected parameters are not displayed
                                                                                                            and so cannot be modified.




                      Operation/adjustment protection



                      Initial setting/communications protection



                      Setting change protection




      This parameter specifies the range of parameters to be protected.  indicates the default.
                     F
                Operation/adjustment protection
                The following table shows the relationship between set values and the range of
                protection.
Function


                                                                            Set value
                                         Level
                                                                      0         1           2         3
                                                                                                                 : Can be displayed and changed
                                                                      f f f f                               f
                                                                                                            
                                             PV                                                                  : Can be displayed
Comment
                           Operation
                           O     i
                                             PV/SP                          f                                    : Cannot be displayed and move to


                                                                           
                                 level                                                                             other levels not possible
                                             Other

                                 Adjustment level                         
                      • Parameter items are not protected when the set value is set to 0.
                     F Initial setting/communications protection
                           This protect level restricts movement to the initial setting level and communication
                           setting level.
                                             Set value                Move to initial setting level                   Move to communications setting level


                                                                 Possible (move to advanced funcĆ
                                                     0           tion setting level enabled parameĆ                                       Possible
                                                                 ter displayed)

                                                                 Possible (move to advanced funcĆ
                                                     1           tion setting level enabled parameĆ                                       Possible
                                                                 ter not displayed)

                                                     2           Not possible                                                         Not possible


                     F Setting change protection
                           Changes to setups by key operation are restricted.
                           Set value                                                                      Description

                                 OFF         Setup can be changed by key operation.

                                 ON          Setup cannot be changed by key operation. (The protect level can be changed.)




                                                                                                                                                                     5-3
CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS
  Operation Level
       Display this level when you are to carry out control opĆ
       erations on the E5GN. You can set alarm values or                            Operation level
       monitor the manipulated variable in this level.
                                                                                                                 Page
                 Power ON                                                                  PV
                                                                                                                  5Ć5

                 Operation                          Adjustment                             PV/SP                  5Ć5
                 level                    key
                                                    level
                                     less than
                                       1 sec.                                              MultiĆSP               5Ć5
                                                  key 3 seconds min.
                      key
                   1 second                            key Flashes at 1 sec. min.
                                                                                           Set point during SP    5Ć6
                     min.                                                                  ramp
                                                      Control stop
                                                                                           Run/stop
                                                                                                                  5Ć7
                                                             CommuĆ
                   Initial setting                           nications                     Alarm value 1
                   level                              key    setup level                                          5Ć7
                                                 less than
                                                   1 sec.                                  UpperĆlimit alarm
                                                                                           value 1                5Ć8

                                                                                           LowerĆlimit alarm
                                                             Control in progress           value 1                5Ć8
                                                             Control stopped
                                                                                           MV monitor (OUT1)      5Ć8
       This level is automatically displayed immediately after                             MV monitor (OUT2)      5Ć9
       the E5GN is turned ON. To move to other levels, press
       the      key or the     and        keys.
       • You can change process value/set point by setting
         operation/adjustment protection to 0, 1, or 2. Process
         value/set point is displayed by setting value 3 only.
       • Protect setting is set in operation/adjustment
         protection level.




5-4
Operation Level




           PV                                                       The additional PV display parameter must
                                                                    be set to ON.




             The process value is displayed on the No.1 display, and nothing is displayed (blank)
             on the No.2 display.
Function


                                                             Monitor Range                               Unit

              Process
                          Input indication range (See page AĆ10).                                         EU
                Value

Monitor
             The decimal point position is dependent on the selected sensor.


           F Related parameters
             Input type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć18)
  See
             Set point upper limit Set point lower limit (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć20)




           PV/SP1.



             The process value is displayed on the No.1 display, and the set point is displayed on
             the No.2 display.
Function


                                                             Monitor Range                               Unit

              Process
                          Input indication range (See page AĆ10).                                         EU
                Value

              Set Point   Set point lower limit to set point upper limit                                  EU




             Refer to the PV parameter.


  See




           MultiĆSP (set point 0 to 3)                              The multiĆSP uses parameter must be set to
                                                                    ON.




             MultiĆSP allows you to set up to four set points (SP 0 to 3) in adjustment level. These
             can be switched by operating the keys on the front panel. In the parameter, enter set
Function
             points 0 to 3.


           • MultiĆSP can also be selected by communications.


  See

                                                                                                                5-5
CHAPTER 5         PARAMETERS


  Operation Level

                      Set point during SP ramp                           The SP ramp set value parameter must not
                                                                         be set to OFF.




              This parameter monitors the set point during SP ramp.

                        Ramp is a function for restricting the change width of the set point as a change rate.
                        The set value is displayed when SP ramp set value parameter (advanced function
      Function
                        setting level) is set.
                        When the set point is out of the preset ramp, the set point is matched to the set point
                        set in the PV/SP parameter.


                                                          Monitor Range                                   Unit
                         SP: Set point lower limit to set point upper limit                               EU


      Monitor




                      F Related parameters
                        PV/SP (operation level) (p. 5Ć5)
        See
                        SP ramp set value (advanced function setting level) (p. 5-27)
                        Set point upper limit Set point lower limit (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć20)




5-6
Operation Level




                 Run/Stop




        This parameter specifies run and stop.

                   When        : run is selected, control is running. When        : stop is selected, conĆ
                   trol is stopped. When control is stopped, the          display lights.
                   Default is      .
Function




                 Alarm value 1                                The control must be set to standard control.
                                                              The alarm type must be set to other than upĆ
                                                              per and lower limit alarm.



        This parameter sets the input value X in the alarm type list.

                 • This parameter is used for setting the alarm values of alarm outputs.
                 • During temperature input, the decimal point position is dependent on the currently
Function           selected sensor, and during analog input it is dependent on the decimal point
                   parameter setting.

                         Setting Range              Unit          Default

                          Ć1999 to 9999              EU              0

Comment
                   This parameter can be set alarm function OFF or other than upper and lower limit
                   alarm.

  See
                   F Related parameters
                     Input type Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit Decimal point
                     Alarm 1 type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć18, 19)
                     Alarm 1 open in alarm Alarm 1 hysteresis (p. 5Ć29) Standby sequence reset
                     method (p. 5Ć28) Alarm latch (p. 5Ć34) (advanced function setting level)




                                                                                                           5-7
CHAPTER 5         PARAMETERS


  Operation Level




                       UpperĆlimit alarm value 1                    The control must be set to standard control.
                                                                    Alarm 1 type must be set to upper and lower
                                                                    limits, upper and lower limit range, or upperĆ
                       LowerĆlimit alarm value 1
                                                                    and lowerĆlimit alarm with standby sequence.




              This parameter independently sets the upperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm values when the mode for
              setting the upper and lower limits is selected for alarm 1 type (initial setting level).

                       • This parameter sets the upper and lower limit values of alarm 1.
                       • During temperature input, the decimal point position is dependent on the currently
      Function           selected sensor, and during analog input it is dependent on the decimal point
                        parameter setting.
                               Setting Range             Unit           Default

                               Ć1999 to 9999             EU                  0


      Comment



                      F Related parameters
                        Alarm 1 type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć23)
        See
                        Standby sequence reset method (p. 5Ć28) Alarm 1 open in alarm Alarm 1
                        hysteresis (p. 5Ć29) Alarm 1 latch (p. 5Ć34) (advanced function setting level)




                       MV monitor (OUT1)                            Manipulated variable display must be set to
                                                                    ON.




              This parameter is for monitoring the manipulated variable during operation.

                       • This parameter cannot be set.
                       • During standard control, the manipulated variable is monitored, and during heating
      Function
                         and cooling control, the manipulated variable on the control output 1 side is moniĆ
                         tored.
                       • Default is OFF and the manipulated variable is not displayed.


                                  Control                 Monitor Range               Unit

                                  Standard                    0.0 to 100.0             %

                             Heating and cooling              0.0 to 100.0             %
      Monitor




                      F Related parameter
                        Manipulated variable display (advanced setting level) (p. 5Ć33)
        See




5-8
Operation Level




                 MV monitor (OUT2)                         The control must be heating and cooling conĆ
                                                           trol.
                                                           Manipulated variable display must be set to
                                                           ON.




        This parameter is for monitoring the manipulated variable on the control output 2 side during
        operation.

                 • During heating and cooling control, the manipulated variable on the control output
                   2 side (OUT 2 terminal output) is monitored.

Function



                            Control                Monitor Range            Unit

                       Heating and cooling           0.0 to 100.0            %




                F Related parameters
                   Standard/heating and cooling (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć19)
  See
                   Manipulated variable display (advanced function setting level) (p. 5Ć29)




                                                                                                    5-9
CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS
   Adjustment Level
       This level is for executing AT (autoĆtuning) or setting up the control.
       This level provides you with basic controller setup parameters for PID (proportional band, inteĆ
       gral time, derivative time).
          Power ON
                                                                      Adjustment level
          Operation               Adjustment
          level                   level                                                                Page
                          key
                      less than
                        1 sec.                                                AT execute/cancel        5Ć11
                                               Control in progress
                                                                              Communications
                                                                              writing                  5Ć11
       To move to the adjustment level from the operation
       level, press the  key for less than one second.                        Set point 0
                                                                                                       5Ć12
       • The set points 0 to 3 in the adjustment level are set
         values for switching the set point during multiĆSP                   Set point 1
                                                                                                       5Ć12
         input.
       • You can change adjustment level parameters by setĆ                   Set point 2
                                                                                                       5Ć12
         ting operation/adjustment protection to 0. If the
         protect level is set 1 to 3, adjustment level                    Set point 3
                                                                                                       5Ć12
         parameters cannot be displayed and the adjustment
         level cannot be moved to.                                            Temperature input
                                                                              shift value              5Ć13


                                                                              UpperĆlimit temperaĆ
                                                                              ture input shift value   5Ć13


                                                                              LowerĆlimit temperaĆ
                                                                              ture input shift value   5Ć13


                                                                              Proportional band        5Ć14


                                                                              Integral time
                                                                                                       5Ć14


                                                                              Derivative time
                                                                                                       5Ć14


                                                                              Cooling coefficient
                                                                                                       5Ć15


                                                                              Dead band
                                                                                                       5Ć15


                                                                              Manual reset value
                                                                                                       5Ć16


                                                                              Hysteresis (OUT1)
                                                                                                       5Ć16


                                                                              Hysteresis (OUT2)
                                                                                                       5Ć16




5-10
Adjustment Level




                 AT execute/cancel                           The E5GN must be in operation, and control

                                                             must be 2ĆPID control.




         This parameter executes AT (autoĆtuning).

                 • When you execute autoĆtuning, the optimum PID parameters proportional band,
                   integral time and derivative time for the set point during program execution are
Function
                   automatically set by forcibly changing the manipulated variable to calculate the
                   characteristics of the control target.


                 • Normally, this parameter is set to      . If you press the        or    keys, the paramĆ
                   eter is turned ON and AT is executed.
Example            AT cannot be executed when control has stopped or during ON/OFF control.
of use
                 • When AT execution ends, the parameter setting automatically returns to               .


                 F Related parameters
                   Proportional band Integral time Derivative time (adjustment level) (p. 5Ć14)
  See
                   PID / ON/OFF (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć21)




                 Communications writing                      Model E5GNĆ    j j   03   must be used.




                   This parameter enables/disables writing of parameters to the E5GN from the host
                   (personal computer) by communications.
Function




                   ON      : Writing enabled
                   OFF     : Writing disabled
                   Default : OFF
Comment




                 F Related parameters
                   MB command logic switching (advanced function level) (p.5Ć36)
  See
                   Communication unit No. Baud rate Data bit Parity Stop bit (communicaĆ
                   tions setting level) (p. 5Ć37)




                                                                                                          5-11
CHAPTER 5          PARAMETERS


   Adjustment Level


                        Set point 0                                      The MultiĆSP uses parameter must be set to
                                                                         ON.

                        Set point 1

                        Set point 2

                        Set point 3



               These parameters set the set points when the multiĆSP function is used.

                          The values set in these parameters can be selected by operating the keys on the front
                          panel.
       Function
                          • When the set point has been changed, the set value of these parameters currently
                            set by multiĆSP is linked and changed.
                          • During temperature input, the decimal point position is dependent on the selected
                            sensor.
                          During analog input, the decimal point position is dependent on the setting of the
                          decimal point position parameter.


                                              Setting Range                             Unit        Default
                                Set point lower limit to set point upper limit          EU             0


   Comment


                       F Related parameters
                          PV/SP (operation level) (p. 5Ć5)
         See
                          Input type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć18)
                          MultiĆSP uses (advanced function setting level) (p. 5Ć26)




5-12
Adjustment Level

                 Temperature input shift                         The input type parameter must be set to
                                                                 temperature input excluding a nonĆcontact
                                                                 temperature sensor.




        Sometimes an error between the set point and the actual temperature occurs. To offset this, a
        value obtained by adding an input shift value to the input is displayed as the measurement value
        and used for control.

                   The entire input range is shifted by a fixed rate (1Ćpoint shift). If the input shift value
                   is set to Ć1_C, the set point is controlled to a value obtained by subtracting 1_C from
Function
                   the actual temperature.


                          Setting Range               Unit          Default
                          Ć199.9 to 999.9         _C or _F            0.0


Comment



                 F Related parameter
                   Input type (initial setting level)
  See




                 UpperĆlimit temperature                         The input type parameter must be set to

                 input shift value                               only the nonĆcontact temperature sensor.


                 LowerĆlimit temperature
                 input shift value

        Whereas the entire input range is shifted by a fixed rate (1Ćpoint shift) in the temperature input
        shift parameter, the input range is shifted by two points (2Ćpoint shift) at the upper and lower
        limits. 2Ćpoint shift enables more accurate offset of the input range compared with 1Ćpoint shift,
        if the input shift values at the upper and lower limits differ.

                   This parameter sets input shift values for each of the upper and lower limits (2Ćpoint
                   shift) of the input range.
Function

                          Setting Range               Unit          Default
                          Ć199.9 to 999.9         _C or   _  F        0.0


Comment


                 F Related parameter
                   Input type (initial setting level)
  See




                                                                                                          5-13
CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS
   Adjustment Level

                        Proportional band                              The control must be 2ĆPID control.

                        Integral time
                        Derivative time


               This parameter sets the PID parameters. Note that PID is automatically set when AT and ST are
               executed.

                          Proportional action : P refers to control in which the MV is proportional to the deviĆ
                                                ation (control error).
       Function           Integral action :         I gives a control action that is proportional to the time integral
                                                    of the control error. With proportional control, there is norĆ
                                                    mally an offset (control error). So, proportional action is used
                                                    in combination with integral action. As time passes, this conĆ
                                                    trol error disappears, and the set point comes to agree with the
                                                    control temperature (process value).
                          Derivative action :       D gives a control action that is proportional to the time derivaĆ
                                                    tive of the control error. As proportional control and integral
                                                    control correct for errors in the control result, the control sysĆ
                                                    tem will be late in responding to sudden changes in temperaĆ
                                                    ture. Derivative action enables control that is proportional to
                                                    a predicted process output to correct for future error.


                                   Parameter                      Setting Range              Unit         Default
                                Proportional band                  0.1 to 999.9               EU            8.0
                                  Integral time                     0 to 3999               Second          233
   Comment
                                 Derivative time                    0 to 3999               Second          40



                       F Related parameter
                          AT execute/cancel (adjustment level) (p. 5Ć11)
         See




5-14
Adjustment Level

                  Cooling coefficient                         The control must be either heating and coolĆ
                                                              ing control and 2ĆPID control.



        If the heating and cooling characteristics of the control target greatly differ, preventing satisfacĆ
        tory control characteristics from being obtained by the same PID parameters, adjust the proporĆ
        tional band (P) at the control output 2 side by adding the cooling coefficient to balance control
        between the control output 1 and control output 2 sides.

                    In heating and cooling control, control output 2 side P is calculated by the following
                    formula to set the cooling coefficient:
Function                  Control output 2 side P = Cooling coefficient      P (proportional bounds)
                           Setting Range             Unit         Default
                           0.01 to 99.99            None            1.00



                 F Related parameter
                    Proportional band (adjustment level) (p. 5Ć14)
  See




                  Dead band                                   The control system must be heating and coolĆ
                                                              ing control.



        This parameter sets the output dead band width in a heating and cooling control system. A negaĆ
        tive setting sets an overlap band.

                  • This parameter sets an area in which the control output is 0 centering around the
                    set point in a heating and cooling control system.
Function          • The decimal point setting follows the currently set sensor. During analog input, the
                    decimal point setting follows the decimal point position setting.



                           Setting Range             Unit         Default
                           Ć199.9 to 999.9            EU            0.0




                                                                                                         5-15
CHAPTER 5          PARAMETERS


   Adjustment Level




                        Manual reset value                        The control must be either standard (heating)
                                                                  control and 2ĆPID control. The integral time
                                                                  parameter must be set to 0.




                        • This parameter sets the required manipulated variable to remove offset during stabiĆ
                         lization of P or PD control.
       Function




                                Setting Range            Unit         Default

                                  0.0 to 100.0             %            50.0


   Comment




                       F Related parameters
                         PID / ON/OFF (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć21)
         See
                         Integral time (adjustment level) (p. 5Ć14)




                        Hysteresis (OUT1)                         The control must be ON/OFF control.



                        Hysteresis (OUT2)




               This parameter sets the hysteresis for ensuring stable operation at ON/OFF switching.

                        • In a standard control, use the hysteresis (OUT1) parameter. The hysteresis
                          (OUT2) parameter cannot be used.
       Function
                        • In a heating and cooling control, the hysteresis can be set independently for heating
                         and cooling. Use the hysteresis (OUT1) parameter to set the control output 1 side
                         hysteresis, and use the hysteresis (OUT2) parameter to set the control output 2 side
                         hysteresis.
                        • The decimal point setting follows the currently set sensor. During analog input, the
                          decimal point setting follows the decimal point position setting.


                                Setting Range            Unit         Default

                                  0.1 to 999.9            EU            1.0


   Comment




                       F Related parameter
                         PID / ON/OFF (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć21)
         See




5-16
Initial Setting Level


This level is for setting up the basic specifications of the E5GN. In this level, you can set the
input type parameter for selecting the sensor input to be connected to the E5GN, limit the setĆ
ting range of set values or set the alarm mode.
     Power ON
                                                                                            Initial setting level

     Operation                           Adjustment                                                                              Page
     level                               level
                             key
                                                                                                        Input type
                         less than
                           1 sec.                                                                                                5Ć18

          key                        key 3 seconds min.                                                 Scaling upper limit
       1 second
         min.                              key The PV display flashes after one second
                                                                                                                                 5Ć19
                                          Control stops
                                                                                                        Scaling lower limit
                                                                                                                                 5Ć19
                                                 CommuĆ
     Initial setting level                       nications
                                         key     setup level                                            Decimal point
                                     less than                                                                                   5Ć19
                                       1 sec.


                                                                                                        _C/_F selection
                                                   Control in progress                                                           5Ć20

                                                   Control stopped
                                                                                                        Set point upper limit
                                                                                                                                 5Ć20

To move from the operation level to the initial setting                                                 Set point lower limit
level, press   key for three seconds or more.                                                                                    5Ć20

• The initial setting level is not displayed when iniĆ                                                 PID / ON/OFF
                                                                                                                                 5Ć21
  tial/communications protection is set to 2. This
  initial setting level can be used when initial setting/                                              Standard/heating and
  communications protection is set to 0 or 1.                                                      cooling                  5Ć21

• The scaling upper limit, scaling lower limit and                                                  ST
                                                                                                                                 5Ć22
  decimal point parameters are displayed when
  analog input is selected as the input type.                                                           Control period (OUT1)
                                                                                                                                 5Ć22

                                                                                                        Control period (OUT2)
                                                                                                                                 5Ć22

                                                                                                       Direct/reverse
                                                                                                       operation                 5Ć23

                                                                                                        Alarm 1 type
                                                                                                                                 5Ć23

                                                                                                        Move to advanced
                                                                                                        function setting level   5Ć25




                                                                                                                                    5-17
CHAPTER 5       PARAMETERS


   Initial Setting Level




                   Input type2.




                   • This parameter sets the sensor type by a corresponding code.
                   • When this parameter is changed, the set point upper limit is changed to the default.
       Function
                     If the set point limits must be changed, set the set point upper limit and set point
                     lower limit parameters (initial setting level).


                   • Set the code according to the following table. Shaded ranges indicate default settings.
                   The defaults are as follows.
   Comment         Platinum resistance thermometer:  : platinum resistance thermometer Pt100
                   Thermocouple:  : K thermocouple
                                                                              Set
                                              Input type         Name                        Input Temperature Range
                                                                              Value


                       Platinum resistance   Platinum   reĆ      Pt100         0      Ć200 to 850 (_C)      / Ć300 to 1500 (_F)
                       thermometer
                       th        t           sistance therĆ
                                              i t     th
                                             mometer                           1      Ć199.9 to 500.0 (_C) / Ć199.9 to 900.0 (_F)

                                                                               2      0.0 to 100.0 (_C)     / 0.0 to 210.0 (_F)

                                                                 JPt100        3      Ć199.9 to 500.0 (_C) / Ć199.9 to 900.0 (_F)

                                                                               4      0.0 to 100.0 (_C)     / 0.0 to 210.0 (_F)



                                                                              Set
                                              Input type         Name                        Input Temperature Range
                                                                              Value


                                p    p
                       Thermocoupleinput              p
                                             Thermocouple          K           0      Ć200 to 1300 (_C)     / Ć300 to 2300 (_F)
                       type
                       t
                                                                               1      Ć20.0 to 500.0 (_C)   / 0.0 to 900.0 (_F)

                                                                    J          2      Ć100 to 850 (_C)      / Ć100 to 1500 (_F)

                                                                               3      Ć20 to 400.0 (_C)     / 0.0 to 750.0 (_F)

                                                                   T           4      Ć200 to 400 (_C)      / Ć300 to 700 (_F)

                                                                               17     Ć199.9 to 400.0 (_C) / Ć199.9 to 700.0 (_F)

                                                                   E           5      0 to 600 (_C)         / 0 to 1100 (_F)

                                                                   L           6      Ć100 to 850 (_C)      / Ć100 to 1500 (_F)

                                                                   U           7      Ć200 to 400 (_C)      / Ć300 to 700 (_F)

                                                                               18     Ć199.9 to 400.0 (_C) / Ć199.9 to 700.0 (_F)

                                                                   N           8      Ć200 to 1300 (_C)     / Ć300 to 2300 (_F)

                                                                   R           9      0 to 1700 (_C)        / 0 to 3000 (_F)

                                                                   S           10     0 to 1700 (_C)        / 0 to 3000 (_F)

                                                                   B           11     100 to 1800 (_C)      / 300 to 3200 (_F)

                                             NonĆcontact      K10 to 70_C      12     0 to 90 (_C)          / 0 to 190 (_F)
                                             temperature
                                             t      t
                                             sensor           K60 to 120_C     13     0 to 120 (_C)         / 0 to 240 (_F)
                                             ES1A
                                                              K115 to 165_C    14     0 to 165 (_C)         / 0 to 320 (_F)

                                                              K160 to 260_C    15     0 to 260 (_C)         / 0 to 500 (_F)

                                             Analog input      0 to 50mV       16     One of following ranges depending on the
                                                                                      results of scaling:
                                                                                      Ć1999 to 9999, Ć199.9 to 999.9,




                   F Related parameters
                     _C/_F selection Set point upper limit Set point lower limit (initial setting
         See
                     level) (p. 5Ć20)



5-18
Initial Setting Level

           Scaling upper limit                             The input type must be set to analog input.

           Scaling lower limit
           Decimal point


           • These parameters can be used when voltage input is selected as the input type.
           • When voltage input is selected as the input type, scaling is carried out. Set the upper
Function     limit in the scaling upper limit parameter and the lower limit in the scaling lower
             limit parameter.
           • The decimal point parameter specifies the decimal point position of parameters
             (set point, etc.) whose unit is set to EU.


           • Scaling upper limit, Scaling lower limit
                   Parameter                     Setting Range                  Unit        Default
Comment        Scaling upper limit       Scaling lower limit +1 to 9999        None           100
               Scaling lower limit       Ć1999 to scaling upper limit Ć1       None            0
           • Decimal point: Default is 0: 0 digits past decimal point
               Set value                  Setting                   Example
                   0             0 digits past decimal point         1234
                   1             1 digit past decimal point          123.4


           F Related parameter
             Input type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć18)
  See




                                                                                                      5-19
CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS
   Initial Setting Level




                  _C/_F   selection                                 The input type must be set to temperature
                                                                    input.


                  • Set the temperature input unit to either of _C or _F.


       Function


                              Setting Range                   Default

                                : _C / : _F
   Comment

                  F Related parameter
                    Input type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć18)
         See




                  Set point upper limit3.



                  Set point lower limit




                  • This parameter limits the upper and lower limits when the SP is set. The SP can be
                    set within the range defined by the upper and lower limit set values in the set point
                    upper limit and set point lower limit parameters. The existing SP settings that are
       Function
                    out of the range are forcibly changed to one of the upper or lower limit values (whichĆ
                    ever is closest).
                  • When the temperature input type and temperature unit have been changed, the set
                    point upper limit and set point lower limit are forcibly changed to the upper and
                    lower limits of the sensor.
                  • During temperature input, the decimal point position is dependent on the currently
                    selected sensor. During analog input, it is dependent on the decimal point parameĆ
                    ter setting.

                          Parameter                             Setting Range                        Unit   Default

                    Set point upper limit
                        p      pp             Set point lower limit +1 to sensor range upper limit   EU      1300
                                              Platinum resistance thermometer                        EU       850
   Comment
                    Set point lower limit     Sensor range lower limit to set point upper limit Ć1   EU      Ć200


                  F Related parameters
                                                 _ _
                    Input type (p. 5Ć18)  C/ F selection (p. 5Ć20) (initial setting level)

         See




5-20
Initial Setting Level




           PID / ON/OFF




           • This parameter selects 2ĆPID control or ON/OFF control.
           • The AT and ST tuning functions can be used in 2ĆPID control.
Function


                                   Setting Range                         Default

                                : 2ĆPID /       : ON/OFF
Comment

           F Related parameters
             AT execute/cancel (p. 5Ć11) Manual reset Hysteresis (OUT1) (p. 5Ć16) (adjustĆ
  See
             ment level)
             ST stable range (advanced function setting level) (p. 5Ć30)




           Standard/heating and                             The E5GN must support alarm 1 output.
           cooling




           • This parameter selects standard control or heating and cooling control as control
             output 2.
Function   • When heating and cooling control is selected, the alarm 1 output terminal ALM1
             is used for cooling side output. Therefore, alarm 1 cannot be used.


                                  Setting Range                         Default

                         : Standard /       : Heating and cooling



           F Related parameters
             MV monitor (OUT1) MV monitor (OUT2) (operation level) (p. 5Ć8, 9)
  See
             Alarm value (p. 5Ć7) UpperĆlimit alarm value 1 LowerĆlimit alarm value 1
             (operation level) (p. 5Ć8)
             Hysteresis (OUT2) (p. 5Ć16) Cooling coefficient Dead band (p. 5Ć15) (adjustĆ
             ment level)
             Control period (OUT2) (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć22)
             Alarm 1 type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć23)
             Alarm 1 hysteresis (p. 5Ć29) Alarm 1 open in alarm (p. 5Ć29) (advanced function
             setting level)




                                                                                                    5-21
CHAPTER 5       PARAMETERS


   Initial Setting Level




                   ST selfĆtuning                               The control must be either standard control,
                                                                temperature input and 2ĆPID control.




                   • The ST (selfĆtuning) function executes tuning from the start of program execution
                     to calculate PID constants matched to the control target. When the ST function is in
       Function
                     operation, be sure to turn the power supply of the load connected to the control outĆ
                     put ON simultaneously with or before starting operation of the E5GN.


                      Parameter                   Setting Range                      Unit        Default

                         ST            : ST function OFF /     : ST function ON     None


   Comment



                   F Related parameters
                     ST stable range (advanced function setting level) (p. 5Ć30)
         See
                     Input type (p. 5Ć18) PID / ON/OFF (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć21)




                   Control period (OUT1)                        The control must be set to 2ĆPID control.



                   Control period (OUT2)




                   • This parameter sets the output period. Set the control period taking the control charĆ
                     acteristics and the electrical life expectancy of the relay into consideration.
       Function
                   • In a standard control system, use the control period (OUT1) parameter. The conĆ
                     trol period (OUT2) parameter cannot be used.
                   • In a heating and cooling control system, the control period can be set independently
                     for heating and cooling. Use the control period (OUT1) parameter to set the heatĆ
                     ing side control period, and use the control period (OUT2) parameter to set the
                     cooling side control period.


                               Parameter                     Setting Range           Unit        Default

                          Control period (OUT1)                 1 to 99            Second           20

                          Control period (OUT2)                 1 to 99            Second           20
   Comment




                   F Related parameter
                     PID / ON/OFF (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć21)
         See




5-22
Initial Setting Level




           Direct/reverse operation




           • Direct operation refers to control where the manipulated variable is increased
            according to the increase in the process value. Alternatively, reverse operation
Function
            refers to control where the manipulated variable is increased according to the
            decrease in the process value.


                               Setting Range                       Default

                   : Reverse operation/    : Direct operation
Comment




           Alarm 1 type4.                            The alarm 1 type must be supported.
                                                     The control must be set to standard control.


           • Select one of the following alarm 1 types:
                Deviation/Deviation range/Absolute value
Function




                                                                                              5-23
CHAPTER 5   PARAMETERS


   Initial Setting Level
                      Set                                                                         Alarm Output Operation
                     Value                   Alarm Type
                                                                                        When X is positive      When X is negative
                        0        Alarm function OFF                                                                Output OFF
   Comment


                                 UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit (deviation)                                    L       H
                                                                                        ON
               *1       1                                                                                                   *2
                                                                                        OFF
                                                                                                        SP

                                 UpperĆlimit(deviation)                                                        X                  X
                                                                                        ON                                  ON
                        2
                                                                                        OFF                                 OFF
                                                                                                        SP                        SP

                                 LowerĆlimit(deviation)                                                X                              X
                                                                                        ON                                  ON
                        3
                                                                                        OFF                                 OFF
                                                                                                        SP                        SP

                                 UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit range                                          L       H
                                 (deviation)                                            ON
               *1       4                                                                                                   *3
                                                                                        OFF
                                                                                                        SP

                                 UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit with                                           L       H
                                 standby sequence (deviation)                           ON
               *1       5                                                                                                   *4
                                                                                        OFF
                                                                                                        SP

                                 UpperĆlimit with standby                                                      X                  X
                                 sequence (deviation)                                   ON                                  ON
                        6
                                                                                        OFF                                 OFF
                                                                                                        SP                        SP

                                 LowerĆlimit with standby                                              X                                  X
                                                                                        ON                                  ON
                        7        sequence (deviation)
                                                                                        OFF                                 OFF
                                                                                                        SP                        SP

                                 AbsoluteĆvalueupperĆlimit                                                   X                        X
                                                                                        ON                                  ON
                        8
                                                                                        OFF                                 OFF
                                                                                                   0                                          0

                                 AbsoluteĆvaluelowerĆlimit                                                 X                          X
                                                                                        ON                                  ON
                        9
                                                                                        OFF                                 OFF
                                                                                                   0                                          0

                                 AbsoluteĆvalue upperĆlimit with                                           X                          X
                                 standby sequence                                       ON                                  ON
                       10
                                                                                        OFF                                 OFF
                                                                                                   0                                          0

                                 AbsoluteĆvalue lowerĆlimit with                                           X                          X
                                 standby sequence                                       ON                                  ON
                       11
                                                                                        OFF                                 OFF
                                                                                                   0                                          0

                    *1 : The upperĆ and lowerĆlimit values, expressed as L and H, can be set independently for each alarm point with
                                                                           
                         set values 1, 4 and 5.
                    *2 : Set value : 1 UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm
                      Case 1               Case 2            Case 3 (Normally ON)
                                                                                          H  0, L  0
                             L   H SP       SP L    H               L    SP     H


                                                                                                   y
                            H  0, L  0    H  0, L  0                                  H  0, L  0
                              |H|  |L|       |H|  |L|         H       L SP                 |H|       |L|



                                                                                                   x
                                                                                          H  0, L  0
                                                                         SP H       L        |H|       |L|

                    *3 : Set value : 4 UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit range
                       Case 1              Case 2             Case 3 (Normally OFF)
                                                                                          H  0, L  0

                             L   H SP       SP L    H               L    SP    H


                                                                                                   y
                                                                                          H  0, L  0
                            H  0, L  0    H  0, L  0
                                                                H       L SP                 |H|       |L|
                             |H|  |L|        |H|  |L|


                                                                                                   x
                                                                                          H  0, L  0

                                                                         SP H       L        |H|       |L|

                    *4 : Set value : 5 UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm with standby sequence
                         *For the above upperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm
                         Ć In cases 1 and 2, the alarm is normally OFF if upperĆ and lowerĆlimit values of hysteresis overlap.
                         Ć In case 3, the alarm is normally OFF.
                    *5 : Set value : 5 UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm with standby sequence
                         The alarm is normally OFF if upperĆ and lowerĆlimit values of hysteresis overlap.
               • Set the alarm type in the alarm 1 type parameter (initial setting level). Default is
                 2: upperĆlimit alarm.
               F Related parameters
                 Alarm value 1 (operation level) (p. 5Ć7)
                 Upper limit alarm value 1 Lower limit alarm value 1 (operation level) (p. 5Ć8)
       See       Standby sequence reset method (p. 5Ć28) Alarm 1 open in alarm Alarm 1 hysterĆ
                 esis (p. 5Ć29) Alarm 1 latch (p. 5Ć34) (advanced function setting level)


5-24
Advanced Function Setting Level
This level is for using the E5GN to its maximum. You can move to this level by entering the passĆ
word (Ć169) in the initial setting level.
 Power ON




 Operation                           Adjustment                                                     Advanced function setting level
 level                               level
                          key
                      less than
                        1 sec.
                                                                                                                                             Page

                                   key 3 seconds min.                                                              Parameter initialize
                                           key     Theh PV display flashes
                                                                                                                                             5Ć26
                                                   after one second.

                                        Control stop
                                                                                                                   MultiĆSP uses
                                                                                                                                             5Ć26
                                                 CommuĆ
Initial setting level                            nications
                                     key         setup level
                                                                                                                   SP ramp set value
                                  less than
                                                                                                                                             5Ć27
                                   1 sec.



         key                    Password input                                                                     Standby sequence reset
    1 second
      min.
                                set value Ć169
                                                                                                                   method                    5Ć28

               Advanced
               function setting level                                                                              Alarm 1 open in alarm
                                                                                                                                             5Ć29

                                Password input
                                set value 1201                                                                   Alarm 1 hysteresis
                                                                                                                                             5Ć29
                                                                       Control in progress
                 Calibration level
                                                                                                                   ST stable range
                                                                       Control stopped
                                                                                                                                             5Ć30


• The parameters in this level can be used when iniĆ                                                              α
                                                                                                                                             5Ć30
  tial setting/communications protection is set to 0.
                                                                                                                   MV upper limit
• The move to calibration level can be moved to by
                                                                                                                                             5Ć31
  entering the password.
                                                                                                                   MV lower limit
• To switch between setting levels, press the                                                key.                                            5Ć31

• To change setting values, press the                                                    keys.
                                                                                                                   Input digital filter
                                                                                                                                             5Ć32



                                                                                                                   Additional PV display
                                                                                                                                             5Ć32


                                                                                                                   Manipulated variable
                                                                                                                   display                   5Ć33


                                                                                                                   Automatic return of
                                                                                                                   display mode              5Ć33


                                                                                                                   Alarm 1 latch
                                                                                                                                             5Ć34


                                                                                                                   Protect level move time
                                                                                                                                             5Ć34


                                                                                                                   Output input error
                                                                                                                                             5Ć35


                                                                                                                   Cold junction
                                                                                                                   compensation method       5Ć35


                                                                                                                   MB command logic
                                                                                                                   switching                 5Ć36


                                                                                                                   Move to calibration
                                                                                                                   level




                                                                                                                                                5-25
CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS
   Advanced Function Setting Level

                  Parameter initialize


                  This parameter returns parameter settings to their defaults.


       Function


                        : Initializes all parameters.
                        : Turns the E5GN OFF after returning parameter settings to their defaults.
   Comment




                  MultiĆSP uses


                  When the multiĆSP parameter is set to ON, you can select set points 0 to 3 by operĆ
                  ating the keys on the front panel of the controller.
       Function


                        : You can select set points 0 to 3.
                        : You cannot select set points 0 to 3.
   Comment            • Default : OFF.


                  F Related parameter
                    MultiĆSP (operation level) (p. 5Ć5)
         See




5-26
Advanced Function Setting Level




           SP ramp set value5.                      ST (selfĆtuning) must be set to OFF.




           • This parameter specifies the change rate during SP ramp operation. Set the maxiĆ
             mum permissible change width per unit of time (minute) as the SP ramp set value.
Function
             However, note, that when the SP ramp set value is set to OFF, the SP ramp funcĆ
             tion is disabled.
           • The SP ramp set value is independent of the time unit. When setting 30 per minute
             as the SP ramp set value, set the SP ramp set value parameter to 30.
           • During temperature input, the decimal point position of the SP ramp set value is
             dependent on the currently selected sensor, and during analog input it is dependent
             on scaling.


                     Parameter              Setting Range            Unit        Default

                 SP ramp set value          OFF, 1 to 9999           EU


Comment




           F Related parameters
             Input type (p. 5Ć18) Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit Decimal point
  See
             (p. 5Ć19) ST (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć22)




                                                                                             5-27
CHAPTER 5       PARAMETERS


   Advanced Function Setting Level




                     Standby sequence reset                           The alarm 1 type must be set to with standby
                                                                      sequence.
                     method6.




                     • This parameter selects the conditions for enabling reset after the standby sequence
                       of the alarm has been canceled.
       Function
                       Output is turned OFF when the initial setting level, communications setting level,
                       advanced function setting level or calibration level is switched to.
                     • Condition A:
                       Control started (including power ON), and set point, alarm value (upper/lowerĆlimit
                       alarm value) or input shift value (upper/lowerĆlimit temperature input shift value)
                       changed
                     • Condition B:
                       Power ON
                     • The following example shows the reset action when the alarm type is lowerĆlimit
                       alarm with standby sequence.
                                                                    Condition A only
                                                        SP change
                          Alarm point
                             (after change)
                                                                                           Alarm hysteresis


                                                                    Condition A only   f
                                                                                       : Standby sequence canceled point
                               Alarm point                                             F
                                                                                       : Standby sequence reset point




                  Alarm output: Condition A

                  Alarm output: Condition B




                                        Setting Range                   Default

                                : Condition A /   : Condition B


   Comment



                    F Related parameter
                       Alarm 1 type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć23)
         See
                       Alarm 1 latch (advanced setting level) (p. 5Ć34)




5-28
Advanced Function Setting Level




           Alarm 1 open in alarm7.                               jj
                                                           E5GNĆ 1 must be used.
                                                           The control must be set to standard control.



           • This parameter sets the output states of alarm 1.
           • When the E5CN is set to close in alarm, the status of the alarm output function is
             normally open. When set to open in alarm, the status of the alarm output is output
Function
             inverted, or normally closed. The following table shows the relationship between
             alarm output functions, alarm output and output LCDs.
             When alarm 1 open in alarm is set to open in alarm, the heater burnout alarm
             and input error output also become open in alarm.
                                   Alarm Output Function              Alarm Output       Output LCDs

                                           ON                             ON                 Lit
              Close in alarm
                                           OFF                            OFF                Out
Comment
                                           ON                             OFF                Lit
              Open in alarm
                                           OFF                            ON                 Out

                               Setting Range                      Default

                   : Close in alarm /      : Open in alarm

           F Related parameters
             Alarm value 1 (p. 5Ć7) UpperĆlimit alarm value 1 LowerĆlimit alarm value 1 (p.
             5Ć8) (operation level)
  See
             Alarm 1 type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć23)
             Alarm 1 hysteresis (p. 5Ć29) Standby sequence reset method (p. 5Ć28) Alarm 1
             latch (p. 5Ć34) (advanced function setting level)




           Alarm 1 hysteresis                                    jj
                                                           E5GNĆ 1 must be used.
                                                           The control must be set to standard control.



           • This parameter sets the hysteresis of alarm output 1.
           • During analog input, the decimal point setting follows the decimal point position
Function     setting.


                   Setting Range                Unit          Default

                    0.1 to 999.9               _C or _F         0.2

Comment

           F Related parameters
             Alarm value 1 (p. 5Ć7) UpperĆlimit alarm value 1 LowerĆlimit alarm value 1 (p.
  See
             5Ć8) (operation level)
             Alarm 1 type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć23)
             Alarm 1 open in alarm (p. 5Ć29) Standby sequence reset method (p. 5Ć28) Alarm
             1 latch (p. 5Ć34) (advanced function setting level)



                                                                                                    5-29
CHAPTER 5       PARAMETERS


   Advanced Function Setting Level

                   ST stable range                             The control must be set to temperature input,
                                                               PID control and ST set to ON.




                   • This parameter sets the set value for determining the conditions under which ST
                       (selfĆtuning) occurs. This parameter cannot be used when the ST parameter is set
       Function
                       to OFF.


                             Setting Range            Unit        Default
                              0.1 to 999.9          _C or _F        15.0


   Comment


                   F Related parameters
                       PID / ON/OFF (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć21)
         See
                       Input type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć18)
                       ST (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć22)




                   α                                           The control must be 2ĆPID control, and the
                                                               ST parameter must be set to OFF.




                   • Normally, use this parameter at its default.
                   • This parameter sets 2ĆPIDĆconstant α.
       Function




                             Setting Range            Unit        Default
                              0.00 to 1.00           None           0.65


   Comment


                   F Related parameters
                       PID / ON/OFF (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć21)
         See
                       ST (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć22)




5-30
Advanced Function Setting Level

           MV upper limit                                The control must be 2ĆPID control, and the
                                                         ST parameter must be set to OFF.

           MV lower limit


           • The MV upper limit and MV lower limit parameters set the upper and lower limĆ
             its of the manipulated variable. When the manipulated variable calculated by E5GN
             exceeds the upper or lower limit value, the upper or lower limit set becomes the outĆ
Function
             put level.

           • MV upper limit
             The setting ranges during standard control and heating and cooling control are difĆ
             ferent.
Comment
             The manipulated variable at the control output 2 side during heating and cooling
             control is expressed as a negative value.
                Control Method                  Setting Range                Unit        Default
               Standard (heating)    MV lower limit +0.1 to 105.0             %          105.0

               Heating and cooling   0.0 to 105.0                             %          105.0



           • MV lower limit
             The setting ranges during standard control and heating and cooling control are difĆ
             ferent.
             The manipulated variable at the control output 2 side during heating and cooling
             control is expressed as a negative value.
                Control Method                  Setting Range                Unit        Default
               Standard (heating)    Ć5.0 to MV upper limit Ć0.1              %           Ć5.0

               Heating and cooling   0.0 to 105.0                             %          105.0




           F Related parameters
             PID / ON/OFF (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć21)
             ST (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć22)
  See




                                                                                                   5-31
CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS
   Advanced Function Setting Level

                  Input digital filter


                  •   Sets the time constant of the input digital filter The following figure shows the effect
                                                                        .

                      on data after passing through the digital filter:


       Function                                 PV before passing through filter

                                 A

                                                                            PV after passing through filter

                                                                        0.63A


                                               Time
                                              constant                                     Time

                                                 Input digital filter


                            Setting Range                  Unit             Default
                              0.0 to 999.9               Second                 0.0

   Comment




                  Additional PV display


                  •   This parameter adds the facility of displaying only the PV It is addes to the top of the
                                                                                .

                      operation level. It is used to give the option of displaying the PV and SP or just the

                      PV only.
       Function


                                     Setting Range                        Default
                             : Displayed /     : Not displayed
   Comment




5-32
Advanced Function Setting Level




           Manipulated variable display8.




           This parameter displays the manipulated variable.
           The manipulated variable is displayed when the manipulated variable monitor
Function
           parameters are set to ON, and not displayed when these parameters are set to OFF.


                        Setting Range                 Default

                  : Displayed /     : Not displayed


Comment




           Automatic return of display mode




           • If you do not operate any of the keys on the front panel for the time set by this parameĆ
             ter in the operation level and adjustment level, the display automatically returns
Function
             to the PV/SP display.
           • This function is disabled (display does not change automatically) when this parameĆ
             ter is set to OFF.


                   Setting Range               Unit        Default

                     OFF, 1 to 99            Second


Comment




                                                                                                  5-33
CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS
   Advanced Function Setting Level




                  Alarm 1 latch9.                             The alarm 1 function must be ON.




                  • When this setting is set to ON, the alarm function is held until the power is turned
                    OFF once the alarm function has turned ON.
       Function
                    Note, however, that the latch is canceled when the initial setting level, advanced funcĆ
                    tion setting level or calibration level is switched to.
                  • When alarm output function is set to open in alarm, closed output is held, and set to
                    closed in alarm, open output is held.


                              Setting Range                  Default

                                : ON /     : OFF
   Comment


                  F Related parameters
                    Alarm value 1  (operation level) (p. 5Ć7)
         See
                    Upper-limit alarm value 1 Lower-limit alarm value 1 (operation level) (p. 5Ć8
                    and 5Ć9)
                    Alarm 1 type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć23)
                    Standby sequence reset method (advanced function setting level) (p. 5Ć28)
                    Alarm 1 open in alarm Alarm 1 hysteresis (advanced function setting level (p.
                    5Ć29)


                  Protect level move time




                  • Sets the key pressing time required for moving to the protect level from the operation
                    level or the adjustment level.
       Function


                        Setting Range               Unit       Default

                            1 to 30                Second         3

   Comment

                  F Related parameters
                    Operation/adjustment protection Initial setting/communications protection
         See
                    Setting change protection (protect level) (p. 5Ć3)




5-34
Advanced Function Setting Level

           Output input error                          The alarm 1 type must be supported.
                                                       The control must be set to standard control.



           • When this setting is set to ON, alarm 1 output becomes ON at an input error. Note,
             however, that the alarm 1 operation display does not light.
Function   • The alarm 1 output is the ORed output of alarm 1, HBA used and input error.
           • Output is turned OFF when the initial setting level, communications setting level,
             advanced function setting level or calibration level is switched to.


                        Setting Range                  Default
                          : ON /      : OFF
Comment


           F Related parameter
             Input error (error display) (p. AĆ4)
  See




           Cold junction                               Input type must be thermocouple or non-conĆ
           compensation method                            tact temperature sensor



           • Specifies whether cold junction compensation is to be performed internally by the
             controller or to be performed externally when the input type setting value is No.0 to
Function
             15, 17 or 18.
           • The cold junction compensation external setting is valid when the temperature difĆ
             ference is measured using two thermocouples or two ESIAs.


                        Setting Range                  Default
                    : internally /     : externally
Comment


           F Related parameter
             Input type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć18)
  See




                                                                                                5-35
CHAPTER 5       PARAMETERS


   Communications Setting Level


                   MB command logic                             Communications        function   must      be   supĆ

                   switching                                           ported.




                   • Switches the logic of MB command (communications writing switching) in the SysĆ
                     way communications procedures.
                   • The MB command (communications writing switching) is equivalent to the MB comĆ
                                                                   j
       Function

                     mand (remote/local switching) on the E5 J.


                   • The hatched setting is the default (same logic as E5 J).    j
                                                            Text Data of MB Command
                     Setting Value
   Comment                                          0000                                    0001
                                     Communications writing enabled (reĆ     Communications writing disabled (loĆ
                         OFF
                                            mote mode selection)                     cal mode selection)

                                     Communications writing disabled (loĆ    Communications writing enabled (reĆ
                         ON
                                             cal mode selection)                     mote mode selection)

                                      (Terms in parentheses () are the terms used on the E5 J.)     j
                   F Related parameter
                     Communications writing (adjustment level) (p. 5Ć11)
         See




5-36
Advanced Function Setting Level




           Communications unit                            Communications       function     must    be   supĆ
                                                          ported.
           No.


           Baud rate



           Communications data

           length


           Communications stop

           bit


           Communications parity




           • Each parameter is enabled when the power is reset.
           • Match the communications specifications of the E5GN and the host computer. If a 1
Function
             : N connection is being used, ensure that the communications specifications for all
             devices in the system (except Communications unit No.) are the same.


                               Displayed
                 Parameter                                 Set Value                    Setting Range
                               Characters


            Communications                  0, 1 to 99                              0 to 99
Comment
            unit No.

            Baud rate                       1.2 / 2.4 / 4.8 / 9.6 / 19.2 (kbps)     1.2 / 2.4 / 4.8 /
                                                                                    9.6 / 19.2 (kbps)

            Communications                  7 / 8 (bit)                             7 / 8 (bit)
            data length

            Communications                  1 /2                                    1 / 2
            stop bit

            Communications                          /          /                    None / even / odd
            parity


                                                                    Highlighted characters indicate defaults.




           F Related parameters
             Communications writing (adjustment level) (p. 5Ć11)
  See




                                                                                                          5-37
CHAPTER 6 CALIBRATION




CHAPTER 6    6
   CALIBRATION




     6.1   Parameter Structure             . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   6Ć2

     6.2   User Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          6Ć3

     6.3   Calibrating Thermocouples                  . . . . . . . . . . . . .    6Ć4

     6.4   Calibrating Analog Input               . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    6Ć7

     6.5   Calibrating Platinum Resistance

           Thermometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          6Ć8

     6.6   Checking Indication Accuracy                   . . . . . . . . . . .    6Ć9




                                                                                         6-1
CHAPTER 6 CALIBRATION




6.1         Parameter Structure



                                              • To calibrate the E5GN, enter the password 1201 at the move to calĆ
                                                ibration level parameter in the advanced function setting level.
                                                      is displayed.
                                              • However, note that the move to calibration level parameter might not
                                                be displayed when, for example, the user is calibrating the E5GN for the
                                                first time. If this happens, set the initial/communications protection
                                                parameter in the protect level to 0 before moving to the advanced
                                                function setting level.
                                              • The calibration mode is quit by turning the power OFF.
                                              • The parameters in the calibration level are structured as follows:
      Advancedfunction setting level




                                       These parameters are automatically moved to according to the event input.




                                                     Once the user has calibrated the E5GN, a dot will be displayed when
                                                     the calibration level is moved to, to indicate that the E5GN has
                                                     already been calibrated by the user.




                                                                                 Dot is displayed.




6-2
6.2 User Calibration




6.2     User Calibration



                          The E5GN is correctly calibrated before it is shipped from the factory and
                                                                                                ,

                          normally need not be calibrated by the user.

                          If, however it must be calibrated by the user use the parameters for caliĆ
                                     ,                                 ,

                          brating temperature input and analog input.



                          However, note that OMRON cannot ensure the results of calibration by

                          the user.

                          Also, calibration data is overwritten with the latest settings. The default

                          calibration settings cannot be returned to after user calibration.




 F    Calibrating input   When the user calibrates the E5GN, the input type currently selected in

                          parameters is calibrated. The following 24 input types can be calibrated.

                          •   Thermocouple                        : 14 types

                          •   NonĆcontact temperature sensor      : 4 type

                          •   Analog input                        : 1 type

                          •   Platinum resistance thermometer     : 5 types




 F    Registering         The new calibration data for each item is temporarily registered. It can be

      calibration data    officially registered as calibration data only when all items have been caliĆ

                          brated to new values. So, be sure to temporarily register all items when

                          you calibrate the E5GN.

                          When calibration data is registered, it is registered regardless of whether

                          or not the E5GN has been calibrated by the user.

                          Prepare separate measuring devices and equipment for calibration. For

                          details on how to handle measuring devices and equipment, refer to the

                          respective instruction manuals.




                                                                                                    6-3
CHAPTER 6 CALIBRATION



6.3         Calibrating Thermocouples



                            •   Calibrate according to the type of thermocouple, thermocouple 1 group
                                (input types 0, 2, 5, 6, 8) and thermocouple 2 group (input types 1, 3, 4,
                                7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18).

                            •   When calibrating, do not cover the bottom of the E5GN. Also, do not
                                touch the input terminals (Nos. 8 and 9) or compensating conductor on
                                the E5GN.



      F   Preparations
                                                                      E5GN
                                         1    2                   8     9
                                                                  Ć     +


                                  Input power supply
                                   Compensating conductor


                                                        Cold junction                STV
                                                        compensator
                                                          0_C/32_F

                            •   Set the cold junction compensator designed for compensation of interĆ
                                                            _
                                nal thermocouples to 0 C. However, make sure that internal thermocouĆ
                                ples are disabled (tips are open).

                            •   In the above figure, STV refers to a standard DC current/voltage source.

                            •   Use the compensating conductor designed for the selected thermocouĆ
                                ple. However, note that when thermocouples R, S, E, B or a nonĆcontact
                                temperature sensor is used, the cold junction compensator and the comĆ
                                pensating conductor can be substituted with the cold junction compenĆ
                                sator and the compensating conductor for thermocouple K.




           Connecting the   Correct process values cannot be obtained if you touch the contact ends of the compensating

           Cold Junction    conductor during calibration of a thermocouple. Accordingly, shortĆcircuit (enable) or open
           Compensator      (disable) the tip of the thermocouple inside the cold junction compensator as shown in the figĆ

                            ure below to create a contact or nonĆcontact state for the cold junction compensator.


                                    Cold junction compensator                        Cold junction compensator
                                                                Short

                            E5GN             0_C/32_F                         E5GN            0_C/32_F           Open



                            Compensatingconductor                       Compensatingconductor


6-4
6.3 Calibrating Thermocouples



                            This example describes how to calibrate the E5GN when thermocouple
                            input is currently selected on an E5GN supporting thermocouple input.
                            (1) Connect the power supply.
                            (2) Connect a standard DC current/voltage source (STV), precision digiĆ
                                tal multimeter (DMM) and contact junction compensator (e.g. zero
                                controller as in figure) to the thermocouple input terminals, as shown
                                in the figure below.
                                                                 E5GN        Compensating conductor of currently

                                                                             selected thermocouple
                                                                 8    9      Use K thermocouple compensating

                                                                  Ć   +      conductor for E, R, S and B thermocouples

                                                                             or nonĆcontact temperature sensor.




                                                                                INPUT
                                                 STV            DMM           Zero
                                                                              controller
                                                                                             OUTPUT

                                                                                  Leave open.

                            (3) Turn the power ON.
                            (4) Move to the calibration level.
                                This starts the 30Ćminute aging timer. This timer provides an approxĆ
Input types 0, 2, 5, 6, 8       imate timer for aging. After 30 minutes, the No.2 display changes to
                                0. You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if 0 is
                                not displayed.
Input types, 1, 3, 4, 7,
9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,      (5) Press the       key to set the E5GN to the state on the left.
15, 17, 18
                                The No.2 display at this time displays the currently entered count
                                value entered in Hexadecimal. Set the STV as follows:
                                  • Input types 0, 2, 5, 6, 8 : Set to 54 mV.
                                  • Input types 1, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18: Set to 24 mV.
                                Allow the count value on the No.2 display to fully stabilize, then press
                                the     key to temporarily register the calibration setup.




                                                                                                                   6-5
CHAPTER 6 CALIBRATION



                          (6) Press the          key to set the E5GN to the state on the left.
                               Set STV to Ć9mV.
                               Allow the count value on the No.2 display to fully stabilize, then press
                               the       key to temporarily register the calibration setup. (Input types
                               0, 2, 5, 6, 8 : Go to step 11.)
                          (7) Press the          key. The No.2 display changes to the state on the left
                               when the input type is 1, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 or 15.
                          (8) Set STV to 54mV.
                               Allow the count value on the No.2 display to fully stabilize, then press
                               the       key to temporarily register the calibration setup.
                          (9) Press the          key. The No.2 display changes to the state on the left
                               when the input type is 1, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 17 or 18. Set
                               STV to Ć9mV.
                          (10) Allow the count value on the No.2 display to fully stabilize, then press
                               the       key to temporarily register the calibration setup.
                          (11) Press the         key to set the E5GN to the state on the left.
                          (12) Change the wiring as follows:
                                                                 E5GN     Compensating conductor of currently

                                                                          selected thermocouple

                                                               8    9     Use K thermocouple compensating

                                                                Ć   +     conductor for E, R, S and B thermocouples

                                                                          or nonĆcontact temperature sensor.




                      Open in nonĆconnected state                            INPUT
                                               STV            DMM          Zero
                                                                           controller
                                                                                          OUTPUT

                                                                               Short

                               Disconnect the STV to enable the thermocouple of the cold junction
                               compensator. When doing this, be sure to disconnect the wiring on the
                               STV side.
                          (13) Allow the count value on the No.2 display to fully stabilize, then press
                               the       key to temporarily register the calibration setup.
                          (14) Press the        key. The No.2 display changes to the state on the left.
                               Note that the data to be temporarily registered is not displayed when
                               it is not entirely prepared.
                               Press the       key. The No.2 display changes to      . Release the key
                               and wait two seconds or press the       key. This stores the temporarily
                               registered calibration data to EEPROM. To cancel storage of tempoĆ
                               rarily registered calibration data to memory, press the        key withĆ
                               out pressing the        key.
                          (15) The calibration mode is quit by turning the power OFF.




6-6
6.4 Calibrating Analog Input



6.4   Calibrating Analog Input



                 This example describes how to calibrate when 0 to 50 mV input (input type
                 16) is currently selected on an E5GN supporting thermocouple input.
                                                        E5GN
                                        1    2          8   9
                                                        Ć   +


                               Input power supply


                                            STV       DMM

                 (1) Connect the power supply.
                 (2) Connect an STV and DMM to the analog input terminals, as shown
                     in the figure above.
                 (3) Turn the power ON.
                 (4) Move to the calibration level.
                     This starts the 30Ćminute aging timer. This timer provides an approxĆ
                     imate timer for aging. After 30 minutes, the No.2 display changes to
                     0. You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if 0 is
                     not displayed.
                 (5) Press the       key to set the E5GN to the state on the left.
                     The No.2 display at this time displays the currently entered count
                     value entered in Hexadecimal. Set the STV to 54mV.
                 (6) Allow the count value on the No.2 display to fully stabilize, then press
                     the      key to temporarily register the calibration setup.
                 (7) Press the         key to set the E5GN to the state on the left.
                      Set STV to Ć9mV.
                 (8) Allow the count value on the No.2 display to fully stabilize, then press
                      the       key to temporarily register the calibration setup.
                 (9) Press the         key. The No.2 display changes to the state on the left.
                      Note that the data to be temporarily registered is not displayed when
                      it is not entirely prepared.
                      Press the       key. The No.2 display changes to      . Release the key
                      and wait two seconds or press the       key. This stores the temporarily
                      registered calibration data to EEPROM. To cancel storage of tempoĆ
                      rarily registered calibration data to memory, press the        key withĆ
                      out pressing the        key.
                 (10) The calibration mode is quit by turning the power OFF.




                                                                                            6-7
CHAPTER 6             CALIBRATION




6.5            Calibrating Platinum Resistance Thermometers



                                         This example describes how to calibrate the E5GN when it is connected to
  1   2    3    4   5   6   7    8   9

                            A    B   B
                                         a platinum resistance thermometer.
                                         When calibrating a platinum resistance thermometer use wires of the
  Input power                            same thickness as those used to connect the E5GN.
  supply

                                         (1) Connect the power supply.
                                6Ćdial
                                         (2) Connect a precision resistance box (called 6Ćdial in this manual) to
                                             the platinum resistance thermometer input terminals.
                                         (3) Turn the power ON.
                                         (4) Move to the calibration level.
                                             This starts the 30Ćminutes aging timer. This timer provides an
                                             approximate timer for again. After 30 minutes, the No.2 display
                                             changes to 0. You can advance to the next step in this procedure
 Input type 0
                                             even if 0 is not displayed.
                                         (5) Press the      key to display the count value for each input type.
 Input types 1, 3
                                             The No.2 display at this time displays the currently entered count
                                             value entered in Hexadecimal. Set the 6Ćdial as follows:
 Input types 2, 4
                                               • Input type 0      : 390 Ω
                                               • Input type 1 or 3 : 280 Ω
                                               • Input type 2 or 4 : 140 Ω
                                         (6) Allow the count value on the No.2 display to fully stabilize, then press
 Input type 0
                                             the     key to temporarily register the calibration setup.
                                         (7) Press the       key to set the E5GN to the state on the left.
 Input types 1, 3                            Set the 6Ćdial as follows:
                                              • Input type 0         : 10 Ω
                                              • Input type 1 or 3 : 10 Ω
 Input types 2, 4
                                              • Input type 2 or 4 : 100 Ω
                                         (8) Allow the count value on the No.2 display to fully stabilize, then press
                                             the     key to temporarily register the calibration setup.
                                         (9) Press the       key. The No.2 display changes to the state on the left.
                                             Note that the data to be temporarily registered is not displayed when
                                             it is not entirely prepared.
                                             Press the      key. The No.2 display changes to      . Release the key
                                             and wait two seconds or press the      key. This stores the temporarily
                                             registered calibration data to nonĆvolatile memory (EEPROM). To
                                             cancel storage of temporarily registered calibration data to memory,
                                             press the       key without pressing the      key.
                                         (10) The calibration mode is quit by turning the power OFF.




6-8
6.6 Checking Indication Accuracy



6.6     Checking Indication Accuracy



                           •   After calibrating input, be sure to check indication accuracy to make

                               sure that the E5GN has been correctly calibrated.

                           •   Operate the E5GN in the PV/SP monitor mode.

                           •   Check the indication accuracy at the upper and lower limits and midĆ

                               point.


 F    Thermocouple or      •   Preparation

      non contact              The following figure shows the required device connection. Make sure

                               that the E5GN and cold junction compensator are connected by a comĆ
      temperature
                               pensating conductor for the thermocouple that is to be used during
      sensor
                               actual operation. For the nonĆcontact temperature sensor connect a K
                                                                                       ,

                               thermocouple, and set the input type to the K thermocouple.

                                                                E5GN
                           1       2   3    4   5   6   7   8    9
                                                            Ć    +     Cold junction compensator

                    Input power supply
                                                                                                   STV

                                                             Compensation conductor
                           •   Operation

                               Make sure that the cold junction compensator is at 0    _C, and set STV outĆ
                               put to the voltage equivalent to the starting power of the check value.

                               The cold junction compensator and compensation conductor are not reĆ

                               quired when an external cold junction compensation method is used.


 F    Platinum             •   Preparation

      resistance               The following figure shows the required device connection:


      thermometer                                               E5GN
                               1   2    3   4   5   6   7 8 9
                                                        A B B

                        Input power supply

                                                            6Ćdial

                           •   Operation

                               Set the 6Ćdial to the resistance equivalent to the check value.




                                                                                                         6-9
CHAPTER 6 CALIBRATION



   F Analog input         •   Preparation

                              The following figure shows the required device connection:

                                                           E5GN
                              1   2   3   4   5   6   7   8 9
                                                          Ć +

                              P/S

                                                          STV

                          •   Operation

                              Set the STV to the voltage equivalent to the check value.




6-10
APPENDIX




APPENDIX




     SPECIFICATIONS               . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     AĆ2

          Ratings      . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    AĆ2

          Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             AĆ3

     ERROR DISPLAY              . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     AĆ4

     PARAMETER OPERATIONS LIST                                  . . . . . . . . . .     AĆ6

     SENSOR INPUT SETTING,

     INDICATION AND CONTROL RANGES . . . . .                                           AĆ10

     SETUP LEVELS DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                            AĆ12

     PARAMETER FLOW                   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    AĆ13




                                                                                              A-1
APPENDIX


SPECIFICATIONS

J Ratings
      Supply voltage                100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz                     24 VAC, 50/60 Hz/24 VDC
      Operating voltage range       85 to 110% of rated supply voltage
      Power consumption                                 7VA                                       4VA/2.5W
      Sensor input*                 Thermocouple                        : K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B
                                    Platinum resistance thermometer : Pt100, JPt100
                                    NonĆcontact temperature sensor : K10 to 70_C, K60 to 120_C, K115 to 165_C,
                                                                           K160 to 260_C
                                    Voltage input: 0 to 50 mV
      Control         Relay output SPSTĆNO, 250 VAC, 2A (resistive load), electrical life : 100,000 operations
      output                        Min. applicable load 1V 1 mA
                      Voltageoutput Outputvoltage12VDC(PNP),max.loadcurrent21mA,withshortĆcircuitprotection
                                    circuit
      Alarm output                  SPSTĆNO, 250 VAC, 1A (resistive load), electrical life : 100,000 operations
                                    Min. applicable load 1V 1 mA
      Control method                2ĆPID or ON/OFF control
      Setting method                Digital setting using front panel keys
      Indication method             7Ćsegment digital display and singleĆlighting indicator
      Other functions               According to controller model
      Ambient temperature           Ć10 to 55_C (with no condensation or icing)
      Ambient humidity              Relative humidity 25 to 85%
      Storage temperature           Ć25 to 65_C (with no condensation or icing)
      Altitude                      2,000 m or less
      Recommended fuse              T2A, 250 VAC, time lag, low shut-off capacity
      Installation environment      Installation Category II, Pollution Class 2 (IEC 61010-1 compliant)
      *   For the setting ranges for each input, see page AĆ10.




A-2
SPECIFICATIONS


J Characteristics
                                    Thermocouple:
                                    (±0.5% of indication value or ±1_C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. (*1)
  Indication accuracy               Platinum resistance thermometer:
                                    (±0.5% of indication value or ±1_C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.
                                    Analog input: ±5%FS±1 digit max.
  Hysteresis                        0.1 to 999.9EU (in units of 0.1EU)
  Proportional band (P)             0.1 to 999.9EU (in units of 0.1EU)
  Integral time (I)                 0 to 3999 (in units of 1 second)
  Derivative time (D)               0 to 3999 (in units of 1 second)
  Control period                    1 to 99 (in units of 1 second)
  Manual reset value                0.0 to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%)
  Alarm setting range               Ć1999 to 9999 (decimal point position dependent on input type)
  Sampling period                   500 ms
  Insulation resistance             20 MΩ min. (by 500 VDC megger)
  Dielectric strength               2000 VAC 50 or 60 Hz 1min
  Malfunction vibration             10 to 55 Hz, 10 m/s2 for 10 min. each in X, Y and Z directions
  Vibration resistance              300 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hrs. each in X, Y and Z directions
  Malfunction shock                 200 m/s2 max. 3 times each in 3 axes, 6 directions (relay: 100 m/s2)
  Shock resistance                  300 m/s2 max. 3 times each in 3 axes, 6 directions (relay: 100 m/s2)
  Weight                            Approx. 90 g                Adapter: approx. 10g
  Protective structure              Front panel: NEMA4X for indoor use (equivalent to IP66),
                                    Rear case: IP20, terminals: IP00
  Memory protection                 EEPROM (nonĆvolatile memory) (number of writes: 100,000)
                                                            _                                                      _
  *1 The indication of K thermocouples in the Ć200 to 1300 C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of Ć100 C or less,
                                                        _
     and U and L thermocouples at any temperature is ±2 C±1 digit maximum. The indication of B thermocouples at a temperaĆ
                _
     ture of 400 C or less is unrestricted.
                                                                     _              _
     The indication of R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200 C or less is ±3 C±1 digit maximum.




                                                                                                                         A-3
APPENDIX




ERROR DISPLAY
                             When an error has occurred, the No.1 display alternately indicates error
                             codes together with the current display item.
                             This section describes how to check error codes on the display, and the
                             actions you must take to remedy the problem.

                    Input error

      F Meaning              The input value has exceeded the control range.
                               * Control range
                                 Platinum resistance      : Temperature setting lower limit -20_C to
                                 thermometer,               temperature setting upper limit +20_C
                                 thermocouple input         (temperature setting lower limit -40_F to
                                                            temperature setting upper limit +40_F)
                                 ESIA input               : Same as input indication range
                                 Analog input             : -5% to 105% of scaling range

      F Action               Check the wiring of inputs for miswiring, disconnections, and shortĆcirĆ
                             cuits and the input type.
                             If no abnormality is found in the wiring and input type, turn the power
                             OFF then back ON again. If the display remains the same, the E5GN must
                             be repaired. If the display is restored, then a probable cause can be electriĆ
                             cal noise affecting the control system. Check for electrical noise.

      F Operation at error   After the error occurs, the error is displayed, and control output functions
                             turn OFF.
                             Alarm outputs function as if the upper limit value has been exceeded.
                             When output input error (advanced function level) is set to ON, the
                             alarm 1 output turns ON when an input error occurs.
                             An error message is displayed when process value or PV/SP are disĆ
                             played.



                    Memory error

      F Meaning              Internal memory operation is in error.

      F Action               First, turn the power OFF then back ON again. If the display remains the
                             same, the E5GN must be repaired. If the display is restored, then a probĆ
                             able cause can be electrical noise affecting the control system. Check for
                             electrical noise.

      F Operation at error   Control output and alarm output turn OFF.



A-4
ERROR DISPLAY




                            Display range over

F Meaning                                     Though this is not an error, this is displayed when the process value
                                              exceeds the display range when the control range is larger than the display
                                              range (Ć1999 (Ć199.9) to 9999 (999.9)).
                                              • When less than Ć1999 (Ć99.9)
                                              • When larger than 9999 (999.9)


F Action                                      Control continues, allowing normal operation. An error message is disĆ
                                              played when process value or PV/SP are displayed.


RTD input                                                                            RTD input
(setting range: without Ć199.9 to 500.0(_C) type)                                    (setting range: Ć199.9 to 500.0(_C) type)
Themocuple input                                                                     Themocuple input
(setting range: without Ć199.9 to 400.0 (_C) type)                                   (setting range: without Ć199.9 to 400.0 (_C) type)
S.Err indication    Displayed by numerical value       S.Err indication              cccc indication     Displayed by numerical value       S.Err indication

                        Input indication range                                                                 Input indication range

      -1999                 display range                     9999                                        -1999             display range          9999
     (-199.9)                                                (999.9)                                     (-199.9)                                 (999.9)


Analog input
    display range  Displayed by numerical value
S.Err indication   cccc indication    Displayed by numerical value        cccc indication   S.Err indication

                                      -1999        display       9999
                                     (-199.9)       range       (999.9)

                                            Input indication range


Analog input
    display range  Displayed by numerical value
S.Err indication    Displayed by numerical value       S.Err indication

                        Input indication range

      -1999                 display range                     9999
     (-199.9)                                                (999.9)




                                                                                                                                                               A-5
APPENDIX


PARAMETER OPERATIONS LIST




Operation level

                                                                                                                    Set
      Parameter Name         Symbol        Setting (monitor) Value             Display     Default         Unit
                                                                                                                   Value

 PV                                   Sensorinputindicationrange                                         EU
 PV/SP                                SP lower limit to SP upper limit                     0             EU
 MultiĆSP                             0 to 3                                               0             None
 Set point during SP ramp             SP lower limit to SP upper limit                                   EU
 Run/stop                             Run/stop                                  ,          Run           None
 Alarm value 1                        Ć1999 to 9999                                        0             EU
 UpperĆlimit alarm value 1            Ć1999 to 9999                                        0             EU
 LowerĆlimit alarm value 1            Ć1999 to 9999                                        0             EU
 MV monitor (OUT1))
             (                        0.0 to 100.0 (standard)                                            %
                                      0.0 to 100.0 (heating and cooling)                                 %
 MV monitor (OUT2)                    0.0 to 100.0                                                       %

Adjustment level

                                                                                                                  Setting
      Parameter Name         Symbol       Setting (monitor) Value          Display       Default         Unit
                                                                                                                  Value

 ATexecute/cancel                     ON, OFF                              ,                         None
 Communicationswriting                ON, OFF                              ,                         None
 Set point 0                          SP lower limit to upper limit                      0           EU
 Set point 1                          SP lower limit to upper limit                      0           EU
 Set point 2                          SP lower limit to upper limit                      0           EU
 Set point 3                          SP lower limit to upper limit                      0           EU
 Temperatureinputshift                Ć199.9 to 999.9                                    0.0         _C or _F
 UpperĆlimittemperature               Ć199.9 to 999.9                                    0.0         _C or _F
 input shift value
 LowerĆlimittemperature               Ć199.9 to 999.9                                    0.0         _C or _F
 input shift value
 Proportionalband                     0.1 to 999.9                                       8.0         EU
 Integraltime                         0 to 3999                                          233         Second
 Derivativetime                       0 to 3999                                          40          Second
 Coolingcoefficient                   0.01 to 99.99                                      1.00        None
 Deadband                             Ć199.9 to 999.9                                    0.1         EU
 Manual reset value                   0.0 to 100.0                                       50.0        %
 Hysteresis (OUT1)                    0.1 to 999.9                                       1.0         EU
 Hysteresis (OUT2)                    0.1 to 999.9                                       1.0         EU




A-6
PARAMETER OPERATIONS LIST




Initial setting level

                                                                                                                        Setting
     Parameter Name           Symbol          Setting (monitor) Value                   Display     Default     Unit
                                                                                                                        Value

Input type *                           Platinum reĆ     0 : Pt100                                  0           None
                                       sistance         1 : Pt100
                                       thermomeĆ        2 : Pt100
                                       ter              3 : JPt100
                                                        4 : JPt100

                                       ThermocouĆ       0:K                                        0           None
                                       ple              1:K
                                                        2:J
                                                        3:J
                                                        4:T
                                                        17 : T
                                                        5:E
                                                        6:L
                                                        7:U
                                                        18 : U
                                                        8:N
                                                        9:R
                                                        10 : S
                                                        11 : B

                                       NonĆcontact      12 : 10 to 70_C
                                       temperature      13 : 60 to 120_C
                                       sensor           14 : 115 to 165_C
                                                        15 : 160 to 260_C

                                       Analog input     16 : 0 to 50mA

Scaling upper limit                    Scaling lower limit +1 to 9999                              100         None

Scaling lower limit                    Ć1999 to scaling upper limit Ć1                             0           None

Decimal point                          0.1                                                         0           None

Temperature unit                       _C, _F                                   ,                  _C          None

Set point upper limit                  SP lower limit +1 to input range lowĆ                       1300        EU
                                       er value (temperature)

                                       SP lower limit +1 to scaling upper                          1300        EU
                                       limit (analog)

Set point lower limit                  Input range lower limit to SP upper                         Ć200        EU
                                       limit Ć1 (temperature)

                                       Scaling lower limit to SP upper limit                       Ć200        EU
                                       Ć1 (analog)

PID Ć ON/OFF                           2ĆPID, ON/OFF                                    ,          ON/OFF      None

Standard/Heating        and                                                                        Standard    None
                                       Standard, Heating and cooling                        ,
cooling

ST                                     ON, OFF                                      ,              ON          None

Control period (OUT1)                  1 to 99                                                     20          Second

Control period (OUT2)                  1 to 99                                                     20          Second

Direct/reverse operation               Direct operation, reverse operation                  ,      Reverse     None
                                                                                                   operation

Alarm 1 type                           0:    Alarm function OFF                                    2           None
                                       1:    UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm
                                       2:    UpperĆlimit alarm
                                       3:    LowerĆlimit alarm
                                       4:    UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit range
                                       5:    UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm
                                             with standby sequence
                                       6:    UpperĆlimit alarm with standby
                                             sequence
                                       7:    LowerĆlimit alarm with standby
                                             sequence
                                       8:    AbsoluteĆvalue upperĆlimit alarm
                                       9:    AbsoluteĆvalue lowerĆlimit alarm
                                       10: AbsoluteĆvalueupperĆlimit
                                             alarm with standby sequence
                                       11: AbsoluteĆvalue lowerĆlimit alarm
                                             with standby sequence

Move to advanced funcĆ                                                                             0           None
                                       Ć1999 to 9999
tion setting level




                                                                                                                             A-7
APPENDIX


Advanced function setting level

                                                                                                                   Setting
      Parameter Name         Symbol     Setting (monitor) Value                 Display       Default    Unit
                                                                                                                    Value

 Parameterinitialize                  ON, OFF                               ,             OFF           None
 MultiĆSPuses                         ON, OFF                               ,             OFF           None
 SP ramp set value                    OFF, 1 to 9999                            , to      OFF           EU
 Standby sequence reset               ConditionA, Condition B           ,                 ConditionA    None
 method
 Alarm 1 open in alarm                Open in alarm/Close in alarm              ,         Close in      None
                                                                                          alarm
 Alarm 1 hysteresis                   0.1 to 999.9                                        0.2           EU
 ST stable range                      0.1 to 999.9                                        15.0          _C or _F
 α                                    0.00to 1.00                                         0.65          None
 MV upper limit                       MV lower limit +0.1 to 105.0                        105.0         %
                                      (standard)
                                      0.0 to 105.0 (heating and coolĆ                     105.0         %
                                      ing)
 MV lower limit                       Ć5.0 to MV upper limit Ć0.1                         Ć5.0          %
                                      (standard)
                                      Ć105.0to0.0(heatingandcoolĆ                         Ć105.0        %
                                      ing)
 Inputdigital filter                  0.1 to 999.9                                        0.0           Second
 AdditionalPVdisplay                  ON, OFF                               ,             OFF           None
 Manipulatedvariable disĆ             ON, OFF                               ,             OFF           None
 play
 Automatic return of disĆ             OFF, 1 to 9999                            , to      OFF           Second
 playmode
 Alarm 1 latch                        ON, OFF                               ,             OFF           None
 Protect level move time              1 to 30                                             3             Second
 Output input error                   ON, OFF                               ,             OFF           None
 Cold junction compensaĆ              ON, OFF                               ,             ON            None
 tionmethod
 MB command logic                     ON, OFF                               ,             OFF           None
 switching
 Move to calibration level            Ć1999 to 9999                                       0             None




A-8
PARAMETER OPERATIONS LIST




Protect level
                                                                                                                                 Setting
    Parameter Name        Symbol      Setting (monitor) Value                       Display                   Default     Unit
                                                                                                                                  Value

Operation/adjustment               0 to 3                                                                    0          None
protection


Initial setting/                   0 to 2                                                                    1          None
communications
protection


Setup change protection            ON, OFF                              ,                                    OFF        None




Communications setting level
                                                                                                                                 Setting
    Parameter Name        Symbol     Setting (monitor) Value                    Display                       Default     Unit
                                                                                                                                  Value

Communication unit No.             0 to 99                                                                   1          None


Baud rate                          1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2     .   ,   .       ,    .   ,       .   ,   .   9.6        kbps


Data bit                           7, 8                                                                      7          bit


Stop bit                           1, 2                                                                      2          bit


Parity                             None, Even, Odd                          ,                ,               Even       None




                                                                                                                                      A-9
APPENDIX


 SENSOR INPUT SETTING, INDICATION AND CONTROL

 RANGES




                            SpecificaĆ     Set
              Input type                                  Input Temperature Range                   Input Indication Range
                              tions       Value


 Platinum    Platinum                       0     Ć200 to 850 (_C) / Ć300 to 1500 (_F)      Ć220 to 870 (_C)    / Ć340 to 1540 (_F)
 resisĆ
    i        resistance
                 i ta        Pt100          1     Ć199.9 to 500.0 (_C)/Ć199.9to900.0(_F)    Ć199.9to 520 (_C)   / Ć199.9 to 940 (_F)
 tance       thermomeĆ
 thermomĆ
 eterinput
             ter                            2     0.0 to 100.0 (_C) / 0.0 to 210.0 (_F)     Ć20 to 120 (_C)     / Ć40 to 250 (_F)
 type                        JPt100         3     Ć199.9 to 500.0 (_C)/Ć199.9to900.0(_F)    Ć199.9to 520 (_C)   / Ć199.9 to 940 (_F)
                                            4     0.0 to 100.0 (_C) / 0.0 to 210.0 (_F)     Ć20 to 120 (_C)     / Ć40 to 250 (_F)
                           SpecificaĆ      Set
              Input type                                 Input Temperature Range                    Input Indication Range
                              tions       Value


 ThermoĆ ThermocouĆ            K            0     Ć200 to 1300 (_C) / Ć300 to 2300 (_F)     Ć220 to 1320 (_C) / Ć340 to 2340 (_F)
      l
 couple plel                                1     Ć20.0 to 500.0 (_C) / 0.0 to 900.0 (_F)   Ć40 to 520 (_C) / Ć40 to 940 (_F)
 inputtype
                               J            2     Ć100 to 850 (_C) / Ć100 to 1500 (_F)      Ć120 to 870 (_C) / Ć140 to 1540 (_F)
                                            3     Ć20.0 to 400.0 (_C) / 0.0 to 750.0 (_F)   Ć40 to 420 (_C) / Ć40 to 790 (_F)
                               T            4     Ć200 to 400 (_C) / Ć300 to 700 (_F)       Ć220 to 420 (_C) / Ć340 to 740 (_F)
                                           17     Ć199.9 to 400.0 (_C)/Ć199.9to700.0(_F)    Ć199.9to 420.0 (_C)/Ć199.9to740.0(_F)
                               E            5     0 to 600 (_C)       / 0 to 1100 (_F)      Ć20 to 620 (_C) / Ć40 to 1140 (_F)
                               L            6     Ć100 to 850 (_C) / Ć100 to 1500 (_F)      Ć120 to 870 (_C) / Ć140 to 1540 (_F)
                               U            7     Ć200 to 400 (_C) / Ć300 to 700 (_F)       Ć220 to 420 (_C) / Ć340 to 740 (_F)
                                           18     Ć199.9 to 400.0 (_C)/Ć199.9to700.0(_F)    Ć199.9to 420.0 (_C)/Ć199.9to740.0(_F)
                                N           8     Ć200 to 1300 (_C) / Ć300 to 2300 (_F)     Ć220 to 1320 (_C) / Ć340 to 2340 (_F)
                                R           9     0 to 1700 (_C) / 0 to 3000 (_F)           Ć20 to 1720 (_C) / Ć40 to 3040 (_F)
                                S          10     0 to 1700 (_C) / 0 to 3000 (_F)           Ć20 to 1720 (_C) / Ć40 to 3040 (_F)
                                B          11     100 to 1800 (_C) / 300 to 3200 (_F)       0 to 1820 (_C) / 0 to 3240 (_F)
             NonĆcontact K10 to 70_C       12     0 to 90 (_C)        / 0 to 190 (_F)       Ć20 to 130 (_C) / Ć40 to 270 (_F)
             ttemperature K60 to 120_C
                     t                     13     0 to 120 (_C)       / 0 to 240 (_F)       Ć20 to 160 (_C ) / Ć40 to 320 (_F)
              sensor
              ES1A        K115 to 165_C    14     0 to 165 (_C)       / 0 to 320 (_F)       Ć20 to 205 (_C) / Ć40 to 400 (_F)
                          K160 to 260_C    15     0 to 260 (_C)       / 0 to 500 (_F)       Ć20 to 300 (_C) / Ć40 to 580 (_F)
              Analoginput 0 to 50mV        16     Oneoffollowingrangesdependingonthe        Ć5 to 105% of the setting range
                                                  resultsofscaling:Ć1999to9999,Ć199.9to     (However, Ć1999 to 9999 or Ć199.9 to
                                                  999.9                                     999.9is displayed)
 • O is the default for both input types.
 • The applicable standards for each of the above input ranges are as follows:
   K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B : JIS C1602Ć1995, IEC 584Ć1
   L                      : FeĆCuNi, DIN 43710Ć1985
   U                      : CuĆCuNi, DIN 43710Ć1985
   JPt100                 : JIS C 1604Ć1989, JIS C 1606Ć1989
   Pt100                  : JIS C 1604Ć1997 IEC 751

   Control Range
   • Platinum resistance thermometer and thermocouple input
       -20_C of temperature setting lower limit to +20_C of the temperature setting upper limit
       Or,
       -40_F of temperature setting lower limit to +40_F of the temperature setting upper limit
   • ES1A input
       Same as input indication range
   • Analog input
       -5% to +105% of scaling range


A-10
SETUP LEVELS DIAGRAM




SETUP LEVELS DIAGRAM
            The following diagram shows an overview of the setup levels on the E5GN.

            To move to the advanced function setting level and calibration level, you

            must enter passwords. Some parameters are not displayed depending on

            the protect level setting and the conditions of use.

            Control stops when you move from the operation level to the initial setting

            level.



                     Power ON




               Operation level                      Adjustment level                                          +     key
                                             key                                      +       key         The PV display
                                       Less than                                 1 second min.            flashes.
                                       1 second

                                                   key   3 seconds min.
                         key
               1 second min.                             key   The PV display flashes afĆ
                                                               ter one second.

                                                         Control stops.                                        +     key

                                                                                                           3 seconds min.



                                                               CommuĆ

                     Initial setting level                     nications
                                                                                             Protect level
                                                               setting level
                                                         key
                                                Less than
                                                1 second
                                                                                      * The key pressing time can
                         key                   Password input                             be changed in protect level
               1 second min.                   set value Ć169                           move time.




                                Advanced
                                function setting level




                                              Password input
                                              set value 1201




                                                                                            Control in progress
                                   Calibration level
                                                                                            Control stopped




                                                                                                                         A-11
APPENDIX




 PARAMETER FLOW
                                      • If you press the mode key at the last parameter in each level, you return
                                        to the top parameter in that level.

                                                          key 1 second min.                                            key 1 second min.
       Advanced function setting level                                            Initial setting level
                                                                                                                       key 3 second min.
               Parameter initialize                                                          Input type


               MultiĆSP uses                                                                 Scaling upper limit
                                                                                                              0 to 50 mV


                                                                                             Scaling lower limit
               SP ramp set value

                                                                                             Decimal point
               Standby sequence reset method
               Reset conditions after standby sequence
               is canceled.                                                                  _C/_F selection
                                                                                                        Limit the set point.
               Alarm 1 open in alarm
               Set the alarm output 1 ON/OFF states.                                         Set point upper limit

               Alarm 1 hysteresis
                                                                                             Set point lower limit


                ST stable range                                                              PID Ć ON/OFF
                                                                                                      Select the control system.


               α                                                                             Standard heating/cooling control.
                   2-PID parameter


                                                                                             ST   SelfĆtuning
               MV upper limit

                                                 Limited to MV calĆ
                                                                                             Control period (OUT1)
                                                 culation value
               MV lower limit                                                                  Set the pulse output cycle.

                                                                                             Control period (OUT2)
               Input digital filter
                     Set the time constant in seconds.
                                                                                              Direct/reverse operation
                                                                                              Control the manipulated variable accordĆ
                                                                                              ing to the increase/decrease in the PV.
               Additional PV display
                     Displayed first in the operation level.                                  Alarm 1 type
                                                                                                  Select the alarm mode.

               MV display                                                                     Move to advanced
                                                                                              function setting level
                                                                                              Displayed only when Initial/               key
                                                                                              Communications protect=0           Less than
               Automatic return of display mode                                                                                    1 second
                                                                                        Password input set value Ć169
                     Automatic return to operation level when
                     the keys on the front panel are operated.
                                                                                  Communications setting level
               Alarm 1 latch                       Alarm ON latch
                                                                                             Communication                                key
                                                                                             unit No.                               Less than
                                                                                                                                    1 second
               Protect level move time
                                                                                             Baud rate

               Input error output
                                                                                             Data bit

               Cold junction compensation method
                                                                                             Stop bit

               MB command logic switching
                                                                                             Parity

               Move to calibration level                                      Communications setup on other party
                                                                              personal computer is different.




A-12
PARAMETER FLOW




          Power ON




                                           key Less than 1 second
       Operation level                                                     Adjustment level
                                           key Less than 1 second

                  Process value (PV)                                                AT execute/cancel    AutoĆtuning
                                                         SP can be
                                                         added in the
                                                         additional PV

                  Process value/Set point (PV/SP)        display                   Communications writing
                                                         parameter.                         Enable or disable writing by commuĆ
                                                                                            nications.


                  MultiĆSP                                                          Set point 0



                  Set point during SP ramp                                          Set point 1                             Set points
                                                                                                                            used by
                                                                                                                            multiĆSP

                  Run/stop                                                          Set point 2



                  Alarm value 1                                                     Set point 3

                                                             Set either
                                                             of these               Temperature input shift
                  UpperĆlimit alarm value 1                  parameters.                                                    1Ćpoint shift



                                                                                    UpperĆlimit temperaĆ
                  LowerĆlimit alarm value 1
                                                                                    ture input shift value

                                                                                                                            2Ćpoint shift
                                                                                    LowerĆlimit temperaĆ
                  MV monitor (OUT1)                                                 ture input shift value

                                                                                    Proportional band     P
                  MV monitor (OUT2)


                                                                                    Integral time         I
                                                                                                                            PID
                                                                                                                            settings

     +    key           +    key                                                    Derivative time       D
1 second min.      3* second min.
                             * The key pressing time can
                               be changed in protect level                         Cooling
         Protect level
                               move time.                                          coefficient               Used by the heating
                                                                                                              and cooling controller
                   Operation/adjustment protection                                  Dead band
                      Restricts display and modification of menus
                      in the operation and adjustment levels.

                   Initial setting/communications protection                        Manual reset value
                      Restricts display and modification of menus                       Clear the offset during
                      in the initial setup, operation level and adjustĆ                 stabilization of P or PD control.
                      ment levels.
                   Setting change protection                                        Hysteresis (OUT1)
                      Protects changes to setups by operaĆ
                      tion of the front panel keys.

                                                                                    Hysteresis (OUT2)




                                                                                                                                         A-13
I   NDEX


           (down) key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       1Ć3          Connecting the cold junction
           (level) key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    1Ć3          compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       6Ć4

           +           key combination               ..........         1Ć3          Control adjustment               ..................                 1Ć5

           (mode) key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       1Ć3          Control output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        1Ć5
                                                                                     Control period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        3Ć7
           (up) key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   1Ć3

Numbers                                                                          D
                                                                                     Cooling coefficient . . . . . . . . .            4Ć9, 4Ć10, 5Ć15

    1Ćpoint shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     4Ć2
                                                                                     Dead band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      4Ć9, 4Ć10, 5Ć15
    1Ćpoint shift method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            4Ć4
                                                                                     Decimal point            .............           5Ć7, 5Ć19, 5Ć27
    2ĆPID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       3Ć6
                                                                                     Derivative time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć12, 5Ć14
    2Ćpoint shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     4Ć3
                                                                                     Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć12
    2Ćpoint shift method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            4Ć4
                                                                                     Determining PID constants
    3Ćposition control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć10
                                                                                     (AT, ST manual setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć12
                                                                                            ,
A                                                                                    Dimensions           .........................                      2Ć2
    a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć30       Direct/reverse operation . . . . . . . . .                3Ć7, 5Ć23
    Additional PV display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć32                         Display       .............................                         1Ć2
    Adjustment level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    Advanced function
                                                               1Ć7, 5Ć10
                                                                                 E
                                                                                     Error display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ4
    setting level . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć7, 5Ć25, 6Ć2, AĆ8
                                                                                     Example of 2Ćpoint temperature
    Alarm 1 hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć29                      input shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   4Ć5
    Alarm 1 open in alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć29                         Executing ON/OFF control                      . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć10
    Alarm 1 type . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          5Ć7, 5Ć23, 5Ć28                Executing the SP ramp function
    Alarm hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          4Ć6          (limiting the SP change rate) . . . . . . . . . 4Ć15

    Alarm latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       4Ć6      F
    Alarm output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć17                  Fixing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       1Ć8
    Alarm type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć18                Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       1Ć2
    Alarm value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    Alarm value 1            .......................
                                                      3Ć19, 5Ć7, 5Ć28
                                                                        5Ć7
                                                                                 H
                                                                                     Heating and cooling control . . . . . . . . . . .                   4Ć9
    Analog input . . . . . . . . 1Ć5, 3Ć4, 4Ć8, 6Ć3, 6Ć10
                                                                                     How setup levels are configured and
    AT (autoĆtuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć12                    operating the keys on the front panel . . .                         1Ć6
    AT execute/cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć12, 5Ć11                         How to calculate input shift values
    Automatic return of display mode . . . . . 5Ć33                                  (2Ćpoint shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     4Ć3

C                                                                                    How to use keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
                                                                                     Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć10
                                                                                                                                                         1Ć3

    Calibrating analog input . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                6Ć7
                                                                                     Hysteresis (cool) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć16
    Calibrating input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           6Ć3
                                                                                     Hysteresis (heat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć16

                                                                                 I
    Calibrating platinum resistance
    thermometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          6Ć8
    Calibrating thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . .                   6Ć4          I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           1Ć4

    Calibration level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         1Ć8          Initial setting level . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć7, 5Ć17, AĆ7

    Changing the SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           3Ć9          Initial setting/communications
                                                                                     protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć18
    Characteristics            . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ3
                                                                                     Initial setup examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              3Ć2
    Checking indication accuracy . . . . . . . . . .                    6Ć9
                                                                                     Input digital filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć32
    Close in alarm/open in alarm . . . . . . . . . .                    4Ć7
                                                                                     Input error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ4
    Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            2Ć6
                                                                                     Input sensor types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            1Ć5
    Communications data length . . . . . . . . . 5Ć37
                                                                                     Input type . . . . . . . . 3Ć4, 5Ć7, 5Ć18, 5Ć27, AĆ10
    Communications function . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć5, 1Ć9
                                                                                     Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    2Ć2
    Communications parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć37
                                                                                     Integral time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć12, 5Ć14

                                                                                 K
    Communications setting level . . . . 5Ć36, AĆ9
    Communications setup level . . . . . . . . . . .                    1Ć7
                                                                                     Key protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć18
    Communications stop bit . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć37
    Communications unit No. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć37                         L
I   NDEX


    LowerĆlimit temperature input
    shift value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć13
                                                                                S
M
                                                                                    Scaling lower limit . . . . . . . . .          5Ć7, 5Ć19, 5Ć27
                                                                                    Scaling upper limit . . . . . . . . .          5Ć7, 5Ć19, 5Ć27
    Manipulated variable display . . . . . . . . . 5Ć33                             Selecting _C/_F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      3Ć5
    Manual reset value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć16                     Selecting parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           1Ć8
    Manual setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć15                 Selecting PID control or
    MB command logic switching . . . . . . . . . 5Ć36                               ON/OFF control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         3Ć6

    Memory error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ4                  Sensor input setting,
                                                                                    indication and control ranges                  . . . . . . . . AĆ10
    Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        2Ć3
                                                                                    Set point 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć11, 5Ć12
    MultiĆSP (set point 0 to 3)                  ............             5Ć5
                                                                                    Set point 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć11, 5Ć12
    MV lower limit             . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć31
                                                                                    Set point 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć11, 5Ć12
    MV monitor (cool)               ...................                   5Ć9
                                                                                    Set point 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć11, 5Ć12
    MV monitor (OUT1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                   5Ć8
                                                                                    Set point during SP ramp . . . . . . . .                4Ć15, 5Ć6
    MV upper limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć31

N
                                                                                    Set point limitter          . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć13
                                                                                    Set point lower limit            .................               5Ć6
    Names of parts             ......................                     1Ć2       Set point upper limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          5Ć6
    No.1 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        1Ć2       Setting change protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć18
    No.2 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        1Ć2       Setting heating and cooling control . . . 4Ć10

O                                                                                   Setting multiĆSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć11
                                                                                    Setting output specifications . . . . . . . . . .                3Ć7
    ON/OFF control . . . . . . . . . . .              3Ć6, 3Ć10, 3Ć11
    Operate the keys on the front panel . . . .                           3Ć4       Setting scaling upper and lower limits
                                                                                    (analog input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     4Ć8
    Operating the keys
    on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           1Ć8, 4Ć18            Setting the input type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           3Ć4

    Operation at start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć16                   Setting the PID / ON/OFF parameter . 3Ć11

    Operation indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                1Ć2       Setting the SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     3Ć9

    Operation                                                                       Setting the SP by key operation                   . . . . . . 4Ć11
    level . . . . . . 1Ć7, 3Ć11, 5Ć4, 5Ć10, 5Ć17, 5Ć33, AĆ6                         Setting the SP upper and
    Operation/adjustment protection . . . . . 4Ć18                                  lower limit values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć13

P                                                                                   Setting up communications data . . . . . . .
                                                                                    Setup levels diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ12
                                                                                                                                                     1Ć9

    Panel cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        2Ć2
                                                                                    Shifting input values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          4Ć2
    Parameter flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ13
                                                                                    SP ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć15, 4Ć16
    Parameter initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć26
                                                                                    SP ramp set value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć27
    Parameter operations list . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ6
                                                                                    Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ2
    Parameter structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               6Ć2
                                                                                    ST (selfĆtuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć13
    PID / ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć21
                                                                                    ST selfĆtuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć22
    PID constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć15
                                                                                    ST stable range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć14, 5Ć30
    Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          2Ć4
                                                                                    ST start conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć14
    Precautions when wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . .                     2Ć4
                                                                                    Standby sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          4Ć6, 5Ć28
    Preparations           ........................                       6Ć4
                                                                                    Standby sequence reset method . . . . . . . 5Ć28
    Proportional band . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć12, 5Ć14
                                                                                    Summary of alarm operations . . . . . . . . .                    4Ć7
    Proportional operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć15
    Protect level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć7, 5Ć3, AĆ9
                                                                                T
                                                                                    Temperature
    PV/SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć9, 5Ć5, 5Ć6, 5Ć33

R
                                                                                    input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć5, 4Ć8, 5Ć7, 5Ć20, 5Ć27
                                                                                    Temperature input shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć13
    Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ2           Temperature unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć2, 3Ć5
    Registering calibration data . . . . . . . . . . .                    6Ć3       Terminal arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               2Ć4
    Restart       .............................
    Restrictions during SP ramp operation
                                                                          4Ć6
                                                                         4Ć16
                                                                                U
                                                                                    UpperĆlimit temperature
    RSĆ485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    2Ć6       input shift value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć13
    Run/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      5Ć7       User calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       6Ć3
I   NDEX



W
    Using the key protection level                    . . . . . . . .    4Ć18




    Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    2Ć4
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.




                        Cat. No. H101ĆE1Ć03




                                                        Revision code




The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer

to previous version.
Revision code         Data                            Revised content
      1         October 1998   Original production

      2         January 2000   All Pages:   Modified the level key mark.

                               Page V:      Changed Meanings of Abbreviations.

                               Page 1-4:    Modified the diagram in I/O configuration.

                               Page 1-6:    Modified the diagram in How Setup Levels Are
                                            Configured and Operating the Key on the Front
                                            Panel.

                               Page 2-2:    Modified the diagram in Panel cutout.

                               Page 2-7:    Added 2.3 Requests at Installation.

                               Page 3-4:    Modified the table in List of Input Types.

                               Page 3-11: Added Setting the SP.

                               Page 3-14: Modified ST start conditions.

                               Page 3-17: Modified Alarm type.

                               Page 3-20: Added 3.10 Requests during Operation.

                               Page 4-6:    Added Alarm latch.

                               Page 4-9 to 10: Added new pages.

                               Page 5-3:    Modified the diagram in Protect Level.

                               Page 5-4:    Modified the diagram in Operation level.

                               Page 5-9:    Added MV monitor (OUT2).

                               Page 5-10: Modified the diagram in Adjustment level.

                               Page 5-17: Modified the diagram in Initial setting level.

                               Page 5-18: Modified the table in Input type.

                               Page 5-21: Added Standard/heating and cooling.

                               Page 5-22: Changed the default in ST self-tuning.

                               Page 5-23: Modified Alarm 1 type1.

                               Page 5-25: Modified the diagram in Advanced Function
                                            Setting Level.

                               Page 5-35 to 37: Added new pages.

                               Page A-2:    Modified the table in Ratings.

                               Page A-3:    Modified the table in Characteristics.

                               Page A-6:    Modified the table in Operation level and AdĆ
                                            justment level.

                               Page A-7:    Modified the table in Initial setting level.

                               Page A-8:    Modified the table in Advanced function setting
                                            level.

                               Page A-9:    Modified the table in SENSOR INPUT SETĆ
                                            TING AND INDICATION RANGES.

                               Page A-9:    Added Control range.

                               Page A-10: Modified the diagram in SETUP LEVELS DIAĆ
                                            GRAM.

                               Page A-11 to 12: Modified the diagram in PARAMETER
                                            FLOW.




A-2
Revision code         Data                       Revised content
      3         July 2000    Page V:     Added Meanings of Abbreviations.

                             Page VI:    Added Appendix.

                             Page 1-2:   Modified Display description.

                             Page 1-5:   Modified Main functions description.

                             Page 1-7:   Modified Advanced function setting level.

                             Page 2-3:   Modified Mounting.

                             Page 2-5:   Modified illustration and Alarm output 1/control
                                         output 2.

                             Page 2-6:   Modified illustration.

                             Page 3-2:   Modified Initial setting level part.

                             Page 3-4:   Added Set value 17 and 18.

                             Page 3-8:   Modified Temperature unit and Direct/reverse
                                         operation.

                             Page 3-10: Modified illustration

                             Page 3-11: Modified table in Parameters.

                             Page 3-18: Modified *4.

                             Page 4-8:   Modified illustration.

                             Page 4-9:   Modified Dead band.

                             Page 4-11: Modified (1) in Setup.

                             Page 5-4:   Added description text.

                             Page 5-5:   Modified table and text in PV and PV/SP.

                             Page 5-7:   Modified Alarm value 1.

                             Page 5-8:   Modified Upper-limit alarm value 1 and MV
                                         monitor (out 1).

                             Page 5-18: Added Set value 17 and 18.

                             Page 5-31: Added Heating and cooling.

                             Page 5-34: Modified Alarm 1 latch.

                             Page 6-4:   Added 17.18 to Input types.

                             Page 6-6:   Added 17.18 to Input types and modified (14).

                             Page A-2:   Modified Relay output in the table.

                             Page A-4:   Added Analog input to Meaning.

                             Page A-5:   Added diagram.

                             Page A-6:   Added Cooling coefficient and Dead band to
                                         Adjustment level.

                             Page A-8:   Modified table in Advanced function setting levĆ
                                         el.

                             Page A-10: Added Input indication range to table. Added
                                         17.18 to Input types.

                March 2002   Page 2-2:   Modified the diagram in Panel cutout.

                             Page A-7:   Modified the table in Initial setting level.

                             Page A-12 to 13: Modified the diagram in PARAMETER
                                         FLOW.
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
     1 Commerce Drive
     Schaumburg, IL 60173 USA
     800.55.OMRON (66766)

 OMRON CANADA, INC.
     885 Milner Avenue
     Scarborough, Ontario M1B 5V8
     416.286.6465

 OMRON ON-LINE
     Global - http://www.omron.com
     USA - http://www.omron.com/oei
     Canada - http://www.omron.com/oci




H101-E1-3      Printed in U.S.A.   ©2002 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC   Specifications subject to change without notice.

More Related Content

PDF
Vf as1 operation-man
PDF
ASL Intercom PS289
PDF
Fr a024 a044
PDF
Sv i p5a-manual_(english)
PDF
ASL Intercom PS4379
PDF
Vf ps1 instruction manual
PDF
User manual sde-3001-3003-english_web-0720
Vf as1 operation-man
ASL Intercom PS289
Fr a024 a044
Sv i p5a-manual_(english)
ASL Intercom PS4379
Vf ps1 instruction manual
User manual sde-3001-3003-english_web-0720

What's hot (14)

PDF
I g5a manual_v2.4_+110131
PDF
Cummins onan egmbh p1100i 50 hz portable inverter generator set service repai...
PDF
Fvr e11 manual
PDF
Bien tan ls tai lieu huong dan su dung bien tan i g5 series 1-dienhathe.vn
PDF
PDF
I g5a manual_v2.4_ 110131
PDF
Sv ig5a manual dienhathe.vn
PDF
Dpc3010
PDF
ASL Intercom PS279
PDF
Fr a500
PDF
DSIDS User manual for ds product (ver1.3)
PDF
I v5 eng_110526
PDF
Sv i p5a-eng_600v_120615
PDF
Instruction Manual ARMASIGHT AVENGER Series NV Monocular | Optics Trade
I g5a manual_v2.4_+110131
Cummins onan egmbh p1100i 50 hz portable inverter generator set service repai...
Fvr e11 manual
Bien tan ls tai lieu huong dan su dung bien tan i g5 series 1-dienhathe.vn
I g5a manual_v2.4_ 110131
Sv ig5a manual dienhathe.vn
Dpc3010
ASL Intercom PS279
Fr a500
DSIDS User manual for ds product (ver1.3)
I v5 eng_110526
Sv i p5a-eng_600v_120615
Instruction Manual ARMASIGHT AVENGER Series NV Monocular | Optics Trade
Ad

Viewers also liked (15)

PDF
Manual contrex polvo
PPTX
Tm powerpoint template
PPTX
10 tips for your next book deal
PPTX
Wilder precentacion
PPT
Revision of tax assessments
PPTX
How to overcome writer's block
PDF
Parking
PPTX
Tips For Effective Scientific Writing
PPS
Zoom
PDF
フォトエスノグラフィ 鉄子
PDF
フォトエスノグラフィ Moku2
PDF
フォトエスノグラフィ ブラック
PPS
Zoom
PDF
フォトエスノグラフィ ライトブルー5
PPS
Teka teki
Manual contrex polvo
Tm powerpoint template
10 tips for your next book deal
Wilder precentacion
Revision of tax assessments
How to overcome writer's block
Parking
Tips For Effective Scientific Writing
Zoom
フォトエスノグラフィ 鉄子
フォトエスノグラフィ Moku2
フォトエスノグラフィ ブラック
Zoom
フォトエスノグラフィ ライトブルー5
Teka teki
Ad

Similar to Manual e5 cn omrom (20)

PDF
B 64483 en-01
PDF
Profibus Dp Interface Module Users Manual Qj71 Pb92 D Sh Na 0
PDF
Manual de IHM Mitsubishi da serie GOT100
PDF
sup-dc2000-digital-analyzer-monitor-user-manual.pdf
PDF
Got a970
PDF
Mitsubishi numerical protection relay melpro d series dienhathe.vn
PDF
How to use the good obd tuning Honda GNA600?
PDF
Roland V-440 HD
PDF
V 440 Hd R E2
PDF
V 440 Hd R E2
PDF
Qj71 Pb92 V
PDF
Omron catalog bientan-omron_3g3jx
PDF
Panasonic ag dvx100-b
PDF
Sh3511m
PDF
Mitsubishi s500 e-vfd-detailed
PDF
controlpanelna-guideline-icp-us.pdf
PDF
Manual tx nr808-en
 
PDF
Korg1 10
PDF
Jy997d16501m
B 64483 en-01
Profibus Dp Interface Module Users Manual Qj71 Pb92 D Sh Na 0
Manual de IHM Mitsubishi da serie GOT100
sup-dc2000-digital-analyzer-monitor-user-manual.pdf
Got a970
Mitsubishi numerical protection relay melpro d series dienhathe.vn
How to use the good obd tuning Honda GNA600?
Roland V-440 HD
V 440 Hd R E2
V 440 Hd R E2
Qj71 Pb92 V
Omron catalog bientan-omron_3g3jx
Panasonic ag dvx100-b
Sh3511m
Mitsubishi s500 e-vfd-detailed
controlpanelna-guideline-icp-us.pdf
Manual tx nr808-en
 
Korg1 10
Jy997d16501m

Manual e5 cn omrom

  • 1. Cat. No. H101-E1-3 E5GN Temperature Controller USER MANUAL
  • 2. Preface The E5GN compact temperature controller features the following: • The E5GN can be mounted on compact panels • The user can select from thermocouple, platinum resistance thermometer, nonĆconĆ tact temperature sensor and analog voltage inputs. • The user can select AT (autoĆtuning) and ST (selfĆtuning) as tuning functions. • The user can use the communications function (when the communications function is supported). • The user can calibrate sensor input. • The E5GN features a watertight construction (NEMA4X: equivalent to IP66). • The E5GN conforms to UL/CSA/IEC safety standards and EMC standards. This User's Manual describes how to use the E5GN. Before using your E5GN, thoroughly read and understand this manual in order to ensure correct use. Also, store this manual in a safe place so that it can be retrieved whenever necessary. * For an additional description of the communications function, also refer to the E5AN/EN/CN/GN Temperature Controller, Communications Function User's Manuals (Cat. No. H102) E OMRON, 1998 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its highĆquality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. NevertheĆ less, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication. E OMRON, 1998 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its highĆquality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. NevertheĆ less, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication. I
  • 3. PRECAUTIONS When the product is used under the circumstances or environment described in this manual always adhere to the limitations of the rating and functions. Also, for safety, take countermeasures such as fitting fail safe installations. DO NOT USE : • In circumstances or environments that have not been described below in this manual. • For control in nuclear power railway aircraft, vehicle, incinerator medical, entertainment, , , , or safety applications. • Where death or serious property damage may occur or where extensive safety precautions , are required. II
  • 4. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS J Safety Signal Words This manual uses the following signal words to mark safety precautions for the E5GN. These precautions provide important information for the safe application of the product. You must be sure to follow the instructions provided in all safety precautions. Indicates information that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or WARNING serious injury. Indicates information that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or CAUTION minor injury damage to the product, or faulty operation. , J Safety Precautions CAUTION F Electric Shock Warning Do not touch the terminals while the power is ON. Doing so may cause an electric shock. Do not allow metal fragments or lead wire scraps to fall inside this product. These may cause electric shock, fire or malfunction. Never disassemble, repair or modify the product. Doing so may cause electric shock, fire or malfunction. Do not use the product in flammable and explosive gas atmospheres. The life expectancy of the output relays varies greatly with the switching capacity and other switching conditions. Always use the output relays within their rated load and electrical life expectancy If an outĆ . put relay is used beyond its life expectancy its contacts may become fused or burned. , Use the product within the rated load. Not doing so may cause damage or burning. Use this product within the rated supply voltage. Not doing so may cause damage or burning. Tighten the terminal screws properly Tighten them to a torque of 0.24 N m (2.5kgfcm) max on termiĆ . nals 1 to 6. Tighten them to a torque of 0.13 Nm (1.4kgfcm) max on terminals 7 to 9. Loose screws may cause malfunction. Set all settings according to the control target of the product. If the settings are not appropriate for the control target, the product may operate in an unexpected manĆ ner, resulting in damage to the product or resulting in accidents. To maintain safety in the event of a product malfunction, always take appropriate safety measures, such as installing an alarm on a separate line to prevent excessive temperature rise. If a malfunction prevents proper control, a major accident may result. III
  • 5. NOTICE Be sure to observe these precautions to ensure safe use. (1) Do not wire unused terminals. (2) Be sure to wire properly with correct polarity of terminals. (3) To reduce induction noise, separate the highĆvoltage or largeĆcurrent power lines from other lines, and avoid parallel or common wiring with the power lines when you are wiring to the terminals. We recommend using separating pipes, ducts, or shielded lines. (4) Do not use this product in the following places: • Places subject to dust or corrosive gases (in particular, sulfide gas and ammonia gas) • Places subject to high humidity, condensation or freezing • Places subject to direct sunlight • Places subject to vibration and large shocks • Places subject to splashing liquid or oily atmosphere • Places directly subject to heat radiated from heating equipment • Places subject to intense temperature changes (5) To allow heat to escape, do not block the area around the product. (Ensure that enough space is left for the heat to escape.) Do not block the ventilation holes on the casing. (6) When you have removed the terminal plate, never touch electric components inside or subject the internal mechanism to shock. (7) Cleaning: Do not use paint thinner or the equivalent. Use standard grade alcohol to clean the prodĆ uct. (8) Use AWG24 to AWG14 leads for terminal Nos.1 to 6 and AWG28 to AWG22 leads for terminal Nos.7 to 9 (with lead cover peel back allowance of 5 or 6 mm). (9) Allow as much space as possible between the E5GN and devices that generate powerful highĆfreĆ quency noise (e.g. highĆfrequency welders, highĆfrequency sewing machines) or surges. (10) When executing selfĆtuning, turn the load (e.g. heater) ON simultaneously or before you turn the E5GN ON. If you turn the E5GN ON before turning the load ON, correct selfĆtuning results and optimum control may no longer be obtained. (11) Use a 100 to 240 VAC (50/60 Hz), 24 VAC (50/60 Hz) or 24 VDC power supply matched to the power specifications of the E5GN. Also, make sure that the rated voltage is attained within two seconds of turning the power ON. (12) Attach a surge suppresser or noise filter to peripheral devices that generate noise (in particular, motors, transformers, solenoids, magnetic coils or other equipment that have an inductance comĆ ponent). (13) When mounting a noise filter on the power supply, be sure to first check the filter's voltage and current capacity, and then mount the filter as close as possible to the E5GN. (14) Use within the following temperature and humidity ranges: • Temperature: Ć10 to 55_C, Humidity: 25 to 85% (with no icing or condensation) If the E5GN is installed inside a control board, the ambient temperature must be kept to under 55_C, including the temperature around the E5GN. If the E5GN is subjected to heat radiation, use a fan to cool the surface of the E5GN to under 55_C. (15) Store within the following temperature and humidity ranges: • Temperature: Ć25 to 65_C, Humidity: 25 to 85% (with no icing or condensation) (16) Never place heavy objects on, or apply pressure to the E5GN as it may cause it to deform and deteriĆ orate during use or storage. (17) Avoid using the E5GN in places near a radio, television set, or wireless installation. These devices can cause radio disturbances which adversely affect the performance of the E5GN. IV
  • 6. Conventions Used in This Manual J Meanings of Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used in parameter names, figures and in text explanations. These abbreviations mean the following: Symbol Term PV Process value SP Set point SV Set value AT AutoĆtuning ST SelfĆtuning EU Engineering unit *1 *1 EU stands for Engineering Unit. EU is used as the minimum unit for engineering units _ such as C, m, and g. The size of EU varies according to the input type. For example, when the input temperature _ _ setting range is -200 to +1300 C, 1 EU is 1 C, and when the input temperature setting range _ is -20.0 to +500.0 C, 1 EU is 0.1 C._ In the case of analog input, the size of EU varies according to the decimal point position of the scaling setting, and 1 EU becomes the minimum scaling unit. J How to Read Display Symbols The following tables show the correspondence between the symbols displayed on the displays and alphabet characters. A BCDE FGH I J K LM NOPQR S T UVWXY Z J Reference mark This mark indicates that extra, useful information follows, such as supplementary explanations and how to apply functions. V
  • 7. J How This Manual is Organized Purpose Related title Description F Learning about the Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the E5GN features, names of parts and typical functions. F Setting up Chapter 2 PREPARATIONS This chapter describes installation and wiring. F Basic operations Chapter 3 BASIC OPERATION and Chapter 5 PARAMETERS These chapters describe basic control examples. F Applied operations Chapter 4 APPLIED OPERATION and Chapter 5 PARAMETERS These chapters describe advanced functions to fully use the E5GN. F Calibration Chapter 6 CALIBRATION This chapter describes calibration method. F Appendix This chapter describes the unit specifications. There is also a parameter operations list to be used as a backup guide to the parameter setĆ tings. VI
  • 8. Table of Contents Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć1 1.1 Names of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć2 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć2 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć2 How to use keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć3 1.2 I/O Configuration and Main Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć4 I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć4 Main functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć5 1.3 How Setup Levels Are Configured and Operating the Keys on the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć6 Selecting parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć8 Fixing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć8 1.4 Communications Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć9 CHAPTER 2 PREPARATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć1 2.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć2 Panel cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć2 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć3 Removing and attaching the terminal plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć3 2.2 Wiring Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć4 Terminal arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć4 Precautions when wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć4 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć4 2.3 Requests at Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć7 To ensure prolonged use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć7 To reduce the influence of noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć7 To ensure high-precision measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć7 About waterproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć8 CHAPTER 3 BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć1 3.1 Initial Setup Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć2 3.2 Setting the Input Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć4 Input type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć4 3.3 Selecting _C/_F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć5 Temperature unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć5 3.4 Selecting PID Control or ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć6 3.5 Setting Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć7 Control period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć7 Direct/reverse operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć7
  • 9. 3.6 Setting the SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć9 Changing the SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć9 3.7 Executing ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć10 ON/OFF control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć10 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć11 3.8 Determining PID Constants (AT, ST, manual setup) . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć12 AT (autoĆtuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć12 ST (selfĆtuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć13 Manual setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć15 3.9 Alarm Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć17 Alarm type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć18 Alarm value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć19 3.10 Requests during Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć20 CHAPTER 4 APPLIED OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć1 4.1 Shifting Input Values ..................................... 4Ć2 Shifting input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć2 How to calculate input shift values (2Ćpoint shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć3 1Ćpoint shift method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć4 2Ćpoint shift method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć4 Example of 2Ćpoint temperature input shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć5 4.2 Alarm Hysteresis ........................................ 4Ć6 Standby sequence .................................................. 4Ć6 Alarm latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć6 Close in alarm/open in alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć7 4.3 Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits (analog input) . . . . . . . . 4Ć8 Analog input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć8 4.4 Executing Heating and Cooling Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć9 Heating and cooling control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć9 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć10 4.5 Setting MultiĆSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć11 Setting the SP by key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć11 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć11 4.6 Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values ............... 4Ć13 Set point limitter .................................................... 4Ć13 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć14 4.7 Executing the SP Ramp Function (limiting the SP change rate) 4Ć15 SP ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć15 4.8 To Move to the Advanced Function Setting Level ............ 4Ć17 4.9 Using the Key Protect level ............................... 4Ć18 Key protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć18 CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć1 Conventions Used in this Chapter .............................. 5Ć2 Protect Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć3 Operation Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć4 Adjustment Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć10 Initial Setting Level ........................................... 5Ć17
  • 10. Advanced Function Setting Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć25 Communications Setting Level ................................. 5Ć36 CHAPTER 6 CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć1 6.1 Parameter Structure ..................................... 6Ć2 6.2 User Calibration ......................................... 6Ć3 6.3 Calibrating Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć4 6.4 Calibrating Analog Input .................................. 6Ć7 6.5 Calibrating Platinum Resistance Thermometers ............. 6Ć8 6.6 Checking Indication Accuracy ............................. 6Ć9 APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ1 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ2 Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ2 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ3 ERROR DISPLAY ............................................ AĆ4 PARAMETER OPERATIONS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ6 SENSOR INPUT SETTING, INDICATION AND CONTROL RANGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ10 SETUP LEVELS DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ11 PARAMETER FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ12
  • 11. CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 1 1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 Names of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć2 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć2 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć2 How to use keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć3 1.2 I/O Configuration and Main Functions . . . 1Ć4 I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć4 Main functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć5 1.3 How Setup Levels Are Configured and Operating the Keys on the Front Panel . . . 1Ć6 Selecting parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć8 Fixing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć8 1.4 Communications Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć9 1-1
  • 12. CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 Names of Parts J Front panel Temperature unit No.1 display CMW STP OUT Operation indicators No.2 display Level key Up key Mode key Down key J Display F No.1 display Displays the process value or parameter type. Lights for approximately one second during startup. F No.2 display Displays the set point, parameter operation read value or the manipulated variable. Lights for approximately one second during startup. F Operation (1) AL (alarm) indicators Lights when alarm is ON. (2) CMW (communications writing control) Lights when communications writing is enabled and is out when it is disabled. (3) STP (stop) Lights when control of the E5GN has been stopped. During control, this indicator lights when the run/stop function has been stopped. (4) OUT (control output 1, control output 2) Lights when control output 1, or control output 2 is ON. F Temperature unit The temperature unit is displayed when the display unit parameter is set to a temperature. Indication is determined by the currently selected temĆ _ perature unit parameter set value. When this parameter is set to  C, _  is displayed, and when set to  F,  is displayed. Flashes during ST operation. 1-2
  • 13. 1.1 Names of Parts J How to use keys The following describes the basic functions of the front panel keys. F (level) key Press this key to select the setting levels. The setting level is selected in orĆ der operation level ↔ adjustment level and initial setting level ↔ communications setting level. F (mode) key Press this key to select parameters within each level. F (up) key Each press of this key increments values displayed on the No.2 display. Holding down this key continuously increments values. F (down) key Each press of this key decrements values displayed on the No.2 display. Holding down this key continuously decrements values. F + key This key combination sets the E5GN to the protect mode. For details on combination the protect level, see Chapter 5 parameters. 1-3
  • 14. CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1.2 I/O Configuration and Main Functions J I/O configuration OUT1 Control output 1 Controloutput 1 Temperature input/ analog input OUT2 Heating and cooling Control output 2 ALM1 Alarmoutput 1 Controller Alarm 1 Standard Input error Communications function 1-4
  • 15. 1.2 I/O Configuration and Main Functions J Main functions The following introduces the main functions of the E5GN. For details on each function and how to use the functions, see Chapter 3 onwards. F Input sensor • The following input sensors can be connected for temperature input: types Thermocouple : K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B NonĆcontact temperature sensor ES1A : K (10 to 70_C), K (60 to 120_C), K (115 to 165_C), K160 to 260_C Platinum resistance thermometer : JPt100, Pt100 Analog input : 0 to 50 mV F Control output • Control output is either relay or voltage output depending on the model of E5GN. j jj, alarm 1 • If heating and cooling control is selected on the E5GNĆ 1 output is used as alarm 2 output. F Alarms • Alarms are supported on the E5GNĆ 1 j jj . Set the alarm type and alarm value, or upperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarms. • If necessary, a more comprehensive alarm function can be achieved by setting the standby sequence, alarm hysteresis and close in alarm/ open in alarm, and alarm latch ON/OFF parameters. • When the input error output is set to ON, alarm output 1 turns ON when an input error occurs. F Control • Optimum PID constants can be set easily by AT (autoĆtuning) and ST adjustment (selfĆtuning). F Communications • Communications according to CompoWay/F *1 and Sysway*2 are supĆ function j j ported on the E5GNĆ 03 . Communications are carried out over the RSĆ485 interface. *1 CompoWay/F is a generalĆpurpose serial communicationsĆbased unified communications procedure developed by OMRON. CompoWay/F uses commands compliant with the wellĆestablished FINS, together with a uniĆ fied frame format on OMRON programmable controllers to facilitate communications between personal computers and components. *2 Sysway communication does not support alarm 3 output. 1-5
  • 16. CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1.3 How Setup Levels Are Configured and Operating the Keys on the Front Panel Parameters are divided into groups, each called a level. Each of the set values (setup items) in these levels is called a parameter. The parameĆ ters on the E5GN are divided into the following seven levels: When the E5GN is turned ON, all items in the display light for about one second. Power ON Operation level Adjustment level key + key + key Less than 1 second min. The PV display 1 second flashes . key 3 seconds min. key 1 second min. key The PV flashes after one second. Control stops. + key 3 seconds min. CommuĆ Initial setting level nications Protect level setting level key Less than 1 second * The key pressing time can be changed in protect leve key Password input move time. 1 second min. set value Ć169 Advanced function setting level Note : Communicationssetting level is displayed Password input set value 1201 only when E5GNĆ V03V with communicaĆ tions function is used. Control in progress Calibration level Control stopped Control in Control Stopped Progress Protect level f Ć Operation level f Ć Adjustment level f Ć Initial setting level Ć f Advanced function setting level Ć f Calibration level Ć f Communications setting level Ć f f : Indicates items that can be set. Of these levels, the initial setting level, communications setting level, advanced function setting level and calibration level can be used only when control has stopped. Note that the controller outputs are stopped when these four levels are selected. 1-6
  • 17. 1.3 How Setup Levels Are Configured and Operating the Keys on the Front Panel F Protect level • To move the mode at this level, simultaneously press the and keys for at least three seconds in the operation level or adjustment level. This level is for preventing unwanted or accidental modification of parameters. Protected levels will not be displayed, and so the parameĆ ters in that level cannot be modified. * The key pressing time can be changed in protect level move time. F Operation level • This level is displayed when you turn the power ON. You can move to the protect level, initial setting level and adjustment level from this level. • Normally, select this level during operation. During operation, the proĆ cess value, set point and manipulated variable can be monitored, and the alarm value and upperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarms can be monitored and modified. F Adjustment level • To move the mode at this level, press the key for less than one seĆ cond. • This level is for entering set values and offset values for control. This level contains parameters for setting the AT (autoĆtuning), communicaĆ tions writing enable/disable, hysteresis, multiĆSP input shift values and , PID constants. You can move to the top parameter of the initial setting level, protection level and operation level from here. F Initial setting • To move the mode at this level, press the key for at least three seconds level in the operation level or adjustment level. The PV display flashes after one second. • This level is for specifying the input type, selecting the control method, control period, setting direct/reverse action and alarm type. (When you move to the operation level from the initial setting level, all items in the display light.) • You can move to the advanced function setting level or communications setting level from this level. To return to the operation level, press the key for at least one second. To move to the communication setting level, press the key for less than one second. F Advanced • To move the mode at this level, after setting the Initial/communicaĆ function setting tions protection of the Protection level to 0, input the password level (Ć169) in the initial setting level. • You can move to the calibration level or initial level from this level. • This level is for setting the automatic return of display mode, MV limitĆ ter, standby sequence, alarm hysteresis, ST (selfĆtuning) and for moving to the user calibration level. F Communications • To move the mode at this level, press the key for less than one second setup level in the initial setting level. • When the communications function is used, set the communications conditions in this level. Communicating with a personal computer (host computer) allows set points to be read and written, and manipulated variables to be monitored. NOTE This level is available only on the E5GNĆ 03 . V V 1-7
  • 18. CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION F Calibration level • To move the mode at this level, you must enter the password 1201 in the advanced function setting level. This level is for offsetting deviation in the characteristics on the input circuit. • You cannot move to other levels by operating the keys on the front panel from the calibration level. To cancel this level, turn the power OFF then back ON again. J Selecting • To select parameters in each level, press the key. Each press of the parameters key advances to the next parameter. For details on each parameter, see Chapter 5. Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Paramete n J Fixing settings • If you press the key at the final parameter, the display returns to the top parameter for the current level. • To change parameter settings or setup, specify the setting using the or keys, and either leave the setting for at least two seconds or press the key. This fixes the setting. • When another level is selected, the parameter and setting on the display are fixed. • When you turn the power OFF, you must first fix the settings or parameĆ ter setup (by pressing the key or selecting another mode). The setĆ tings and parameter setup are sometimes not changed by merely pressĆ ing the or keys. 1-8
  • 19. 1.4 Communications Function 1.4 Communications Function The E5GN can be provided with a communications function that allows you to check and set controller parameters on a host computer. If the comĆ munications function is required, use the model supporting the commuĆ j j nications function E5GNĆ 03 . For details on the communications funcĆ tion, see the separate Communications Functions User's Manual. Follow the procedure below to move to the communication setting level. (1) Press the key for at least three seconds in the operation level. The level moves to the initial setting level. (2) Press the key for less than one second. The initial setting level moves to the communications setting level. (3) Pressing the key advances the parameters as shown in the followĆ ing figure. (4) Press the or keys to change the parameter setups. Communications unit No. Baud rate Data bit Stop bit Parity F Setting up Set the E5GN communications specifications so that they match the comĆ communications munications setup of the host computer. In the case of a oneĆtoĆN connecĆ data tion, match the communications setup of all units. Parameter Symbol Setting Set value Default Unit Communications unit No. 0 to 99 1 None Baud rate 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2 . , . , . , . , . 9.6 kbps Data bit 7, 8 7 Bit Stop bit 1, 2 2 Bit Parity None, even, odd , , Even None 1-9
  • 20. CHAPTER 2 PREPARATIONS CHAPTER 2 2 PREPARATIONS 2.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć2 Panel cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć2 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć3 Removing and attaching the terminal plate 2Ć3 2.2 Wiring Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć4 Terminal arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć4 Precautions when wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć4 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć4 2.3 Requests at Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć7 To ensure prolonged use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć7 To reduce the influence of noise . . . . . . . . . 2Ć7 To ensure high-precision measurement . . 2Ć7 About waterproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć8 2-1
  • 21. CHAPTER 2 PREPARATIONS 2.1 Installation J Dimensions F E5GN • External dimensions (Unit: mm) 48 3 100 (36.8) 24 35 22 44.8 * When carrying out maintenance on the E5GN, only the terminal plate 22 can be drawn out with the terminal leads still attached. J Panel cutout When mounted separately (unit : mm) When groupĆmounted (unit: mm) (48 number of units Ć2.5) +1.0 0 +0.3 22.2 0 40 min. +0.6 45 Waterproofing is not possible when 0 ground mounting several units. +0.3 0 22.2 • The recommended panel thickness is 1 to 5 mm. • Several units cannot be ground mounted close together vertically. (Observe the recommended mounting space limits.) • When two or more E5GNs are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating temperature given in the specifications. 2-2
  • 22. 2.1 Installation J Mounting (1) To ensure waterproofing, enclose the unit in the waterproof packing prior to mounting. Waterproofing is not possible when ground mounting several units. (2) Insert the E5GN into the mounting hole in the panel from the front. (3) Push the adapter along the E5GN body from the terminals up to the panel, and fasten temporarily. (4) Tighten the two fixing screws on the adapter. When tightening screws, tighten the two screws alternately keeping the torque to within approximately 0.29 to 0.39 Nm. Adapter Waterproof Panel J Removing and The E5GN can be replaced by removing the terminal plate. attaching the (1) Press down hard on the fasteners on both sides of the terminals to terminal plate unlock the terminal plate and pull upwards. (2) Draw out the terminal plate as it is. (3) Before you insert the terminal plate again, make sure that the pins match the positions of the holes in the terminal plate. 2-3
  • 23. CHAPTER 2 PREPARATIONS 2.2 Wiring Terminals J Terminal E5GN arrangement 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + - TC Input power Control output B(+) A(-) Communications supply Voltage output specifications PT 100 to 240 VAC DC12V 21mA A B B 24 VAC/DC - + Relay output Alarm output 1/Control Analog input (OUT1) output 2/Input error (ALM1/OUT2) J Precautions • Separate input leads and power lines in order to protect the controller and its lines from external noise. when wiring • Use AWG24 to AWG14 leads for terminal Nos.1 to 6 and AWG28 to AWG22 leads for terminal Nos.7 to 9. • Tighten the terminal screws using a torque no greater than 0.24 N m (2.5kgfcm) for terminal Nos.1 to 6, and a torque no greater than 0.13 Nm (1.4kgfcm) for terminal Nos.7 to 9. J Wiring F Power supply • Connect to terminal Nos.1 and 2. The power supply specifications are as follows: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 7 VA or 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 4 VA 24 VDC, 2.5 W (no polarity) • Standard insulation is applied to the power supply I/O sections. If reinĆ forced insulation is required, connect the input and output terminals to a device without any exposed currentĆcarrying parts or to a device with standard insulation suitable for the maximum operating voltage of the power supply I/O section. F Input • Connect to terminal Nos.7 to 9 as follows according to the input type. 7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9 - + - + V A B B Platinum resistance Thermocouple thermometer Analog input E5GNĆ jjjj 2-4
  • 24. 2.2 Wiring Terminals F Control output 1 • Terminal Nos.3 and 4 are for control output. The following diagram shows the available outputs and their internal equalizing circuits. Temperature +V controller GND 3 4 3 4 + - L Relay output Voltage output jjjj E5GNĆ • The following table shows the specifications for each output unit. Output type Specifications Relay 250 VAC, 2A, electrical life: 100,000 operations Voltage (PNP) PNP type, 12 VDC, 21 mA (with shortĆcircuit protection) • The voltage output (control output) is not electrically insulated from the internal circuits. When using a grounding thermocouple, do not connect the control output terminals to the ground. If the control output termiĆ nals are connected to the ground, errors will occur in the measured temĆ perature values as a result of leakage current. F Alarm output 1/ jj • On the E5GNĆ 1 , alarm output 1 (ALM1) is across terminal Nos.5 control output 2 and 6. The following diagram shows the internal equalizing circuits for alarm output 1. • When utilizing heating and cooling control, alarm output 1 becomes alarm output 2. • When the input error output is set to ON, alarm output 1 turns ON when an input error occurs. 5 6 ALM1/OUT2/Input error E5GNĆ jj1 • Relay specifications are as follows: SPSTĆNO, 250 VAC, 1A 2-5
  • 25. CHAPTER 2 PREPARATIONS F Communications • When carrying out communications on the E5GNĆ communications cable across terminal Nos.5 and 6. j j03 , connect the 5 6 B(+) A(-) RSĆ485 E5GNĆ j j03 Communications Unit Wiring Diagram Host computer RSĆ485 Shielded cable Ć + E5GN (No.1) E5GN (No.31) FG RSĆ485 RSĆ485 No Abbr. No Abbr. 6 A (-) 6 A(-) AB : d1c 5 B (+) 5 B(+) AB : d0c Terminator (120Ω, 1/2 W) • The RSĆ485 connection can be either oneĆtoĆone to oneĆtoĆN. Up to 32 units including the host computer can be connected in oneĆtoĆN systems. Use shielded, twisted pair cable (AWG 24 to AWG 14), and keep the total cable length to 500 m. • Specify both ends of the transmission path including the host computer as the end node (that is, connect terminators to both ends). The maximum terminal resistance is 54 Ohms. 2-6
  • 26. 2.3 Requests at Installation 2.3 Requests at Installation J To ensure Use the temperature in the following operating environment: Temperature : -10 to +55°C (icing and condensation not allowed) prolonged use Humidity : 25 to 85% When the temperature controller is incorporated in a control panel, make sure that the controller's ambient temperature and not the panel's ambiĆ ent temperature does not exceed 55°C. The life of electronic equipment such as temperature controllers is inĆ fluenced not only by the life determined by the relay switching count but also by the life of the electronic components used internally. The service life of components is dependent on the ambient temperature: the higher the ambient temperature becomes, the shorter the service life becomes, and vice versa. For this reason, the service life of the temperature controlĆ ler can be extended by lowering its internal temperature. Gang-mounting two or moretemperature controllers,or mountingtemperĆ ature controllers aboveeach other may causeheat to build up inside thetemĆ perature controllers, which will shorten their service life. When mounting temperature controllers like this, forced cooling measures such as a cooling fan for cooling thetemperature controllers must betaken into consideration. Prevent only the terminal block from being cooled. Otherwise, this may result in a measurement error. J To reduce the To reduce induction noise, the leads on the temperature controller's terĆ influence of noise minal block must be wired separately from large-voltage/large-current power leads. Also, avoid wiring leads in parallel with power leads or in the same wiring path. Other methods such as separating conduits and wiring ducts, or using shield wire are also effective. Attach a surge absorber or noise filter to peripheral equipment that generĆ ates noise (in particular, motors, transformers, solenoids, or other equipĆ ment that has a magnetic coil or other inductance component). When a noise filter is used at the power supply, first check the voltage or current, and attach the noise filter as close as possible to the temperature controller. Also, install the temperature controller as far away as possible from equipĆ ment that generates strong, high frequency (e.g. high-frequency welders, high-frequency sewing machines) or surges. J To ensure When the thermocouple leads are extended, be sure to use a compensating lead wire matched to the type of thermocouple. high-precision When the platinum resistance detector leads are extended, use the lead measurement having the smallest resistance to equalize the resistance of the three leads. Install the temperature controller so that it is horizontal. If there is a large error in the measurement values, make sure that input compensation has been set correctly. 2-7
  • 27. CHAPTER 2 PREPARATIONS J About The protective structure of this controller conforms to the following stanĆ waterproofing dards. Parts that are not indicated as being protected or that are indicated as IP j 0 are not waterproof. Front panel: NEMA4X NEMA4X for indoor use (equivalent to IP66) Rear case: IP20 Terminals: IP00 2-8
  • 28. CHAPTER 3 BASIC OPERATION CHAPTER 3 3 BASIC OPERATION 3.1 Initial Setup Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć2 3.2 Setting the Input Type ................. 3Ć4 Input type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć4 3.3 Selecting _C/_F ........................ 3Ć5 Temperature unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć5 3.4 Selecting PID Control or ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć6 3.5 Setting Output Specifications ........... 3Ć7 Control period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć7 Direct/reverse operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć7 3.6 Setting the SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć9 Changing the SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć9 3.7 Executing ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć10 ON/OFF control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć10 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć11 3.8 Determining PID Constants (AT ST, manual setup) , ................. 3Ć12 AT (autoĆtuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć12 ST (selfĆtuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć13 Manual setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć15 3.9 Alarm Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć17 Alarm type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć18 Alarm value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć19 3.10 Requests during Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć20 3-1
  • 29. CHAPTER 3 BASIC OPERATION 3.1 Initial Setup Examples On previous controllers, sensor input type, alarm type and control period were set by the DIP switches. These hardware settings are now set in parameters in setup menus. The and keys are used to switch between setup menus, and the amount of time that you hold the keys down for determines which setup menu you move to. This section describes two typical examples. F Typical example 1 Input type _ : 0 K thermocouple Ć200 to 1300 C Setup procedure Power ON Power ON Control method : ON/OFF control Alarm type : 2 upper limit Operation level Alarm value 1 _ : 20 C (deviation) Set point _ : 100 C Process value/set point Press key for at least three seconds. Initial setting level Control stops. Initial setting level Set input specifications Check input type. Input type Check that control In ON/OFF Set control specifications is ON/OFF control. control In PID control Check alarm type. Alarm 1 type Set alarm type Press key for at least one second. Control starts Operation level Press keys Process value/ _ to set set point to set point 100 C. During run Make sure that During stop Operation level control is running. Press keys Set alarm values Alarm value 1 _ to set alarm value to 20 C. Start operation Start operation 3-2
  • 30. 3.1 Initial Setup Examples F Typical example 2 Input type : 4 T thermocouple Ć200 to 400 C_ Control method : PID control ST (selfĆtuning) : OFF Calculate PID constants by AT (autoĆtuning) execution. Alarm type : 2 upper limit Alarm value 1 _ : 30 C (deviation) Set point : 150 C_ Setup procedure Power ON Power ON Operation level Process value/set point Press key for at least three seconds. Control stops. Initial setting level Initial setting level Press Set input specifications Input type keys to select input type. Press In ON/OFF Set control specifications keys to select control PID control. In PID control Press To execute ST keys to set ST To cancel ST Set alarm type to OFF. Check the Control period (heat) (unit: seconds) control period. Alarm 1 type Check alarm type. Press key for at least one second. Operation level After AT execution Press _ keys to set set Process value/ point to 150 C. set point During AT execution Press key for less than 1 second. Adjustment level Adjustment level Execute AT To execute AT AT execution (autoĆtuning). To cancel AT After AT execution (when PID control Press key for less than 1 second. is selected) During AT execution Operation level Control starts Process value/ Make sure that set point _ set point is 150 C. During run Make sure that During stop control is running. Operation level Press Alarm value 1 Set alarm values _ keys to set alarm value to 30 C. Start program execution Start operation 3-3
  • 31. CHAPTER 3 BASIC OPERATION 3.2 Setting the Input Type The E5GN supports four input types: platinum resistance, thermocouple, nonĆcontact temperature sensor and analog inputs. Set the input type matched to the sensor connected to the E5GN in the input type parameter. The E5GN specifications support two types of inputs, platinum resistance thermometer and nonĆcontact temperature sensor, thermocouple and anaĆ log input, whose set values differ. Check the type of E5GN at purchase. J Input type Operation Procedure Setting the input type thermocouple KĆ20.0 to 500.0 C. _ Operation level (1) Press the key for at least three seconds to move from the operaĆ tion level to the initial setting level. Initial setting level Input type (2) Press the key to enter the set value of the desired sensor. When _ you use K thermocouple (Ć20.0 to 500.0 C), enter 1 as the set value. Hint: The set value is fixed if you do not operate the keys on the front panel for two seconds after changing the parameter, or by pressing the or keys. List of Input Types Set Input type Name Input Temperature Setup Range Value Platinum resistance Platinum Pt100 0 Ć200 to 850 ( C) _ / Ć300 to 1500 ( F) _ thermometer h resistance i 1 _ Ć199.9 to 500.0 ( C) / Ć199.9 to 900.0 ( F) _ input type thermometer 2 0.0 to 100.0 ( C) _ / 0.0 to 210.0 ( F)_ JPt100 3 _ Ć199.9 to 500.0 ( C) / Ć199.9 to 900.0 ( F) _ 4 0.0 to 100.0 ( C) _ / 0.0 to 210.0 ( F)_ Set Input type Name Input Temperature Setup Range Value Thermocouple p Thermocouple p K 0 Ć200 to 1300 ( C) _ / Ć300 to 2300 ( F) _ input type i tt 1 Ć20.0 to 500.0 ( C) _ / 0.0 to 900.0 ( F)_ J 2 Ć100 to 850 ( C) _ / Ć100 to 1500 ( F) _ 3 Ć20 to 400.0 ( C) _ / 0.0 to 750.0 ( F)_ T 4 Ć200 to 400 ( C) _ / Ć300 to 700 ( F) _ 17 _ Ć199.9 to 400.0 ( C) / Ć199.9 to 700.0 ( F) _ E 5 _ 0 to 600 ( C) _ / 0 to 1100 ( F) L 6 Ć100 to 850 ( C) _ / Ć100 to 1500 ( F) _ U 7 Ć200 to 400 ( C) _ / Ć300 to 700 ( F) _ 18 _ Ć199.9 to 400.0 ( C) / Ć199.9 to 700.0 ( F) _ N 8 Ć200 to 1300 ( C) _ / Ć300 to 2300 ( F) _ R 9 0 to 1700 ( C) _ _ / 0 to 3000 ( F) S 10 0 to 1700 ( C) _ _ / 0 to 3000 ( F) B 11 100 to 1800 ( C) _ / 300 to 3200 ( F) _ NonĆcontact _ 10 to 70 C 12 _ 0 to 90 ( C) _ / 0 to 190 ( F) temperature _ 60 to 120 C 13 _ 0 to 120 ( C) _ / 0 to 240 ( F) sensor _ 115 to 165 C 14 _ 0 to 165 ( C) _ / 0 to 320 ( F) _ _ _ ES1A 160 to 260 C 15 0 to 260 ( C) / 0 to 500 ( F) Analog input 0 to 50mV 16 One of the following ranges depending on the results of scaling: Ć1999 to 9999, Ć199.9 to 999.9 Shaded ranges indicate default settings. 3-4
  • 32. 3.3 Selecting _C/_F 3.3 Selecting _C/_FF Selecting C/ _ _ J Temperature unit • Select either _C or _F as the temperature unit. • Set the temperature unit in the temperature unit parameter of initial setting level. Default is  : _C. Select _C Operation Procedure Operation level (1) Press the key for at least three seconds to move from the operaĆ tion level to the initial setting level. Initial setting level Input type (2) Select the temperature unit parameter by pressing the key. Press the or keys to select either _C or _F. : _C : _F (3) To return to the operation level press the key for at least one Temperatureunit second. 3-5
  • 33. CHAPTER 3 BASIC OPERATION 3.4 Selecting PID Control or ON/OFF Control The E5GN supports two control methods, 2ĆPID control and ON/OFF control. The control method is selected by the PID / ON/OFF parameter in the initial setting level. When this parameter is set to  , 2ĆPID control is set, and when set to  , ON/OFF control is set (default). F 2ĆPID control PID control is set by AT (autoĆtuning), ST (selfĆtuning) or manual setup. For PID control, set the PID constants in the proportional band (P), integral time (I) and derivative time (D) parameters. F ON/OFF control In ON/OFF control, the control output is turned ON when the process value is lower than the current set point, and the control output is turned OFF when the process value is higher than the current set point (reverse operation). 3-6
  • 34. 3.5 Setting Output Specifications 3.5 Setting Output Specifications J Control period • Set the output period (control period). Though a shorter period provides Control better control performance, we recommend setting the control period to period 20 seconds or more taking the life expectancy in the case of relay output (OUT1) into consideration. If necessary, readjust the control period by trial operation, for example, when the control period parameters are set to their defaults. • Set the control period in the control period (OUT1) parameter (initial setting level). Default is 20 seconds. J Direct/reverse • Direct operation refers to control where the manipulated variable is increased according to the increase in the process value. Alternatively, operation reverse operation refers to control where the manipulated variable is decreased according to the increase in the process value. Manipulated variable Manipulated variable 100% 100% 0% 0% Low temperature Set value High temperature Low temperature Set value High temperature Direct operation Reverse operation For example, when the process value (PV) (temperature) is lower than the set point (SP) (temperature) in a heating control system, the manipĆ ulated variable increases by the difference between the PV and SP valĆ ues. Accordingly, this becomes reverse operation in a heating control sysĆ tem, or alternatively, direct operation in a cooling control system. • Direct/reverse operation is set in the direct/reverse operation parameĆ ter (initial setting level). The direct/reverse operation parameter default is reverse operation. 3-7
  • 35. CHAPTER 3 BASIC OPERATION In this example, let's monitor the input type, temperature unit, Operation Procedure direct/reverse operation and control period (heat) parameters. input type =  : K thermocouple temperature unit =  : _C direct/reverse operation =  : reverse operation control period (OUT1) = 20 (secs) Operation level (1) Press the key for at least three seconds to move from the operaĆ PV/SP tion level to the initial setting level. (2) The input type is displayed. When you are setting the input type for Initial setting level Input type the first time,  : K thermocouple is set. (0 is set in the case of a platinum resistance thermometer.) To select a different sensor, press the or keys. Temperature unit (3) Select the temperature unit parameter by pressing the key. Default is  : _C. To select  : _F, press the key. (4) Select the control period (OUT1) parameter by pressing the Control period key. (OUT1) Default is 20. (5) Select the direct/reverse operation parameter by pressing the Direct/reverse operation key. Default is  : reverse operation. To select  : direct operation, press the key. Operation level (6) To return to the operation level press the key for at least one PV/SP second. 3-8
  • 36. 3.6 Setting the SP 3.6 Setting the SP Operation level The operation level is displayed when the E5GN is turned ON. The left display (No.1 display) displays the process value, and the right display (No.2 display) displays the set point. J Changing the SP • The set point cannot be changed when the operation/adjustment protection parameter is set to 3. For details, see 4.8 Using the Key Protect Levels. • To change the set point, press the or keys in the PV/SP parameter (operation level), and set the desired set value. The new set point is selected two seconds after you have specified the new value. In this example, let's change the set point from 0_C to 200_C. Operation Procedure Operation level (1) Normally, the PV/SP parameter is displayed. The set point is 0_C. (2) Press the or keys until the set point changes to 200_C. 3-9
  • 37. CHAPTER 3 BASIC OPERATION 3.7 Executing ON/OFF Control In ON/OFF control, the control output turns OFF when the currently controlled temperature reaches a preset set point. When the manipulated variable turns OFF, the temperature begins to fall and the control output turns ON again. This operation is repeated at a certain point. At this time, how much the temperature must fall before control turns ON again is determined by the hysteresis (OUT1) parameter. Also, how much the manipulated variable must be adjusted in response in the increase or decrease in the process value is determined by direct/reverse operation parameter. J ON/OFF control • Switching between 2ĆPID control and ON/OFF control is carried out by the PID / ON/OFF parameter (initial setting level). When this paramĆ eter is set to  , 2ĆPID control is selected, and when set to  , ON/OFF control is selected. Default is  . F Hysteresis • In ON/OFF control, the hysteresis is used as a differential for switching the output ON when the temperature moves away from the required set point, and is used to give stability around the set point. • The hysteresis width is called the hysteresis band. The control output (OUT1) function is set by hysteresis (OUT1). • In standard control (heating or cooling control), the hysteresis (OUT1) setting is used as the hysteresis setting in the adjustment level regardless of the control type, heating control or cooling control. Reverse operation Hysteresis (OUT1) ON OFF PV Set point F 3Ćposition • In heating and cooling control, a dead band (an area where both control outputs are 0) can be set to either the heating or cooling side. So, control 3Ćposition control is made possible. Reverse operation Dead band Hysteresis (OUT1) Hysteresis (OUT2) ON Heating Cooling side side OFF PV Set point 3-10
  • 38. 3.7 Executing ON/OFF Control Parameters Symbol Parameter Name: Level Description Standard/heating and cooling: For specifying control method Initial setting level PID / ON/OFF: For specifying control method Initial setting level Direct/reverse operation: For specifying control method Initial setting level Dead band: Heating and cooling control Adjustment level Cooling coefficient: Heating and cooling control Adjustment level Hysteresis (OUT1): ON/OFF control Adjustment level Hysteresis (OUT2): ON/OFF control Adjustment level J Setup To execute ON/OFF control, set the set point, PID / ON/OFF and hysteresis parameters. • Setting the PID / ON/OFF parameter In this example, let's first check that the PID / ON/OFF parameter is set Operation Procedure to  in the initial setting level. Operation level (1) Press the key for at least three seconds to move from the operaĆ PV tion level to the initial setting level. (2) The input type is the first parameter displayed when you have Initial setting level Input type moved to the initial setting level. (3) Select the PID / ON/OFF parameter by pressing the key. (4) Check that the set value is  (default). PID / ON/OFF (5) To return to the operation level press the key for at least one second. Next, set the set point value. • Setting the SP In this example, set the set point value (200). The lower display (No.2 disĆ Operation Procedure play) shows the set value (SP value). Operation level (1) Select PV/SP at the operation level. PV/SP (2) Use the keys to set the SP value. (For example, 200) To set the value either press the key or wait more than two seconds. 3-11
  • 39. CHAPTER 3 BASIC OPERATION 3.8 Determining PID Constants (AT, ST, manual setup) J AT (autoĆtuning) • When you execute autoĆtuning, the optimum PID constants for the set point during program execution are automatically set by forcibly changĆ ing the manipulated variable to calculate the characteristics (called the limit cycle method) of the control target. • To execute AT (autoĆtuning), specify  : AT execute, and to cancel AT (autoĆtuning), specify  : AT cancel. • AT (autoĆtuning) cannot be executed during ON/OFF control or STOP. • The result of AT (autoĆtuning) is mirrored in the proportional band (P), integral time (I) and derivative time (D) parameters in the adjustment level. Adjustment level Proportionalband Integratedtime Derivative time F Description AT (autoĆtuning) is started when the AT execute/cancel parameter is set to ON. During execution of AT, the No.1 display for the AT execute/canĆ cel parameter blinks. When AT ends, the AT execute/cancel parameter turns OFF, and the No.1 display stops blinking. AT execute/cancel No.1 display During AT execution If you move to the operation level during AT execution, the No.2 display blinks to indicate that AT is being executed. PV/SP No.2 display During AT execution Only the communications writing, run/stop and AT execution/canĆ cel parameters can be changed during AT execution. Other parameters cannot be changed. 3-12
  • 40. 3.8 Determining PID Constants (AT, ST, manual setup) Execute autoĆtuning (AT). Operation Procedure Adjustment Level (1) Press the key for less than one second to move from the operaĆ AT execute/ cancel tion level to the adjustment level. (2) Press the key to start execution of AT (autoĆtuning).  is displayed during AT execution. (3)  is displayed when AT ends. (4) To return to the operation level, press the key. Operation level PV J ST (selfĆtuning) The ST (selfĆtuning) function executes tuning from the start of program execution to calculate the PID constants matched to the control target. Once the PID constants have been calculated, ST is not executed when the next control operation is started as long as the set point remains unchanged. ST (selfĆtuning) is executed when the ST parameter is set to ON in the initial setting level. When the ST function is in operation, be sure to turn the power supply of the load connected to the control output ON simultaneously with or before starting operation of the E5GN. Execute selfĆtuning (ST). Operation Procedure Initial setting level (1) Press the key for at least three seconds to move from the operaĆ Input type tion level to the initial setting level. (2) Select the ST parameter by pressing the key. (3) Press the key to select  (default). (4) To return to the operation level, press the key. The temperature display blinks during selfĆtuning (ST) execution. ST About PID parameĆ When control characteristics are already known, the PID constants can be set ters directly to adjust control. PID parameters are set in the proportional band (P), integrated time (I) and derivative time (D) parameters in the adjustment level. 3-13
  • 41. CHAPTER 3 BASIC OPERATION F ST start SelfĆtuning by step response tuning (SRT) is started when the following conditions conditions are met after program execution is started and the set point is changed. At Start of Program Execution When Set Point Is Changed 1. Theset point at the start of program execuĆ 1. The new set point differs from the set point tion differs from the set point (See Note 1) (See Note 1) used when the previous SRT when the previous SRT was executed. was executed. 2. The difference between the temperature at 2. The set point change width is larger than(curĆ start of program execution is larger than rentproportionalband 1.27+4_C)orthe(ST (current proportional band 1.27+4_C) or stable range) whichever is larger. the (ST stable range) whichever is larger. 3. Duringreverse operation, the new set point 3. The temperature at the start of program is larger than the set point before the executionis smaller than the set point change; and during direct operation, the duringreverse operation, and is larger than new set point is smaller than the set point the set point during direct operation. beforethe change. 4. No reset from input error 4. The temperature is in a stable state (See Note2). (An equilibrium state is acceptable when the output is 0% when the power is turned ON.) Note: (1) The previous SRT-implemented set point is called the set point obĆ tained by calculating the PID constant by the previous SRT. (2) In this state, the measurement point is within the ST stable range. (3) In this state, the change width of the PV every 60 seconds is at the ST stable range or less. PID constants are not modified for the currently preset set point by self- tuning (ST) in the following instances: (1) When the PID constants have been changed manually with ST set to ON. (2) When auto-tuning (AT) has been executed. F ST stable range The ST stable range is a condition for determining the conditions under Operation Procedure which ST (selfĆtuning) functions. In this example, let's set the ST stable range to 20_C. Advanced function setting level (1) Select the ST stable range parameter by pressing the key in the ST stable range advanced function setting level. To move to this level, see 4.7 To Move to the Advanced Function SetĆ ting Level. (2) Set to 20_C (deviation) using the key. 3-14
  • 42. 3.8 Determining PID Constants (AT, ST, manual setup) J Manual setup The individual PID constants can be manually set in the Proportional band, Integral time and Derivative time parameters in the adjustĆ ment level. In this example, let's set the proportional band parameter to 10.0, the Operation Procedure integrated time parameter to 250 and the derivative time parameĆ ter to 45. Adjustment level (1) Press the key to move from the operation level to the adjustĆ AT execute/ cancel ment level. (2) Select proportional band by pressing the key. Proportional band (3) Press the or key to set the parameter to 10.0. (4) Select integrated time by pressing the key. (5) Press the or key to set the parameter to 250. Integrated (6) Select derivative time by pressing the key. time (7) Press the or key to set the parameter to 45. (8) To return to the operation level, press the key. Derivative time Proportional When PID constants I (integral time) and D (derivative time) are set to 0, control Operation is executed according to proportional operation. The default set point becomes the center value of the proportional band. Related parameter manual reset value (adjustment level) 3-15
  • 43. CHAPTER 3 BASIC OPERATION • When P (proportional band) is adjusted Set The curve rises gradually, and a long When P is Value stable time is achieved, preventing increased overshoot. Overshoot and hunting occur, howĆ Set When P is Value ever the set point is quickly reached decreased after which the curve stabilizes. • When I (integral time) is adjusted When I is It takes a long time for the process increased Set value to reach the set point. It takes Value time to achieve a stable state, howĆ ever there is little overshoot/underĆ shoot and hunting. When I is Set Overshoot/undershoot and hunting decreased Value occur, and the curve rises quickly. • When D (derivative time) is adjusted When D is Overshoot/undershoot and stable Set increased Value time are reduced, however, fine huntĆ ing occurs on changes in the curve itself. When D is Set Overshoot/undershoot increase, and decreased Value it takes time for the process value to reach the set point. 3-16
  • 44. 3.9 Alarm Output 3.9 Alarm Output • Alarm output conditions are determined by the combination of alarm type, alarm value and alarm hysteresis. For detail, see 4.2 Alarm hysteresis. • Alarms are supported on the E5GNĆ 1 j jjj (1Ćalarm model). • The following describes the alarm type, alarm value, upperĆlimit alarm and lowerĆlimit alarm parameters. 3-17
  • 45. CHAPTER 3 BASIC OPERATION J Alarm type Alarm Output Operation Set Alarm Type Value When alarm value When alarm value X is positive X is negative 0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF *1 L H UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit ON 1 *2 (deviation) OFF SP X X ON ON 2 UpperĆlimit(deviation) OFF OFF SP SP X X ON ON 3 LowerĆlimit(deviation) OFF OFF SP SP *1 L H UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit ON 4 *3 range (deviation) OFF SP *1 UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit L H ON 5 with standby sequence *4 OFF (deviation) SP X X UpperĆlimit with standby ON ON 6 sequence (deviation) OFF OFF SP SP X X LowerĆlimit with standby ON ON 7 sequence (deviation) OFF OFF SP SP X X ON ON 8 AbsoluteĆvalueupperĆlimit OFF OFF 0 0 X X ON ON 9 AbsoluteĆvaluelowerĆlimit OFF OFF 0 0 X X AbsoluteĆvalue upperĆlimit ON ON 10 with standby sequence OFF OFF 0 0 X X AbsoluteĆvalue lowerĆlimit ON ON 11 with standby sequence OFF OFF 0 0 *1 : The upperĆ and lowerĆlimit values, expressed as L and H, can be set independently for each alarm point with set values 1, 4 and 5. *2 : Set value : 1 UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Normally ON) H 0, L 0 L H SP SP L H L SP H y H 0, L 0 H 0, L 0 H 0, L 0 |H| |L| |H| |L| H L SP |H| |L| x H 0, L 0 SP H L |H| |L| *3 : Set value : 4 UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit range Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Normally OFF) H 0, L 0 L H SP SP L H L SP H y H 0, L 0 H 0, L 0 H 0, L 0 H L SP |H| |L| |H| |L| |H| |L| x H 0, L 0 SP H L |H| |L| *4 : Set value : 5 UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm with standby sequence *For the above upperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm Ć In cases 1 and 2, the alarm is normally OFF if upperĆ and lowerĆlimit values of hysteresis overlap. Ć In case 3, the alarm is normally OFF. *5 : Set value : 5 UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm with standby sequence The alarm is normally OFF if upperĆ and lowerĆlimit values of hysteresis overlap. • Set the alarm type in the alarm 1 type parameter (initial setting level). Default is 2: upperĆlimit alarm (deviation). 3-18
  • 46. 3.9 Alarm Output J Alarm value • Alarm values are indicated by X in the table on the previous page. When the upper and lower limits are set independently, H is displayed LowerĆlimit alarm value1 for upper limit values, and L is displayed for lower limit values. • To set the upperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm values for deviation, set the UpperĆlimit alarm value1 upper and lower limits in each of the Upper limit alarm value 1 and Lower limit alarm value 1 parameters (operation level). Alarm value1 Set alarm 1 to the upperĆlimit alarm. The following shows related Operation Procedure parameters and setups. In this example, the alarm output is active when the set point is exceeded by 10_C. (The temperature unit in this example is _C.) alarm 1 type = 2: upperĆlimit alarm (deviation) alarm value 1 = 10 Initial setting level (1) Press the key for at least three seconds to move from the operaĆ Input type tion level to the initial setting level. (2) Select the alarm 1 type parameter by pressing the key. Check Alarm 1 type that the alarm type parameter is set to 2 (default, upperĆlimit Operation level alarm). PV/SP (3) To return to the operation level press the key for at least one second. Alarm value 1 (4) Select alarm value 1 by pressing . (5) Press the key to set the parameter to 10. 3-19
  • 47. CHAPTER 3 BASIC OPERATION 3.10 Requests during Operation 1) About two seconds is required for outputs to turn ON when the power is turned ON. Take this into consideration when the temperature conĆ troller is incorporated into a sequence circuit. 2) Allow at least 30 minutes for warming up. 3) When self-tuning is used, turn the temperature controller and load (e.g. heater) ON simultaneously or turn the load ON before the temĆ perature controller. If the load is turned ON before the temperature controller, correct self-tuning and optimum control are no longer possible. When operation is started after warm-up, turn the power OFF once after warm-up is completed, and then turn the temperature controlĆ ler and load ON simultaneously (Instead of turning the temperature . controller power ON again, moving from the STOP to the RUN mode also is possible.) 4) The temperature controller may be subject to the influence of radio interference if used near a radio, TV or wireless equipment. 3-20
  • 48. CHAPTER 4 APPLIED OPERATION CHAPTER 4 4 APPLIED OPERATION 4.1 Shifting Input Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć2 Shifting input ......................... 4Ć2 How to calculate input shift values (2Ćpoint shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć3 1Ćpoint shift method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć4 2Ćpoint shift method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć4 Example of 2Ćpoint temperature input shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć5 4.2 Alarm Hysteresis ...................... 4Ć6 Standby sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć6 Alarm latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć6 Close in alarm/open in alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć7 4.3 Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits (analog input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć8 Analog input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć8 4.4 Executing Heating and Cooling Control . . 4Ć9 Heating and cooling control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć9 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć10 4.5 Setting MultiĆSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć11 Setting the SP by key operation ......... 4Ć11 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć11 4.6 Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć13 Set point limitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć13 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć14 4.7 Executing the SP Ramp Function (limiting the SP change rate) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć15 SP ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć15 4.8 To Move to the Advanced Function Setting Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć17 4.9 Using the Key Protect level ............. 4Ć18 Key protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć18 4-1
  • 49. CHAPTER 4 APPLIED OPERATION 4.1 Shifting Input Values J Shifting input • The input shift type matched to the sensor currently selected in the input type parameter is displayed. F 1Ćpoint shift • 2Ćpoint shift is applied only for nonĆcontact temperature sensors. TemperaĆ • With 1Ćpoint shift, only the value set to the Temperature input shift ture input shift parameter (adjustment level) is applied to the entire temperature input range. For example, if the input shift value is set to 1.2_C, the process value is treated as 201.2_C after input shift is applied when the proĆ cess value is 200_C. Temperature UpperĆlimit value After shift Before shift LowerĆlimit Input shift value value Input 0 100 In this example, let's shift the input of the K sensor by 1_C by 1Ćpoint Operation Procedure input shift. Operation level Operation level (1) Press the key to move from the operation level to the adjustĆ Adjustment level ment level. (2) Select the temperature input shift parameter by pressing the key. Temperatureinput (3) Press the or keys to set 1. shift (4) To return to the operation level, press the key. The process value 1_C larger than before shift is applied. Operation level 4-2
  • 50. 4.1 Shifting Input Values F 2Ćpoint shift • The input temperature range of nonĆcontact temperature sensors can UpperĆlimit be shifted by setting an individual value for the upper and lower points temperature input shift valĆ of the sensor range. This means that the shift can be applied equally ue across the range with separate values for each end of the range. For LowerĆlimit temperature example, if the upperĆlimit value is set to 2_C and the lowerĆlimit input shift valĆ ue value is set to 1_C, the sensor range is shifted by an average of 1.5_C at 50% input. • Set the upperĆlimit value in the upperĆlimit temperature input shift value parameter and the lowerĆlimit value in the lowerĆlimit temperaĆ ture input shift value parameter. Temperature UpperĆlimit temperature input shift value UpperĆlimit value After shift Before shift LowerĆlimit value Input 0 LowerĆlimit temperature 100 input shift value J How to calculate input shift values (2Ćpoint shift) When the nonĆcontact temperature sensor model ES1A is connected to the E5GN, an offset of several to several tens of a degree can occur. For this reason, offset the readout value by 1Ćpoint or 2Ćpoint shift as described in this item. This offset occurs as a bias current for detecting controller sensor error flows to the output impedance of the nonĆcontact temperature sensor. 2Ćpoint shift can be carried out only on nonĆcontact temperature sensors, and cannot be set for other input types. [Preparations] (1) Set to the temperature range matching the input specifications of the nonĆcontact temperature sensor. (ES1A is supported only in thermoĆ couple input types on the E5GN.) (2) Prepare a thermometer capable of measuring the temperature of the control target as shown in Figure 1 so that 1Ćpoint shift or 2Ćpoint shift can be carried out. NonĆcontact (C) Control target temperature sensor (B) Thermometer (A) E5GN Figure 1 Configuration When Compensating a NonĆcontact Temperature Sensor 4-3
  • 51. CHAPTER 4 APPLIED OPERATION J 1Ćpoint shift (1) In the configuration shown in Figure 1, bring the set point to near the value at which the temperature of the control target is to be conĆ method trolled. Let's assume that the control target temperature (C) and the control target temperature (B) are matching. (2) Check the control target temperature (B) and the controller readout (A). Take the following value as the input shift value, and set the same Adjustment level numerical values to  and  . UpperĆlimit temperature inĆ control target temperature (B) Ć controller readout (A) put shift value Figure 2 shows the effect of 1Ćpoint temperature input shift. LowerĆlimit temperature inĆ (3) After you have set the input shift values, check controller readout (A) put shift value and control target temperature (B). If they are almost the same, this completes temperature input shift. Controller readout (A) After shift Temperature readout after shift (e.g. 120_C) Input shift value (e.g. 10_C) Temperature readout before shift (e.g. 110_C) Before shift Temperature readout of 0 Near set point control target (B) (e.g. 120_C) Figure2 1Ćpoint Temperature Input Shift J 2Ćpoint shift Use 2Ćpoint input shift if you want to increase the accuracy of the readout values across the range of the sensor. method (1) Shift the controller readout by two points, near room temperature and near the value at which the temperature of the control target is to be controlled. For this reason, bring the control target temperature to near room temperature and to near the set point, and check control target temperature (B) and controller readout (A). (2) Using equations (1) and (2) calculate the upperĆ and lowerĆlimit temĆ perature input shift values from the readout and temperature to be shifted that you obtained in step 1. Figure 3 shows the effect of shift by 2Ćpoint temperature input shift. Controller readout (A) Set temperature upper limit YH After shift (e.g. 260_C) UpperĆlimittemperature Temperature readout input shift value after input shift X2 (e.g. 110_C) Before shift Temperature readout before input shift Y2 (e.g. 105_C) Temperature readout before input shift Y1 (e.g. 40_C) Temperature readout Temperature readout of after input shift X1 (e.g. 25_C) 0 X1 room temperature control target (B) LowerĆlimit temperature (e.g. 25_C) Near X2 set point (e.g. 110_C) input shift value Set temperature lower limit YL (e.g. 0_C) Figure3 2Ćpoint Temperature Input Shift 4-4
  • 52. 4.1 Shifting Input Values • Use the following equation to calculate the lowerĆlimit temperaĆ ture input shift value. + YL ĆĆ Y1 Y2 Y1 {(X2 Ć Y2) Ć (X1 Ć Y1)} ) (X1 Ć Y1)...equation 1 • Use the following equation to calculate the upperĆlimit temperaĆ ture input shift value. + YH ĆĆ Y1 Y2 Y1 {(X2 Ć Y2) Ć (X1 Ć Y1)} ) (X1 Ć Y1)...equation 2 (3) After you have set the calculated values to  and  , check controller readout (A) and control target temperature (B). (4) Although the input shift was carried out at two points, close to room temperature (ambient temperature), and near to the set point, select points close to each end of the sensor range to improve accuracy across the full range of the sensor measurement range. NOTE Before selecting these values, check that they will not damage the controller if applied. J Example of In this example, we use the ES1A K 0 to 260_C specification. 2Ćpoint YL an YH in equations 1 and 2 are set temperature lower limit YL is 0_C temperature input and set temperature upper limit YH is 260_C. Check the temperature of the control target. shift When the room temperature X1 is 25_C, the readout on the controller Y1 is 40_C, and when the temperature near the set point X2 is 110_C, the readout on the controller Y2 becomes 105_C. Adjustment level LowerĆlimit temperature input shift value LowerĆlimittemĆ perature input shift value + 105Ć Ć40 0 40 {(110 Ć 105) Ć (25 Ć 40)} ) (25 Ć 40) + Ć27.3(°C) UpperĆlimittemĆ UpperĆlimit temperature input shift value perature input shift value + 260 ĆĆ 40 105 40 {(110 Ć 105) Ć (25 Ć 40)} ) (25 Ć 40) + 52.7(°C) 4-5
  • 53. CHAPTER 4 APPLIED OPERATION 4.2 Alarm Hysteresis • The hysteresis of alarm outputs when alarms are switched ON/OFF can be set as follows: UpperĆlimit LowerĆlimit alarm alarm Alarm hysteresis Alarm hysteresis ON ON OFF OFF Alarm value Alarm value • Alarm hysteresis is set independently for each alarm in the alarm hysĆ teresis 1 parameters (advanced function setting level). Default is 0.2EU. J Standby • Standby sequence is a function which allows the alarm outputs to be temporarily disabled while the first alarm condition occurs. From here sequence on, the alarm output is active for future alarm conditions. • For example, in a standard heating application, if you used the standard low alarm, the alarm would be active from switching the controller ON. However, with Standby Sequence, the alarm output is disabled during the first warmup, and the temperature has to rise above the alarm set point before the alarm can become active. Then, if the temperĆ ature falls below the alarm set point, the output is active. F Restart • The standby sequence is canceled when an alarm is output. It is, howĆ ever, restarted later by the standby sequence parameter (advanced function setting level). For details, see the standby sequence parameter in Chapter 5, PaĆ rameters. J Alarm latch • Alarm latch is a function where alarm output once turned ON stays ON regardless of the temperature. • The alarm latch can be canceled by turning the power OFF. (Note, howĆ ever, that it can also be canceled by switching to the initial setting level, communications setting level, advanced function setting level or calĆ ibration level. 4-6
  • 54. 4.2 Alarm Hysteresis J Close in alarm/ • When the E5GN is set to close in alarm, the status of the alarm output is normally open. When set to open in alarm, the status of the alarm open in alarm output is output inverted, or normally closed. • Alarm type and close in alarm (normally open)/open in alarm (normally closed) can be set independently for each alarm. • Close in alarm/open in alarm is set in the alarm 1 open in alarm parameters (advanced function setting level). Default is  : close in alarm. • When alarm 1 open in alarm (advanced function setting level) is set to open in alarm, the heater burnout alarm and input error output also become open in alarm. Alarm Output Function Output Alarm LCD ON ON Lit Close in alarm OFF OFF Out ON OFF Lit Open in alarm OFF ON Out Alarm output turns OFF (relay contact open) at a power interruption and for about two seconds after the power is turned ON regardless of the close in alarm/open in alarm setting. F Summary of The figure below visually summarizes the above description of alarm alarm operations operations (when alarm type is set to lowerĆlimit alarm with standby sequence and E5GN is set to close in alarm). Alarm type: lowerĆlimit alarm with standby sequence PV Alarm value Alarm hysteresis Time Standby sequence canceled ON Alarm OFF ON (closed) output OFF (open) Parameters Symbol Parameter : Level Description Alarm 1 hysteresis: Alarm Advanced function setting level Standby sequence reset method: Alarm Advanced function setting level Alarm 1 open in alarm: Alarm Advanced function setting level 4-7
  • 55. CHAPTER 4 APPLIED OPERATION 4.3 Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits (analog input) J Analog input • When an analog input (voltage input) is selected, scaling matched to the Scaling control is possible. upperlimĆ • Scaling is set in the scaling upper limit, scaling lower limit and decĆ it imal point parameters (initial setting level). These parameters cannot Scaling be used when temperature input type is selected. lowerlimit • The scaling upper limit parameter sets the physical quantity to be Decimal expressed by the upper limit value of input, and the scaling lower limit point parameter sets the physical quantity to be expressed by the lowerĆlimit value of input. The decimal point parameter specifies the number of digits past the decimal point. • The following figure shows a scaling example of 0 to 5 mV input. After scaling, the humidity can be directly read. Readout (humidity) UpperĆlimit value (95.0%) LowerĆlimit value (10.0%) 0mV Input (mV) 0 50 In this example, let's set the scaling upperĆ and lowerĆlimits so that inputs Operation Procedure 0 to 50 mV are 10.0% to 95.0%. Initialsettinglevel (1) Press the key for at least three seconds to move from the operaĆ Inputtype tion level to the initial setting level. Scaling upper (2) Select scaling upper limit by pressing . limit (3) Press the or key to set the parameter to 950. (4) Select scaling lower limit by pressing . Scaling lower limit (5) Press the or key to set the parameter to 100. (6) Select the decimal point position by pressing . Decimalpoint (7) Press the or key to set the parameter to 1. (8) To return to the operation level press the key for at least one second. 4-8
  • 56. 4.4 Executing Heating and Cooling Control 4.4 Executing Heating and Cooling Control J Heating and Heating and cooling control can be used on E5ANĆ 3 Heating and cooling control operates when  controllers. : heating and cooling is j jjj cooling control selected in the standard/heating and cooling parameter. Select the stanĆ dard heating control or cooling control according to the following table: Setting Output Pirect/reverse Control Method Control output 1 Control output 2 operation standard control Reverse operation Control output (heat) Ć standard control Direct operation Control output (cool) Ć Heating and cooling Reverse operation Control output (heat) Control output (cool) control Heating and cooling Direct operation Control output (cool) Control output (heat) control (The parameter default is heating control (standard).) • When heating and cooling control is selected, the dead band and coolĆ ing coefficient parameters can be used. F Dead band The dead band is set with the set point as its center on the E5GNĆ 1 . j jj The dead band width is the set value of the dead band parameter (adjustĆ ment level). Setting a negative value produces an overlap band. Default is 0.0 EU. Dead band: Overlap band: Output dead band width = positive Output dead band width = negative Heating side Cooling side Heating side Cooling side PV PV 0 0 Set point Set point F Cooling If the heating and cooling characteristics of the control target greatly difĆ coefficient fer, preventing satisfactory control characteristics from being obtained by the same PID constants, adjust the proportional band (P) at the cooling side using the cooling coefficient to balance control between the heating and cooling sides. In heating and cooling control, P at the heating or coolĆ ing side is calculated by the following formula: Heating side P = P Cooling side P = P cooling coefficient The cooling coefficient is applied to control output 1 side P to obtain conĆ trol whose characteristics (control output 2 side P) differ from those on the control output 1 side. 4-9
  • 57. CHAPTER 4 APPLIED OPERATION Output Output Control output 1 side Control output 1 side P 1.0 P 1.0 Control output Control output 2 side P Control output Control output 2 side P 1 side P 1 side P PV PV 0 0 Set point Set point Control output 1 side P 0.8 Control output 1 side P 1.5 J Setup To set heating and cooling control, set the standard/heating and cooling, dead band and cooling coefficient parameters. • Setting heating and cooling control standard/heating and cooling = heating and cooling Operation Procedure Initial setting level (1) Press the key for at least three seconds to move from the operaĆ Standard/heating and cooling tion level to the initial setting level. (2) Select standard heating and cooling control in the initial setting level. : Standard control : Heating and cooling control • Setting dead band Dead band = 5 Operation Procedure Adjustment level (1) Select dead band in the adjustment level. Dead band (2) Use the keys to set the parameter to 5.0. The setting range is Ć199.9 to 999.9. • Setting cooling coefficient Cooling coefficient = 10 Operation Procedure Adjustment level (1) Select cooling coefficient in the adjustment level. Cooling coefficient In this example, set the parameter to 10. (2) Use the keys to set the parameter to 10.00. The setting range is 0.01 to 99.99. 4-10
  • 58. 4.5 Setting MultiĆSP 4.5 Setting MultiĆSP J Setting the SP by You can select set points 0 to 3 by changing the set value of the multiĆSP parameter. The multiĆSP display conditions are as follows: key operation The following table shows the relationship between the multiĆSP parameter set value and the selected set point. MultiĆSP Selected Set Point 0 Set point 0 1 Set point 1 2 Set point 2 3 Set point 3 J Setup Before you set the MultiĆSP, cancel protection and move to the advanced function setting level. Set MultiĆSP uses to ON in the advanced function setting level. In the following example, let's set the set point to 2. Operation Procedure protect level (1) Press the key and key simultaneously for at least three Operation /adjustment seconds to move from the operation level to the protect level. protection * The key pressing time can be changed in protect level move time (advanced function level). Initial setting/ (2) Select initial setting/communecations protection by pressing the key. communications protection Initial setup/ (3) Set the parameter to 0 (move to advanced function setting level communications protection enabled). Operation level (4) Press the key and key simultaneously for at least one second PV/SP to move from the protect level to the operation level. Initial setting level (5) Press the key for at least three seconds to move to the initial setĆ ting level. (6) Select move to advanced function setting level by pressing the key. (7) Press the key to enter the Ć169 (password). Advanced function (8) Select MultiĆSP uses by pressing the key. setting level Set the parameter to ON. Initial setting level (9) Press the key for at least one second to move to the initial setting level. Operation level (10) Press the key for at least one second to move to the operation level. 4-11
  • 59. CHAPTER 4 APPLIED OPERATION MultiĆSP (11) Select MultiĆSP by pressing the key. MultiĆSP (12) Press the key to set the parameter to 2 (set point 2). Parameters Symbol Parameter Name: Level Description MultiĆSP : Operation lenel For setting the set points Set point 0 : Adjustment level Set point 1 : Adjustment level Set point 0 to 3 Set point 2 : Adjustment level Set point 3 : Adjustment level 4-12
  • 60. 4.6 Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values 4.6 Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values J Set point limitter The setting range of the set point is limited by the set point limitter. The set point limitter is used to prevent the control target from reaching abnormal temperatures. The upperĆ and lowerĆlimit values of this set point limitter are set by the set point upper limit and set point lower limit parameters in the initial setting level, respectively. However, note that when the set point limitter is reset, the set point is forcibly changed to the upperĆ or lowerĆlimit value of the set point limitter if the set point is out of the limitter range. Also, when the input type and temperature unit are changed, the set point limitter is forcibly reset to the sensor setĆ ting range. Sensor range Set point limitter Setting range Set point Ę Changed to the A B new upper limit value Changed to upper Set point limit value C Input type changed Set point Set point UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit values of the limitter Ę B Sensor upperĆ and lowerĆlimit values (setting possible) (setting impossible) Parameters Symbol Parameters : Level Description Set point upper limit : Initial setting level For limiting SP setting Set point lower limit : Initial setting level For limiting SP setting 4-13
  • 61. CHAPTER 4 APPLIED OPERATION J Setup To set the set point upper and lower limits, set in the set point upper limit and set point lower limit parameters in the initial setting level. This example describes how to set the set point limitter Ć200 to 1300_C to input type K thermocouple. Ć200 1300 Sensor range Set point limitter Ć100 1000 • Setting the set point upper limit Set the set point upper limit parameter to 1000. Operation Procedure Initial setting level (1) Press the key for at least three seconds to move from the operaĆ Input type tion level to the initial setting level. (2) Select set point upper limit. Set point upper limit (3) Press the or key to set the parameter to 1000. • Setting the set point lower limit Set the set point lower limit parameter to Ć100. Operation Procedure Set point lower (1) Select set point lower limit in the initial setting level. limit (2) Press the or key to set the parameter to Ć100. 4-14
  • 62. 4.7 Executing the SP Ramp Function (limiting the SP change rate) 4.7 Executing the SP Ramp Function (limiting the SP change rate) J SP ramp With the SP ramp function, the controller operates according to the value (set point during SP ramp) limited by a change rate. The interval in which the set point during SP ramp is limited is referred to as the SP ramp. SP SP ramp SP after change SP ramp set value Time unit of ramp rate (min.) SP before change Time Change point The change rate during SP ramp is specified by the SP ramp set value parameter. The SP ramp set value default is OFF, and the SP ramp function is disabled. Changing of the ramp set point can be monitored in the set point during SP ramp parameter (operation level). Use this parameter during mountĆ ing of the SP ramp. Parameters Symbol Parameters : Level Description MV upper limit : For limiting manipulated variable Advanced function setting level MV lower limit : For limiting manipulated variable Advanced function setting level Set point upper limit: For limiting SP setting Initial setting level Set point lower limit: For limiting SP setting Initial setting level SP ramp set value: For limiting SP change rate Advanced function setting level 4-15
  • 63. CHAPTER 4 APPLIED OPERATION F Operation at start If the SP ramp function is enabled when the E5GN is turned ON, and when run is switched to from stop, the process value may reach the set point after SP ramp in the same way as when the set point is changed. In this case, operation is carried out with the process value regarded as the set point before the change was made. The direction of the SP ramp changes according to the relationship between the process value and the set point. PV SP PV SP SP SP SP ramp SP ramp Set point PV Same change rate Set point PV Time Time Power ON Power ON F Restrictions • Execution of autoĆtuning starts after the end of SP ramp. during SP ramp • When control is stopped or an error occurs, the SP ramp function is disĆ operation abled. 4-16
  • 64. 4.8 To Move to the Advanced Function Setting Level 4.8 To Move to the Advanced Function Setting Level To move to the advanced function setting level, you must cancel initial setting/communications protection in the protect level. In the default setting, you cannot move to the advanced function setting level. (1) Press the and keys simultaneously for at least three seconds in the operation level. * The key pressing time can be changed in protect level move time (advanced function level). Protect level (2) The controller moves to the protect level, and operation/adjustment operation/adjustĆ ment protection protection is displayed. initial setting/ (3) Press the key once to move to initial setting/communications communications protection protection. (4) Set the set value to 0 Operation level (5) Press the and keys simultaneously to return to the operaĆ PV/SP tion level. Initial setting level (6) Press the key for at least three seconds to move to the initial setĆ Input type ting level from the operation level. Move to advanced (7) Select the Move to advanced function setting level parameter by function setting level pressing the key. Advanced function (8) Press the key to enter the password (Ć169), and either press the setting level key or leave the setting for at least two seconds to move to the advanced function setting level from the initial setting level. 4-17
  • 65. CHAPTER 4 APPLIED OPERATION 4.9 Using the Key Protect level J Key protect • To move to the protect level, press the and keys simultaneously for at least three seconds. * The key pressing time can be changed in protect level move time (advanced function level). • The protect level protects parameters that are not changed during conĆ troller operation until operation is started to prevent them from being modified unintentionally. Three levels of protection are provided on the E5GN, operation/adjustment protection, initial setting/communicaĆ tions protection and setting change protection. • The protect level setting restricts the range of parameters that can be used. F Operation/adjustĆ The following table shows the relationship between set values and the ment protection range of protection. Set value Level 0 1 2 3 PV f f f f : Can be displayed and Operation O i PV/SP f f changed : Can be displayed level : Cannot be displayed Other and move to other levels Adjustment level not possible • When this parameter is set to 0, parameters are not protected. • Default is 0. F Initial setting/ This protect level restricts movement to the initial setting level, commuĆ communications nication setting level and advanced function setting level. protection Move to communications Set value Move to initial setting level setting level Possible (move to advanced function 0 setting level enabled parameter disĆ Possible played) Possible (move to advanced function 1 setting level enabled parameter not Possible displayed) 2 Not possible Not possible • Default is 1. F Setting change This protect level protects setup from being changed by operating the keys protection on the front panel. Set value Description OFF Setup can be changed by key operation. ON Setup cannot be changed by key operation. (The protect level can be changed.) • Default is OFF. 4-18
  • 66. CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS CHAPTER 5 5 PARAMETERS Conventions Used in this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć2 Protect Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć3 Operation Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć4 Adjustment Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć10 Initial Setting Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć17 Advanced Function Setting Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć25 Communications Setting Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć36 5-1
  • 67. CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS Conventions Used in this Chapter J Meanings of icons used in this chapter Describes the functions of the parameter. Function Describes the setting range and defaults of the parameter setting. Comment Describes the monitor range. Monitor Describes the parameter operations. Example of use Describes related parameters and items. See J About parameter display Parameters are displayed only when the Conditions of Use on the right of the parameter headĆ ing are satisfied. However, note that the settings of protected parameters are still valid, and are not displayed regardless of the conditions of use. AT Execute/cancel The control must be 2ĆPID control. Displayed symbol Parameter name Conditions of use J About the Order in Which Parameters Are Described in This Chapter Parameters are described level by level. The first page of each level lists the parameters available in that level. The parameter names in this list are listed in the order that they are displayed on the E5GN. 5-2
  • 68. Protect Level Three levels of protection are provided on the E5GN, operation/adjustment protection, initial setting/communications protection and setting change protection. These protect levels preĆ vent unwanted operation of the keys on the front panel in varying degrees. Power ON + key Protect level 3 seconds min. Operation Adjustment level level Page key 1 second min. Operation/adjustment 5Ć3 + key 1 second min. protection Initial setting/commuĆ nications protection 5Ć3 Protect level Setting change 5Ć3 Control in progress protection To move from the operation level to the protect level, press the and keys for at least three seconds. The settings of protected parameters are not displayed and so cannot be modified. Operation/adjustment protection Initial setting/communications protection Setting change protection This parameter specifies the range of parameters to be protected. indicates the default. F Operation/adjustment protection The following table shows the relationship between set values and the range of protection. Function Set value Level 0 1 2 3 : Can be displayed and changed f f f f f PV : Can be displayed Comment Operation O i PV/SP f : Cannot be displayed and move to level other levels not possible Other Adjustment level • Parameter items are not protected when the set value is set to 0. F Initial setting/communications protection This protect level restricts movement to the initial setting level and communication setting level. Set value Move to initial setting level Move to communications setting level Possible (move to advanced funcĆ 0 tion setting level enabled parameĆ Possible ter displayed) Possible (move to advanced funcĆ 1 tion setting level enabled parameĆ Possible ter not displayed) 2 Not possible Not possible F Setting change protection Changes to setups by key operation are restricted. Set value Description OFF Setup can be changed by key operation. ON Setup cannot be changed by key operation. (The protect level can be changed.) 5-3
  • 69. CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS Operation Level Display this level when you are to carry out control opĆ erations on the E5GN. You can set alarm values or Operation level monitor the manipulated variable in this level. Page Power ON PV 5Ć5 Operation Adjustment PV/SP 5Ć5 level key level less than 1 sec. MultiĆSP 5Ć5 key 3 seconds min. key 1 second key Flashes at 1 sec. min. Set point during SP 5Ć6 min. ramp Control stop Run/stop 5Ć7 CommuĆ Initial setting nications Alarm value 1 level key setup level 5Ć7 less than 1 sec. UpperĆlimit alarm value 1 5Ć8 LowerĆlimit alarm Control in progress value 1 5Ć8 Control stopped MV monitor (OUT1) 5Ć8 This level is automatically displayed immediately after MV monitor (OUT2) 5Ć9 the E5GN is turned ON. To move to other levels, press the key or the and keys. • You can change process value/set point by setting operation/adjustment protection to 0, 1, or 2. Process value/set point is displayed by setting value 3 only. • Protect setting is set in operation/adjustment protection level. 5-4
  • 70. Operation Level PV The additional PV display parameter must be set to ON. The process value is displayed on the No.1 display, and nothing is displayed (blank) on the No.2 display. Function Monitor Range Unit Process Input indication range (See page AĆ10). EU Value Monitor The decimal point position is dependent on the selected sensor. F Related parameters Input type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć18) See Set point upper limit Set point lower limit (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć20) PV/SP1. The process value is displayed on the No.1 display, and the set point is displayed on the No.2 display. Function Monitor Range Unit Process Input indication range (See page AĆ10). EU Value Set Point Set point lower limit to set point upper limit EU Refer to the PV parameter. See MultiĆSP (set point 0 to 3) The multiĆSP uses parameter must be set to ON. MultiĆSP allows you to set up to four set points (SP 0 to 3) in adjustment level. These can be switched by operating the keys on the front panel. In the parameter, enter set Function points 0 to 3. • MultiĆSP can also be selected by communications. See 5-5
  • 71. CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS Operation Level Set point during SP ramp The SP ramp set value parameter must not be set to OFF. This parameter monitors the set point during SP ramp. Ramp is a function for restricting the change width of the set point as a change rate. The set value is displayed when SP ramp set value parameter (advanced function Function setting level) is set. When the set point is out of the preset ramp, the set point is matched to the set point set in the PV/SP parameter. Monitor Range Unit SP: Set point lower limit to set point upper limit EU Monitor F Related parameters PV/SP (operation level) (p. 5Ć5) See SP ramp set value (advanced function setting level) (p. 5-27) Set point upper limit Set point lower limit (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć20) 5-6
  • 72. Operation Level Run/Stop This parameter specifies run and stop. When  : run is selected, control is running. When  : stop is selected, conĆ trol is stopped. When control is stopped, the display lights. Default is  . Function Alarm value 1 The control must be set to standard control. The alarm type must be set to other than upĆ per and lower limit alarm. This parameter sets the input value X in the alarm type list. • This parameter is used for setting the alarm values of alarm outputs. • During temperature input, the decimal point position is dependent on the currently Function selected sensor, and during analog input it is dependent on the decimal point parameter setting. Setting Range Unit Default Ć1999 to 9999 EU 0 Comment This parameter can be set alarm function OFF or other than upper and lower limit alarm. See F Related parameters Input type Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit Decimal point Alarm 1 type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć18, 19) Alarm 1 open in alarm Alarm 1 hysteresis (p. 5Ć29) Standby sequence reset method (p. 5Ć28) Alarm latch (p. 5Ć34) (advanced function setting level) 5-7
  • 73. CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS Operation Level UpperĆlimit alarm value 1 The control must be set to standard control. Alarm 1 type must be set to upper and lower limits, upper and lower limit range, or upperĆ LowerĆlimit alarm value 1 and lowerĆlimit alarm with standby sequence. This parameter independently sets the upperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm values when the mode for setting the upper and lower limits is selected for alarm 1 type (initial setting level). • This parameter sets the upper and lower limit values of alarm 1. • During temperature input, the decimal point position is dependent on the currently Function selected sensor, and during analog input it is dependent on the decimal point parameter setting. Setting Range Unit Default Ć1999 to 9999 EU 0 Comment F Related parameters Alarm 1 type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć23) See Standby sequence reset method (p. 5Ć28) Alarm 1 open in alarm Alarm 1 hysteresis (p. 5Ć29) Alarm 1 latch (p. 5Ć34) (advanced function setting level) MV monitor (OUT1) Manipulated variable display must be set to ON. This parameter is for monitoring the manipulated variable during operation. • This parameter cannot be set. • During standard control, the manipulated variable is monitored, and during heating Function and cooling control, the manipulated variable on the control output 1 side is moniĆ tored. • Default is OFF and the manipulated variable is not displayed. Control Monitor Range Unit Standard 0.0 to 100.0 % Heating and cooling 0.0 to 100.0 % Monitor F Related parameter Manipulated variable display (advanced setting level) (p. 5Ć33) See 5-8
  • 74. Operation Level MV monitor (OUT2) The control must be heating and cooling conĆ trol. Manipulated variable display must be set to ON. This parameter is for monitoring the manipulated variable on the control output 2 side during operation. • During heating and cooling control, the manipulated variable on the control output 2 side (OUT 2 terminal output) is monitored. Function Control Monitor Range Unit Heating and cooling 0.0 to 100.0 % F Related parameters Standard/heating and cooling (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć19) See Manipulated variable display (advanced function setting level) (p. 5Ć29) 5-9
  • 75. CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS Adjustment Level This level is for executing AT (autoĆtuning) or setting up the control. This level provides you with basic controller setup parameters for PID (proportional band, inteĆ gral time, derivative time). Power ON Adjustment level Operation Adjustment level level Page key less than 1 sec. AT execute/cancel 5Ć11 Control in progress Communications writing 5Ć11 To move to the adjustment level from the operation level, press the key for less than one second. Set point 0 5Ć12 • The set points 0 to 3 in the adjustment level are set values for switching the set point during multiĆSP Set point 1 5Ć12 input. • You can change adjustment level parameters by setĆ Set point 2 5Ć12 ting operation/adjustment protection to 0. If the protect level is set 1 to 3, adjustment level Set point 3 5Ć12 parameters cannot be displayed and the adjustment level cannot be moved to. Temperature input shift value 5Ć13 UpperĆlimit temperaĆ ture input shift value 5Ć13 LowerĆlimit temperaĆ ture input shift value 5Ć13 Proportional band 5Ć14 Integral time 5Ć14 Derivative time 5Ć14 Cooling coefficient 5Ć15 Dead band 5Ć15 Manual reset value 5Ć16 Hysteresis (OUT1) 5Ć16 Hysteresis (OUT2) 5Ć16 5-10
  • 76. Adjustment Level AT execute/cancel The E5GN must be in operation, and control must be 2ĆPID control. This parameter executes AT (autoĆtuning). • When you execute autoĆtuning, the optimum PID parameters proportional band, integral time and derivative time for the set point during program execution are Function automatically set by forcibly changing the manipulated variable to calculate the characteristics of the control target. • Normally, this parameter is set to  . If you press the or keys, the paramĆ eter is turned ON and AT is executed. Example AT cannot be executed when control has stopped or during ON/OFF control. of use • When AT execution ends, the parameter setting automatically returns to  . F Related parameters Proportional band Integral time Derivative time (adjustment level) (p. 5Ć14) See PID / ON/OFF (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć21) Communications writing Model E5GNĆ j j 03 must be used. This parameter enables/disables writing of parameters to the E5GN from the host (personal computer) by communications. Function ON : Writing enabled OFF : Writing disabled Default : OFF Comment F Related parameters MB command logic switching (advanced function level) (p.5Ć36) See Communication unit No. Baud rate Data bit Parity Stop bit (communicaĆ tions setting level) (p. 5Ć37) 5-11
  • 77. CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS Adjustment Level Set point 0 The MultiĆSP uses parameter must be set to ON. Set point 1 Set point 2 Set point 3 These parameters set the set points when the multiĆSP function is used. The values set in these parameters can be selected by operating the keys on the front panel. Function • When the set point has been changed, the set value of these parameters currently set by multiĆSP is linked and changed. • During temperature input, the decimal point position is dependent on the selected sensor. During analog input, the decimal point position is dependent on the setting of the decimal point position parameter. Setting Range Unit Default Set point lower limit to set point upper limit EU 0 Comment F Related parameters PV/SP (operation level) (p. 5Ć5) See Input type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć18) MultiĆSP uses (advanced function setting level) (p. 5Ć26) 5-12
  • 78. Adjustment Level Temperature input shift The input type parameter must be set to temperature input excluding a nonĆcontact temperature sensor. Sometimes an error between the set point and the actual temperature occurs. To offset this, a value obtained by adding an input shift value to the input is displayed as the measurement value and used for control. The entire input range is shifted by a fixed rate (1Ćpoint shift). If the input shift value is set to Ć1_C, the set point is controlled to a value obtained by subtracting 1_C from Function the actual temperature. Setting Range Unit Default Ć199.9 to 999.9 _C or _F 0.0 Comment F Related parameter Input type (initial setting level) See UpperĆlimit temperature The input type parameter must be set to input shift value only the nonĆcontact temperature sensor. LowerĆlimit temperature input shift value Whereas the entire input range is shifted by a fixed rate (1Ćpoint shift) in the temperature input shift parameter, the input range is shifted by two points (2Ćpoint shift) at the upper and lower limits. 2Ćpoint shift enables more accurate offset of the input range compared with 1Ćpoint shift, if the input shift values at the upper and lower limits differ. This parameter sets input shift values for each of the upper and lower limits (2Ćpoint shift) of the input range. Function Setting Range Unit Default Ć199.9 to 999.9 _C or _ F 0.0 Comment F Related parameter Input type (initial setting level) See 5-13
  • 79. CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS Adjustment Level Proportional band The control must be 2ĆPID control. Integral time Derivative time This parameter sets the PID parameters. Note that PID is automatically set when AT and ST are executed. Proportional action : P refers to control in which the MV is proportional to the deviĆ ation (control error). Function Integral action : I gives a control action that is proportional to the time integral of the control error. With proportional control, there is norĆ mally an offset (control error). So, proportional action is used in combination with integral action. As time passes, this conĆ trol error disappears, and the set point comes to agree with the control temperature (process value). Derivative action : D gives a control action that is proportional to the time derivaĆ tive of the control error. As proportional control and integral control correct for errors in the control result, the control sysĆ tem will be late in responding to sudden changes in temperaĆ ture. Derivative action enables control that is proportional to a predicted process output to correct for future error. Parameter Setting Range Unit Default Proportional band 0.1 to 999.9 EU 8.0 Integral time 0 to 3999 Second 233 Comment Derivative time 0 to 3999 Second 40 F Related parameter AT execute/cancel (adjustment level) (p. 5Ć11) See 5-14
  • 80. Adjustment Level Cooling coefficient The control must be either heating and coolĆ ing control and 2ĆPID control. If the heating and cooling characteristics of the control target greatly differ, preventing satisfacĆ tory control characteristics from being obtained by the same PID parameters, adjust the proporĆ tional band (P) at the control output 2 side by adding the cooling coefficient to balance control between the control output 1 and control output 2 sides. In heating and cooling control, control output 2 side P is calculated by the following formula to set the cooling coefficient: Function Control output 2 side P = Cooling coefficient P (proportional bounds) Setting Range Unit Default 0.01 to 99.99 None 1.00 F Related parameter Proportional band (adjustment level) (p. 5Ć14) See Dead band The control system must be heating and coolĆ ing control. This parameter sets the output dead band width in a heating and cooling control system. A negaĆ tive setting sets an overlap band. • This parameter sets an area in which the control output is 0 centering around the set point in a heating and cooling control system. Function • The decimal point setting follows the currently set sensor. During analog input, the decimal point setting follows the decimal point position setting. Setting Range Unit Default Ć199.9 to 999.9 EU 0.0 5-15
  • 81. CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS Adjustment Level Manual reset value The control must be either standard (heating) control and 2ĆPID control. The integral time parameter must be set to 0. • This parameter sets the required manipulated variable to remove offset during stabiĆ lization of P or PD control. Function Setting Range Unit Default 0.0 to 100.0 % 50.0 Comment F Related parameters PID / ON/OFF (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć21) See Integral time (adjustment level) (p. 5Ć14) Hysteresis (OUT1) The control must be ON/OFF control. Hysteresis (OUT2) This parameter sets the hysteresis for ensuring stable operation at ON/OFF switching. • In a standard control, use the hysteresis (OUT1) parameter. The hysteresis (OUT2) parameter cannot be used. Function • In a heating and cooling control, the hysteresis can be set independently for heating and cooling. Use the hysteresis (OUT1) parameter to set the control output 1 side hysteresis, and use the hysteresis (OUT2) parameter to set the control output 2 side hysteresis. • The decimal point setting follows the currently set sensor. During analog input, the decimal point setting follows the decimal point position setting. Setting Range Unit Default 0.1 to 999.9 EU 1.0 Comment F Related parameter PID / ON/OFF (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć21) See 5-16
  • 82. Initial Setting Level This level is for setting up the basic specifications of the E5GN. In this level, you can set the input type parameter for selecting the sensor input to be connected to the E5GN, limit the setĆ ting range of set values or set the alarm mode. Power ON Initial setting level Operation Adjustment Page level level key Input type less than 1 sec. 5Ć18 key key 3 seconds min. Scaling upper limit 1 second min. key The PV display flashes after one second 5Ć19 Control stops Scaling lower limit 5Ć19 CommuĆ Initial setting level nications key setup level Decimal point less than 5Ć19 1 sec. _C/_F selection Control in progress 5Ć20 Control stopped Set point upper limit 5Ć20 To move from the operation level to the initial setting Set point lower limit level, press key for three seconds or more. 5Ć20 • The initial setting level is not displayed when iniĆ PID / ON/OFF 5Ć21 tial/communications protection is set to 2. This initial setting level can be used when initial setting/ Standard/heating and communications protection is set to 0 or 1. cooling 5Ć21 • The scaling upper limit, scaling lower limit and ST 5Ć22 decimal point parameters are displayed when analog input is selected as the input type. Control period (OUT1) 5Ć22 Control period (OUT2) 5Ć22 Direct/reverse operation 5Ć23 Alarm 1 type 5Ć23 Move to advanced function setting level 5Ć25 5-17
  • 83. CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS Initial Setting Level Input type2. • This parameter sets the sensor type by a corresponding code. • When this parameter is changed, the set point upper limit is changed to the default. Function If the set point limits must be changed, set the set point upper limit and set point lower limit parameters (initial setting level). • Set the code according to the following table. Shaded ranges indicate default settings. The defaults are as follows. Comment Platinum resistance thermometer:  : platinum resistance thermometer Pt100 Thermocouple:  : K thermocouple Set Input type Name Input Temperature Range Value Platinum resistance Platinum reĆ Pt100 0 Ć200 to 850 (_C) / Ć300 to 1500 (_F) thermometer th t sistance therĆ i t th mometer 1 Ć199.9 to 500.0 (_C) / Ć199.9 to 900.0 (_F) 2 0.0 to 100.0 (_C) / 0.0 to 210.0 (_F) JPt100 3 Ć199.9 to 500.0 (_C) / Ć199.9 to 900.0 (_F) 4 0.0 to 100.0 (_C) / 0.0 to 210.0 (_F) Set Input type Name Input Temperature Range Value p p Thermocoupleinput p Thermocouple K 0 Ć200 to 1300 (_C) / Ć300 to 2300 (_F) type t 1 Ć20.0 to 500.0 (_C) / 0.0 to 900.0 (_F) J 2 Ć100 to 850 (_C) / Ć100 to 1500 (_F) 3 Ć20 to 400.0 (_C) / 0.0 to 750.0 (_F) T 4 Ć200 to 400 (_C) / Ć300 to 700 (_F) 17 Ć199.9 to 400.0 (_C) / Ć199.9 to 700.0 (_F) E 5 0 to 600 (_C) / 0 to 1100 (_F) L 6 Ć100 to 850 (_C) / Ć100 to 1500 (_F) U 7 Ć200 to 400 (_C) / Ć300 to 700 (_F) 18 Ć199.9 to 400.0 (_C) / Ć199.9 to 700.0 (_F) N 8 Ć200 to 1300 (_C) / Ć300 to 2300 (_F) R 9 0 to 1700 (_C) / 0 to 3000 (_F) S 10 0 to 1700 (_C) / 0 to 3000 (_F) B 11 100 to 1800 (_C) / 300 to 3200 (_F) NonĆcontact K10 to 70_C 12 0 to 90 (_C) / 0 to 190 (_F) temperature t t sensor K60 to 120_C 13 0 to 120 (_C) / 0 to 240 (_F) ES1A K115 to 165_C 14 0 to 165 (_C) / 0 to 320 (_F) K160 to 260_C 15 0 to 260 (_C) / 0 to 500 (_F) Analog input 0 to 50mV 16 One of following ranges depending on the results of scaling: Ć1999 to 9999, Ć199.9 to 999.9, F Related parameters _C/_F selection Set point upper limit Set point lower limit (initial setting See level) (p. 5Ć20) 5-18
  • 84. Initial Setting Level Scaling upper limit The input type must be set to analog input. Scaling lower limit Decimal point • These parameters can be used when voltage input is selected as the input type. • When voltage input is selected as the input type, scaling is carried out. Set the upper Function limit in the scaling upper limit parameter and the lower limit in the scaling lower limit parameter. • The decimal point parameter specifies the decimal point position of parameters (set point, etc.) whose unit is set to EU. • Scaling upper limit, Scaling lower limit Parameter Setting Range Unit Default Comment Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit +1 to 9999 None 100 Scaling lower limit Ć1999 to scaling upper limit Ć1 None 0 • Decimal point: Default is 0: 0 digits past decimal point Set value Setting Example 0 0 digits past decimal point 1234 1 1 digit past decimal point 123.4 F Related parameter Input type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć18) See 5-19
  • 85. CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS Initial Setting Level _C/_F selection The input type must be set to temperature input. • Set the temperature input unit to either of _C or _F. Function Setting Range Default : _C / : _F Comment F Related parameter Input type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć18) See Set point upper limit3. Set point lower limit • This parameter limits the upper and lower limits when the SP is set. The SP can be set within the range defined by the upper and lower limit set values in the set point upper limit and set point lower limit parameters. The existing SP settings that are Function out of the range are forcibly changed to one of the upper or lower limit values (whichĆ ever is closest). • When the temperature input type and temperature unit have been changed, the set point upper limit and set point lower limit are forcibly changed to the upper and lower limits of the sensor. • During temperature input, the decimal point position is dependent on the currently selected sensor. During analog input, it is dependent on the decimal point parameĆ ter setting. Parameter Setting Range Unit Default Set point upper limit p pp Set point lower limit +1 to sensor range upper limit EU 1300 Platinum resistance thermometer EU 850 Comment Set point lower limit Sensor range lower limit to set point upper limit Ć1 EU Ć200 F Related parameters _ _ Input type (p. 5Ć18)  C/ F selection (p. 5Ć20) (initial setting level) See 5-20
  • 86. Initial Setting Level PID / ON/OFF • This parameter selects 2ĆPID control or ON/OFF control. • The AT and ST tuning functions can be used in 2ĆPID control. Function Setting Range Default : 2ĆPID / : ON/OFF Comment F Related parameters AT execute/cancel (p. 5Ć11) Manual reset Hysteresis (OUT1) (p. 5Ć16) (adjustĆ See ment level) ST stable range (advanced function setting level) (p. 5Ć30) Standard/heating and The E5GN must support alarm 1 output. cooling • This parameter selects standard control or heating and cooling control as control output 2. Function • When heating and cooling control is selected, the alarm 1 output terminal ALM1 is used for cooling side output. Therefore, alarm 1 cannot be used. Setting Range Default : Standard / : Heating and cooling F Related parameters MV monitor (OUT1) MV monitor (OUT2) (operation level) (p. 5Ć8, 9) See Alarm value (p. 5Ć7) UpperĆlimit alarm value 1 LowerĆlimit alarm value 1 (operation level) (p. 5Ć8) Hysteresis (OUT2) (p. 5Ć16) Cooling coefficient Dead band (p. 5Ć15) (adjustĆ ment level) Control period (OUT2) (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć22) Alarm 1 type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć23) Alarm 1 hysteresis (p. 5Ć29) Alarm 1 open in alarm (p. 5Ć29) (advanced function setting level) 5-21
  • 87. CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS Initial Setting Level ST selfĆtuning The control must be either standard control, temperature input and 2ĆPID control. • The ST (selfĆtuning) function executes tuning from the start of program execution to calculate PID constants matched to the control target. When the ST function is in Function operation, be sure to turn the power supply of the load connected to the control outĆ put ON simultaneously with or before starting operation of the E5GN. Parameter Setting Range Unit Default ST : ST function OFF / : ST function ON None Comment F Related parameters ST stable range (advanced function setting level) (p. 5Ć30) See Input type (p. 5Ć18) PID / ON/OFF (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć21) Control period (OUT1) The control must be set to 2ĆPID control. Control period (OUT2) • This parameter sets the output period. Set the control period taking the control charĆ acteristics and the electrical life expectancy of the relay into consideration. Function • In a standard control system, use the control period (OUT1) parameter. The conĆ trol period (OUT2) parameter cannot be used. • In a heating and cooling control system, the control period can be set independently for heating and cooling. Use the control period (OUT1) parameter to set the heatĆ ing side control period, and use the control period (OUT2) parameter to set the cooling side control period. Parameter Setting Range Unit Default Control period (OUT1) 1 to 99 Second 20 Control period (OUT2) 1 to 99 Second 20 Comment F Related parameter PID / ON/OFF (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć21) See 5-22
  • 88. Initial Setting Level Direct/reverse operation • Direct operation refers to control where the manipulated variable is increased according to the increase in the process value. Alternatively, reverse operation Function refers to control where the manipulated variable is increased according to the decrease in the process value. Setting Range Default : Reverse operation/ : Direct operation Comment Alarm 1 type4. The alarm 1 type must be supported. The control must be set to standard control. • Select one of the following alarm 1 types: Deviation/Deviation range/Absolute value Function 5-23
  • 89. CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS Initial Setting Level Set Alarm Output Operation Value Alarm Type When X is positive When X is negative 0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF Comment UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit (deviation) L H ON *1 1 *2 OFF SP UpperĆlimit(deviation) X X ON ON 2 OFF OFF SP SP LowerĆlimit(deviation) X X ON ON 3 OFF OFF SP SP UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit range L H (deviation) ON *1 4 *3 OFF SP UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit with L H standby sequence (deviation) ON *1 5 *4 OFF SP UpperĆlimit with standby X X sequence (deviation) ON ON 6 OFF OFF SP SP LowerĆlimit with standby X X ON ON 7 sequence (deviation) OFF OFF SP SP AbsoluteĆvalueupperĆlimit X X ON ON 8 OFF OFF 0 0 AbsoluteĆvaluelowerĆlimit X X ON ON 9 OFF OFF 0 0 AbsoluteĆvalue upperĆlimit with X X standby sequence ON ON 10 OFF OFF 0 0 AbsoluteĆvalue lowerĆlimit with X X standby sequence ON ON 11 OFF OFF 0 0 *1 : The upperĆ and lowerĆlimit values, expressed as L and H, can be set independently for each alarm point with set values 1, 4 and 5. *2 : Set value : 1 UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Normally ON) H 0, L 0 L H SP SP L H L SP H y H 0, L 0 H 0, L 0 H 0, L 0 |H| |L| |H| |L| H L SP |H| |L| x H 0, L 0 SP H L |H| |L| *3 : Set value : 4 UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit range Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Normally OFF) H 0, L 0 L H SP SP L H L SP H y H 0, L 0 H 0, L 0 H 0, L 0 H L SP |H| |L| |H| |L| |H| |L| x H 0, L 0 SP H L |H| |L| *4 : Set value : 5 UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm with standby sequence *For the above upperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm Ć In cases 1 and 2, the alarm is normally OFF if upperĆ and lowerĆlimit values of hysteresis overlap. Ć In case 3, the alarm is normally OFF. *5 : Set value : 5 UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm with standby sequence The alarm is normally OFF if upperĆ and lowerĆlimit values of hysteresis overlap. • Set the alarm type in the alarm 1 type parameter (initial setting level). Default is 2: upperĆlimit alarm. F Related parameters Alarm value 1 (operation level) (p. 5Ć7) Upper limit alarm value 1 Lower limit alarm value 1 (operation level) (p. 5Ć8) See Standby sequence reset method (p. 5Ć28) Alarm 1 open in alarm Alarm 1 hysterĆ esis (p. 5Ć29) Alarm 1 latch (p. 5Ć34) (advanced function setting level) 5-24
  • 90. Advanced Function Setting Level This level is for using the E5GN to its maximum. You can move to this level by entering the passĆ word (Ć169) in the initial setting level. Power ON Operation Adjustment Advanced function setting level level level key less than 1 sec. Page key 3 seconds min. Parameter initialize key Theh PV display flashes 5Ć26 after one second. Control stop MultiĆSP uses 5Ć26 CommuĆ Initial setting level nications key setup level SP ramp set value less than 5Ć27 1 sec. key Password input Standby sequence reset 1 second min. set value Ć169 method 5Ć28 Advanced function setting level Alarm 1 open in alarm 5Ć29 Password input set value 1201 Alarm 1 hysteresis 5Ć29 Control in progress Calibration level ST stable range Control stopped 5Ć30 • The parameters in this level can be used when iniĆ α 5Ć30 tial setting/communications protection is set to 0. MV upper limit • The move to calibration level can be moved to by 5Ć31 entering the password. MV lower limit • To switch between setting levels, press the key. 5Ć31 • To change setting values, press the keys. Input digital filter 5Ć32 Additional PV display 5Ć32 Manipulated variable display 5Ć33 Automatic return of display mode 5Ć33 Alarm 1 latch 5Ć34 Protect level move time 5Ć34 Output input error 5Ć35 Cold junction compensation method 5Ć35 MB command logic switching 5Ć36 Move to calibration level 5-25
  • 91. CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS Advanced Function Setting Level Parameter initialize This parameter returns parameter settings to their defaults. Function : Initializes all parameters. : Turns the E5GN OFF after returning parameter settings to their defaults. Comment MultiĆSP uses When the multiĆSP parameter is set to ON, you can select set points 0 to 3 by operĆ ating the keys on the front panel of the controller. Function : You can select set points 0 to 3. : You cannot select set points 0 to 3. Comment • Default : OFF. F Related parameter MultiĆSP (operation level) (p. 5Ć5) See 5-26
  • 92. Advanced Function Setting Level SP ramp set value5. ST (selfĆtuning) must be set to OFF. • This parameter specifies the change rate during SP ramp operation. Set the maxiĆ mum permissible change width per unit of time (minute) as the SP ramp set value. Function However, note, that when the SP ramp set value is set to OFF, the SP ramp funcĆ tion is disabled. • The SP ramp set value is independent of the time unit. When setting 30 per minute as the SP ramp set value, set the SP ramp set value parameter to 30. • During temperature input, the decimal point position of the SP ramp set value is dependent on the currently selected sensor, and during analog input it is dependent on scaling. Parameter Setting Range Unit Default SP ramp set value OFF, 1 to 9999 EU Comment F Related parameters Input type (p. 5Ć18) Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit Decimal point See (p. 5Ć19) ST (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć22) 5-27
  • 93. CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS Advanced Function Setting Level Standby sequence reset The alarm 1 type must be set to with standby sequence. method6. • This parameter selects the conditions for enabling reset after the standby sequence of the alarm has been canceled. Function Output is turned OFF when the initial setting level, communications setting level, advanced function setting level or calibration level is switched to. • Condition A: Control started (including power ON), and set point, alarm value (upper/lowerĆlimit alarm value) or input shift value (upper/lowerĆlimit temperature input shift value) changed • Condition B: Power ON • The following example shows the reset action when the alarm type is lowerĆlimit alarm with standby sequence. Condition A only SP change Alarm point (after change) Alarm hysteresis Condition A only f : Standby sequence canceled point Alarm point F : Standby sequence reset point Alarm output: Condition A Alarm output: Condition B Setting Range Default : Condition A / : Condition B Comment F Related parameter Alarm 1 type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć23) See Alarm 1 latch (advanced setting level) (p. 5Ć34) 5-28
  • 94. Advanced Function Setting Level Alarm 1 open in alarm7. jj E5GNĆ 1 must be used. The control must be set to standard control. • This parameter sets the output states of alarm 1. • When the E5CN is set to close in alarm, the status of the alarm output function is normally open. When set to open in alarm, the status of the alarm output is output Function inverted, or normally closed. The following table shows the relationship between alarm output functions, alarm output and output LCDs. When alarm 1 open in alarm is set to open in alarm, the heater burnout alarm and input error output also become open in alarm. Alarm Output Function Alarm Output Output LCDs ON ON Lit Close in alarm OFF OFF Out Comment ON OFF Lit Open in alarm OFF ON Out Setting Range Default : Close in alarm / : Open in alarm F Related parameters Alarm value 1 (p. 5Ć7) UpperĆlimit alarm value 1 LowerĆlimit alarm value 1 (p. 5Ć8) (operation level) See Alarm 1 type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć23) Alarm 1 hysteresis (p. 5Ć29) Standby sequence reset method (p. 5Ć28) Alarm 1 latch (p. 5Ć34) (advanced function setting level) Alarm 1 hysteresis jj E5GNĆ 1 must be used. The control must be set to standard control. • This parameter sets the hysteresis of alarm output 1. • During analog input, the decimal point setting follows the decimal point position Function setting. Setting Range Unit Default 0.1 to 999.9 _C or _F 0.2 Comment F Related parameters Alarm value 1 (p. 5Ć7) UpperĆlimit alarm value 1 LowerĆlimit alarm value 1 (p. See 5Ć8) (operation level) Alarm 1 type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć23) Alarm 1 open in alarm (p. 5Ć29) Standby sequence reset method (p. 5Ć28) Alarm 1 latch (p. 5Ć34) (advanced function setting level) 5-29
  • 95. CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS Advanced Function Setting Level ST stable range The control must be set to temperature input, PID control and ST set to ON. • This parameter sets the set value for determining the conditions under which ST (selfĆtuning) occurs. This parameter cannot be used when the ST parameter is set Function to OFF. Setting Range Unit Default 0.1 to 999.9 _C or _F 15.0 Comment F Related parameters PID / ON/OFF (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć21) See Input type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć18) ST (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć22) α The control must be 2ĆPID control, and the ST parameter must be set to OFF. • Normally, use this parameter at its default. • This parameter sets 2ĆPIDĆconstant α. Function Setting Range Unit Default 0.00 to 1.00 None 0.65 Comment F Related parameters PID / ON/OFF (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć21) See ST (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć22) 5-30
  • 96. Advanced Function Setting Level MV upper limit The control must be 2ĆPID control, and the ST parameter must be set to OFF. MV lower limit • The MV upper limit and MV lower limit parameters set the upper and lower limĆ its of the manipulated variable. When the manipulated variable calculated by E5GN exceeds the upper or lower limit value, the upper or lower limit set becomes the outĆ Function put level. • MV upper limit The setting ranges during standard control and heating and cooling control are difĆ ferent. Comment The manipulated variable at the control output 2 side during heating and cooling control is expressed as a negative value. Control Method Setting Range Unit Default Standard (heating) MV lower limit +0.1 to 105.0 % 105.0 Heating and cooling 0.0 to 105.0 % 105.0 • MV lower limit The setting ranges during standard control and heating and cooling control are difĆ ferent. The manipulated variable at the control output 2 side during heating and cooling control is expressed as a negative value. Control Method Setting Range Unit Default Standard (heating) Ć5.0 to MV upper limit Ć0.1 % Ć5.0 Heating and cooling 0.0 to 105.0 % 105.0 F Related parameters PID / ON/OFF (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć21) ST (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć22) See 5-31
  • 97. CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS Advanced Function Setting Level Input digital filter • Sets the time constant of the input digital filter The following figure shows the effect . on data after passing through the digital filter: Function PV before passing through filter A PV after passing through filter 0.63A Time constant Time Input digital filter Setting Range Unit Default 0.0 to 999.9 Second 0.0 Comment Additional PV display • This parameter adds the facility of displaying only the PV It is addes to the top of the . operation level. It is used to give the option of displaying the PV and SP or just the PV only. Function Setting Range Default : Displayed / : Not displayed Comment 5-32
  • 98. Advanced Function Setting Level Manipulated variable display8. This parameter displays the manipulated variable. The manipulated variable is displayed when the manipulated variable monitor Function parameters are set to ON, and not displayed when these parameters are set to OFF. Setting Range Default : Displayed / : Not displayed Comment Automatic return of display mode • If you do not operate any of the keys on the front panel for the time set by this parameĆ ter in the operation level and adjustment level, the display automatically returns Function to the PV/SP display. • This function is disabled (display does not change automatically) when this parameĆ ter is set to OFF. Setting Range Unit Default OFF, 1 to 99 Second Comment 5-33
  • 99. CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS Advanced Function Setting Level Alarm 1 latch9. The alarm 1 function must be ON. • When this setting is set to ON, the alarm function is held until the power is turned OFF once the alarm function has turned ON. Function Note, however, that the latch is canceled when the initial setting level, advanced funcĆ tion setting level or calibration level is switched to. • When alarm output function is set to open in alarm, closed output is held, and set to closed in alarm, open output is held. Setting Range Default : ON / : OFF Comment F Related parameters Alarm value 1 (operation level) (p. 5Ć7) See Upper-limit alarm value 1 Lower-limit alarm value 1 (operation level) (p. 5Ć8 and 5Ć9) Alarm 1 type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć23) Standby sequence reset method (advanced function setting level) (p. 5Ć28) Alarm 1 open in alarm Alarm 1 hysteresis (advanced function setting level (p. 5Ć29) Protect level move time • Sets the key pressing time required for moving to the protect level from the operation level or the adjustment level. Function Setting Range Unit Default 1 to 30 Second 3 Comment F Related parameters Operation/adjustment protection Initial setting/communications protection See Setting change protection (protect level) (p. 5Ć3) 5-34
  • 100. Advanced Function Setting Level Output input error The alarm 1 type must be supported. The control must be set to standard control. • When this setting is set to ON, alarm 1 output becomes ON at an input error. Note, however, that the alarm 1 operation display does not light. Function • The alarm 1 output is the ORed output of alarm 1, HBA used and input error. • Output is turned OFF when the initial setting level, communications setting level, advanced function setting level or calibration level is switched to. Setting Range Default : ON / : OFF Comment F Related parameter Input error (error display) (p. AĆ4) See Cold junction Input type must be thermocouple or non-conĆ compensation method tact temperature sensor • Specifies whether cold junction compensation is to be performed internally by the controller or to be performed externally when the input type setting value is No.0 to Function 15, 17 or 18. • The cold junction compensation external setting is valid when the temperature difĆ ference is measured using two thermocouples or two ESIAs. Setting Range Default : internally / : externally Comment F Related parameter Input type (initial setting level) (p. 5Ć18) See 5-35
  • 101. CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS Communications Setting Level MB command logic Communications function must be supĆ switching ported. • Switches the logic of MB command (communications writing switching) in the SysĆ way communications procedures. • The MB command (communications writing switching) is equivalent to the MB comĆ j Function mand (remote/local switching) on the E5 J. • The hatched setting is the default (same logic as E5 J). j Text Data of MB Command Setting Value Comment 0000 0001 Communications writing enabled (reĆ Communications writing disabled (loĆ OFF mote mode selection) cal mode selection) Communications writing disabled (loĆ Communications writing enabled (reĆ ON cal mode selection) mote mode selection) (Terms in parentheses () are the terms used on the E5 J.) j F Related parameter Communications writing (adjustment level) (p. 5Ć11) See 5-36
  • 102. Advanced Function Setting Level Communications unit Communications function must be supĆ ported. No. Baud rate Communications data length Communications stop bit Communications parity • Each parameter is enabled when the power is reset. • Match the communications specifications of the E5GN and the host computer. If a 1 Function : N connection is being used, ensure that the communications specifications for all devices in the system (except Communications unit No.) are the same. Displayed Parameter Set Value Setting Range Characters Communications 0, 1 to 99 0 to 99 Comment unit No. Baud rate 1.2 / 2.4 / 4.8 / 9.6 / 19.2 (kbps) 1.2 / 2.4 / 4.8 / 9.6 / 19.2 (kbps) Communications 7 / 8 (bit) 7 / 8 (bit) data length Communications 1 /2 1 / 2 stop bit Communications / / None / even / odd parity Highlighted characters indicate defaults. F Related parameters Communications writing (adjustment level) (p. 5Ć11) See 5-37
  • 103. CHAPTER 6 CALIBRATION CHAPTER 6 6 CALIBRATION 6.1 Parameter Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć2 6.2 User Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć3 6.3 Calibrating Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć4 6.4 Calibrating Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć7 6.5 Calibrating Platinum Resistance Thermometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć8 6.6 Checking Indication Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć9 6-1
  • 104. CHAPTER 6 CALIBRATION 6.1 Parameter Structure • To calibrate the E5GN, enter the password 1201 at the move to calĆ ibration level parameter in the advanced function setting level.  is displayed. • However, note that the move to calibration level parameter might not be displayed when, for example, the user is calibrating the E5GN for the first time. If this happens, set the initial/communications protection parameter in the protect level to 0 before moving to the advanced function setting level. • The calibration mode is quit by turning the power OFF. • The parameters in the calibration level are structured as follows: Advancedfunction setting level These parameters are automatically moved to according to the event input. Once the user has calibrated the E5GN, a dot will be displayed when the calibration level is moved to, to indicate that the E5GN has already been calibrated by the user. Dot is displayed. 6-2
  • 105. 6.2 User Calibration 6.2 User Calibration The E5GN is correctly calibrated before it is shipped from the factory and , normally need not be calibrated by the user. If, however it must be calibrated by the user use the parameters for caliĆ , , brating temperature input and analog input. However, note that OMRON cannot ensure the results of calibration by the user. Also, calibration data is overwritten with the latest settings. The default calibration settings cannot be returned to after user calibration. F Calibrating input When the user calibrates the E5GN, the input type currently selected in parameters is calibrated. The following 24 input types can be calibrated. • Thermocouple : 14 types • NonĆcontact temperature sensor : 4 type • Analog input : 1 type • Platinum resistance thermometer : 5 types F Registering The new calibration data for each item is temporarily registered. It can be calibration data officially registered as calibration data only when all items have been caliĆ brated to new values. So, be sure to temporarily register all items when you calibrate the E5GN. When calibration data is registered, it is registered regardless of whether or not the E5GN has been calibrated by the user. Prepare separate measuring devices and equipment for calibration. For details on how to handle measuring devices and equipment, refer to the respective instruction manuals. 6-3
  • 106. CHAPTER 6 CALIBRATION 6.3 Calibrating Thermocouples • Calibrate according to the type of thermocouple, thermocouple 1 group (input types 0, 2, 5, 6, 8) and thermocouple 2 group (input types 1, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18). • When calibrating, do not cover the bottom of the E5GN. Also, do not touch the input terminals (Nos. 8 and 9) or compensating conductor on the E5GN. F Preparations E5GN 1 2 8 9 Ć + Input power supply Compensating conductor Cold junction STV compensator 0_C/32_F • Set the cold junction compensator designed for compensation of interĆ _ nal thermocouples to 0 C. However, make sure that internal thermocouĆ ples are disabled (tips are open). • In the above figure, STV refers to a standard DC current/voltage source. • Use the compensating conductor designed for the selected thermocouĆ ple. However, note that when thermocouples R, S, E, B or a nonĆcontact temperature sensor is used, the cold junction compensator and the comĆ pensating conductor can be substituted with the cold junction compenĆ sator and the compensating conductor for thermocouple K. Connecting the Correct process values cannot be obtained if you touch the contact ends of the compensating Cold Junction conductor during calibration of a thermocouple. Accordingly, shortĆcircuit (enable) or open Compensator (disable) the tip of the thermocouple inside the cold junction compensator as shown in the figĆ ure below to create a contact or nonĆcontact state for the cold junction compensator. Cold junction compensator Cold junction compensator Short E5GN 0_C/32_F E5GN 0_C/32_F Open Compensatingconductor Compensatingconductor 6-4
  • 107. 6.3 Calibrating Thermocouples This example describes how to calibrate the E5GN when thermocouple input is currently selected on an E5GN supporting thermocouple input. (1) Connect the power supply. (2) Connect a standard DC current/voltage source (STV), precision digiĆ tal multimeter (DMM) and contact junction compensator (e.g. zero controller as in figure) to the thermocouple input terminals, as shown in the figure below. E5GN Compensating conductor of currently selected thermocouple 8 9 Use K thermocouple compensating Ć + conductor for E, R, S and B thermocouples or nonĆcontact temperature sensor. INPUT STV DMM Zero controller OUTPUT Leave open. (3) Turn the power ON. (4) Move to the calibration level. This starts the 30Ćminute aging timer. This timer provides an approxĆ Input types 0, 2, 5, 6, 8 imate timer for aging. After 30 minutes, the No.2 display changes to 0. You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if 0 is not displayed. Input types, 1, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, (5) Press the key to set the E5GN to the state on the left. 15, 17, 18 The No.2 display at this time displays the currently entered count value entered in Hexadecimal. Set the STV as follows: • Input types 0, 2, 5, 6, 8 : Set to 54 mV. • Input types 1, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18: Set to 24 mV. Allow the count value on the No.2 display to fully stabilize, then press the key to temporarily register the calibration setup. 6-5
  • 108. CHAPTER 6 CALIBRATION (6) Press the key to set the E5GN to the state on the left. Set STV to Ć9mV. Allow the count value on the No.2 display to fully stabilize, then press the key to temporarily register the calibration setup. (Input types 0, 2, 5, 6, 8 : Go to step 11.) (7) Press the key. The No.2 display changes to the state on the left when the input type is 1, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 or 15. (8) Set STV to 54mV. Allow the count value on the No.2 display to fully stabilize, then press the key to temporarily register the calibration setup. (9) Press the key. The No.2 display changes to the state on the left when the input type is 1, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 17 or 18. Set STV to Ć9mV. (10) Allow the count value on the No.2 display to fully stabilize, then press the key to temporarily register the calibration setup. (11) Press the key to set the E5GN to the state on the left. (12) Change the wiring as follows: E5GN Compensating conductor of currently selected thermocouple 8 9 Use K thermocouple compensating Ć + conductor for E, R, S and B thermocouples or nonĆcontact temperature sensor. Open in nonĆconnected state INPUT STV DMM Zero controller OUTPUT Short Disconnect the STV to enable the thermocouple of the cold junction compensator. When doing this, be sure to disconnect the wiring on the STV side. (13) Allow the count value on the No.2 display to fully stabilize, then press the key to temporarily register the calibration setup. (14) Press the key. The No.2 display changes to the state on the left. Note that the data to be temporarily registered is not displayed when it is not entirely prepared. Press the key. The No.2 display changes to  . Release the key and wait two seconds or press the key. This stores the temporarily registered calibration data to EEPROM. To cancel storage of tempoĆ rarily registered calibration data to memory, press the key withĆ out pressing the key. (15) The calibration mode is quit by turning the power OFF. 6-6
  • 109. 6.4 Calibrating Analog Input 6.4 Calibrating Analog Input This example describes how to calibrate when 0 to 50 mV input (input type 16) is currently selected on an E5GN supporting thermocouple input. E5GN 1 2 8 9 Ć + Input power supply STV DMM (1) Connect the power supply. (2) Connect an STV and DMM to the analog input terminals, as shown in the figure above. (3) Turn the power ON. (4) Move to the calibration level. This starts the 30Ćminute aging timer. This timer provides an approxĆ imate timer for aging. After 30 minutes, the No.2 display changes to 0. You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if 0 is not displayed. (5) Press the key to set the E5GN to the state on the left. The No.2 display at this time displays the currently entered count value entered in Hexadecimal. Set the STV to 54mV. (6) Allow the count value on the No.2 display to fully stabilize, then press the key to temporarily register the calibration setup. (7) Press the key to set the E5GN to the state on the left. Set STV to Ć9mV. (8) Allow the count value on the No.2 display to fully stabilize, then press the key to temporarily register the calibration setup. (9) Press the key. The No.2 display changes to the state on the left. Note that the data to be temporarily registered is not displayed when it is not entirely prepared. Press the key. The No.2 display changes to  . Release the key and wait two seconds or press the key. This stores the temporarily registered calibration data to EEPROM. To cancel storage of tempoĆ rarily registered calibration data to memory, press the key withĆ out pressing the key. (10) The calibration mode is quit by turning the power OFF. 6-7
  • 110. CHAPTER 6 CALIBRATION 6.5 Calibrating Platinum Resistance Thermometers This example describes how to calibrate the E5GN when it is connected to 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B B a platinum resistance thermometer. When calibrating a platinum resistance thermometer use wires of the Input power same thickness as those used to connect the E5GN. supply (1) Connect the power supply. 6Ćdial (2) Connect a precision resistance box (called 6Ćdial in this manual) to the platinum resistance thermometer input terminals. (3) Turn the power ON. (4) Move to the calibration level. This starts the 30Ćminutes aging timer. This timer provides an approximate timer for again. After 30 minutes, the No.2 display changes to 0. You can advance to the next step in this procedure Input type 0 even if 0 is not displayed. (5) Press the key to display the count value for each input type. Input types 1, 3 The No.2 display at this time displays the currently entered count value entered in Hexadecimal. Set the 6Ćdial as follows: Input types 2, 4 • Input type 0 : 390 Ω • Input type 1 or 3 : 280 Ω • Input type 2 or 4 : 140 Ω (6) Allow the count value on the No.2 display to fully stabilize, then press Input type 0 the key to temporarily register the calibration setup. (7) Press the key to set the E5GN to the state on the left. Input types 1, 3 Set the 6Ćdial as follows: • Input type 0 : 10 Ω • Input type 1 or 3 : 10 Ω Input types 2, 4 • Input type 2 or 4 : 100 Ω (8) Allow the count value on the No.2 display to fully stabilize, then press the key to temporarily register the calibration setup. (9) Press the key. The No.2 display changes to the state on the left. Note that the data to be temporarily registered is not displayed when it is not entirely prepared. Press the key. The No.2 display changes to  . Release the key and wait two seconds or press the key. This stores the temporarily registered calibration data to nonĆvolatile memory (EEPROM). To cancel storage of temporarily registered calibration data to memory, press the key without pressing the key. (10) The calibration mode is quit by turning the power OFF. 6-8
  • 111. 6.6 Checking Indication Accuracy 6.6 Checking Indication Accuracy • After calibrating input, be sure to check indication accuracy to make sure that the E5GN has been correctly calibrated. • Operate the E5GN in the PV/SP monitor mode. • Check the indication accuracy at the upper and lower limits and midĆ point. F Thermocouple or • Preparation non contact The following figure shows the required device connection. Make sure that the E5GN and cold junction compensator are connected by a comĆ temperature pensating conductor for the thermocouple that is to be used during sensor actual operation. For the nonĆcontact temperature sensor connect a K , thermocouple, and set the input type to the K thermocouple. E5GN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Ć + Cold junction compensator Input power supply STV Compensation conductor • Operation Make sure that the cold junction compensator is at 0 _C, and set STV outĆ put to the voltage equivalent to the starting power of the check value. The cold junction compensator and compensation conductor are not reĆ quired when an external cold junction compensation method is used. F Platinum • Preparation resistance The following figure shows the required device connection: thermometer E5GN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B B Input power supply 6Ćdial • Operation Set the 6Ćdial to the resistance equivalent to the check value. 6-9
  • 112. CHAPTER 6 CALIBRATION F Analog input • Preparation The following figure shows the required device connection: E5GN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Ć + P/S STV • Operation Set the STV to the voltage equivalent to the check value. 6-10
  • 113. APPENDIX APPENDIX SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ2 Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ2 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ3 ERROR DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ4 PARAMETER OPERATIONS LIST . . . . . . . . . . AĆ6 SENSOR INPUT SETTING, INDICATION AND CONTROL RANGES . . . . . AĆ10 SETUP LEVELS DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ12 PARAMETER FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ13 A-1
  • 114. APPENDIX SPECIFICATIONS J Ratings Supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz/24 VDC Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage Power consumption 7VA 4VA/2.5W Sensor input* Thermocouple : K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B Platinum resistance thermometer : Pt100, JPt100 NonĆcontact temperature sensor : K10 to 70_C, K60 to 120_C, K115 to 165_C, K160 to 260_C Voltage input: 0 to 50 mV Control Relay output SPSTĆNO, 250 VAC, 2A (resistive load), electrical life : 100,000 operations output Min. applicable load 1V 1 mA Voltageoutput Outputvoltage12VDC(PNP),max.loadcurrent21mA,withshortĆcircuitprotection circuit Alarm output SPSTĆNO, 250 VAC, 1A (resistive load), electrical life : 100,000 operations Min. applicable load 1V 1 mA Control method 2ĆPID or ON/OFF control Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys Indication method 7Ćsegment digital display and singleĆlighting indicator Other functions According to controller model Ambient temperature Ć10 to 55_C (with no condensation or icing) Ambient humidity Relative humidity 25 to 85% Storage temperature Ć25 to 65_C (with no condensation or icing) Altitude 2,000 m or less Recommended fuse T2A, 250 VAC, time lag, low shut-off capacity Installation environment Installation Category II, Pollution Class 2 (IEC 61010-1 compliant) * For the setting ranges for each input, see page AĆ10. A-2
  • 115. SPECIFICATIONS J Characteristics Thermocouple: (±0.5% of indication value or ±1_C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. (*1) Indication accuracy Platinum resistance thermometer: (±0.5% of indication value or ±1_C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. Analog input: ±5%FS±1 digit max. Hysteresis 0.1 to 999.9EU (in units of 0.1EU) Proportional band (P) 0.1 to 999.9EU (in units of 0.1EU) Integral time (I) 0 to 3999 (in units of 1 second) Derivative time (D) 0 to 3999 (in units of 1 second) Control period 1 to 99 (in units of 1 second) Manual reset value 0.0 to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%) Alarm setting range Ć1999 to 9999 (decimal point position dependent on input type) Sampling period 500 ms Insulation resistance 20 MΩ min. (by 500 VDC megger) Dielectric strength 2000 VAC 50 or 60 Hz 1min Malfunction vibration 10 to 55 Hz, 10 m/s2 for 10 min. each in X, Y and Z directions Vibration resistance 300 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hrs. each in X, Y and Z directions Malfunction shock 200 m/s2 max. 3 times each in 3 axes, 6 directions (relay: 100 m/s2) Shock resistance 300 m/s2 max. 3 times each in 3 axes, 6 directions (relay: 100 m/s2) Weight Approx. 90 g Adapter: approx. 10g Protective structure Front panel: NEMA4X for indoor use (equivalent to IP66), Rear case: IP20, terminals: IP00 Memory protection EEPROM (nonĆvolatile memory) (number of writes: 100,000) _ _ *1 The indication of K thermocouples in the Ć200 to 1300 C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of Ć100 C or less, _ and U and L thermocouples at any temperature is ±2 C±1 digit maximum. The indication of B thermocouples at a temperaĆ _ ture of 400 C or less is unrestricted. _ _ The indication of R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200 C or less is ±3 C±1 digit maximum. A-3
  • 116. APPENDIX ERROR DISPLAY When an error has occurred, the No.1 display alternately indicates error codes together with the current display item. This section describes how to check error codes on the display, and the actions you must take to remedy the problem. Input error F Meaning The input value has exceeded the control range. * Control range Platinum resistance : Temperature setting lower limit -20_C to thermometer, temperature setting upper limit +20_C thermocouple input (temperature setting lower limit -40_F to temperature setting upper limit +40_F) ESIA input : Same as input indication range Analog input : -5% to 105% of scaling range F Action Check the wiring of inputs for miswiring, disconnections, and shortĆcirĆ cuits and the input type. If no abnormality is found in the wiring and input type, turn the power OFF then back ON again. If the display remains the same, the E5GN must be repaired. If the display is restored, then a probable cause can be electriĆ cal noise affecting the control system. Check for electrical noise. F Operation at error After the error occurs, the error is displayed, and control output functions turn OFF. Alarm outputs function as if the upper limit value has been exceeded. When output input error (advanced function level) is set to ON, the alarm 1 output turns ON when an input error occurs. An error message is displayed when process value or PV/SP are disĆ played. Memory error F Meaning Internal memory operation is in error. F Action First, turn the power OFF then back ON again. If the display remains the same, the E5GN must be repaired. If the display is restored, then a probĆ able cause can be electrical noise affecting the control system. Check for electrical noise. F Operation at error Control output and alarm output turn OFF. A-4
  • 117. ERROR DISPLAY Display range over F Meaning Though this is not an error, this is displayed when the process value exceeds the display range when the control range is larger than the display range (Ć1999 (Ć199.9) to 9999 (999.9)). • When less than Ć1999 (Ć99.9) • When larger than 9999 (999.9) F Action Control continues, allowing normal operation. An error message is disĆ played when process value or PV/SP are displayed. RTD input RTD input (setting range: without Ć199.9 to 500.0(_C) type) (setting range: Ć199.9 to 500.0(_C) type) Themocuple input Themocuple input (setting range: without Ć199.9 to 400.0 (_C) type) (setting range: without Ć199.9 to 400.0 (_C) type) S.Err indication Displayed by numerical value S.Err indication cccc indication Displayed by numerical value S.Err indication Input indication range Input indication range -1999 display range 9999 -1999 display range 9999 (-199.9) (999.9) (-199.9) (999.9) Analog input display range Displayed by numerical value S.Err indication cccc indication Displayed by numerical value cccc indication S.Err indication -1999 display 9999 (-199.9) range (999.9) Input indication range Analog input display range Displayed by numerical value S.Err indication Displayed by numerical value S.Err indication Input indication range -1999 display range 9999 (-199.9) (999.9) A-5
  • 118. APPENDIX PARAMETER OPERATIONS LIST Operation level Set Parameter Name Symbol Setting (monitor) Value Display Default Unit Value PV Sensorinputindicationrange EU PV/SP SP lower limit to SP upper limit 0 EU MultiĆSP 0 to 3 0 None Set point during SP ramp SP lower limit to SP upper limit EU Run/stop Run/stop , Run None Alarm value 1 Ć1999 to 9999 0 EU UpperĆlimit alarm value 1 Ć1999 to 9999 0 EU LowerĆlimit alarm value 1 Ć1999 to 9999 0 EU MV monitor (OUT1)) ( 0.0 to 100.0 (standard) % 0.0 to 100.0 (heating and cooling) % MV monitor (OUT2) 0.0 to 100.0 % Adjustment level Setting Parameter Name Symbol Setting (monitor) Value Display Default Unit Value ATexecute/cancel ON, OFF , None Communicationswriting ON, OFF , None Set point 0 SP lower limit to upper limit 0 EU Set point 1 SP lower limit to upper limit 0 EU Set point 2 SP lower limit to upper limit 0 EU Set point 3 SP lower limit to upper limit 0 EU Temperatureinputshift Ć199.9 to 999.9 0.0 _C or _F UpperĆlimittemperature Ć199.9 to 999.9 0.0 _C or _F input shift value LowerĆlimittemperature Ć199.9 to 999.9 0.0 _C or _F input shift value Proportionalband 0.1 to 999.9 8.0 EU Integraltime 0 to 3999 233 Second Derivativetime 0 to 3999 40 Second Coolingcoefficient 0.01 to 99.99 1.00 None Deadband Ć199.9 to 999.9 0.1 EU Manual reset value 0.0 to 100.0 50.0 % Hysteresis (OUT1) 0.1 to 999.9 1.0 EU Hysteresis (OUT2) 0.1 to 999.9 1.0 EU A-6
  • 119. PARAMETER OPERATIONS LIST Initial setting level Setting Parameter Name Symbol Setting (monitor) Value Display Default Unit Value Input type * Platinum reĆ 0 : Pt100 0 None sistance 1 : Pt100 thermomeĆ 2 : Pt100 ter 3 : JPt100 4 : JPt100 ThermocouĆ 0:K 0 None ple 1:K 2:J 3:J 4:T 17 : T 5:E 6:L 7:U 18 : U 8:N 9:R 10 : S 11 : B NonĆcontact 12 : 10 to 70_C temperature 13 : 60 to 120_C sensor 14 : 115 to 165_C 15 : 160 to 260_C Analog input 16 : 0 to 50mA Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit +1 to 9999 100 None Scaling lower limit Ć1999 to scaling upper limit Ć1 0 None Decimal point 0.1 0 None Temperature unit _C, _F , _C None Set point upper limit SP lower limit +1 to input range lowĆ 1300 EU er value (temperature) SP lower limit +1 to scaling upper 1300 EU limit (analog) Set point lower limit Input range lower limit to SP upper Ć200 EU limit Ć1 (temperature) Scaling lower limit to SP upper limit Ć200 EU Ć1 (analog) PID Ć ON/OFF 2ĆPID, ON/OFF , ON/OFF None Standard/Heating and Standard None Standard, Heating and cooling , cooling ST ON, OFF , ON None Control period (OUT1) 1 to 99 20 Second Control period (OUT2) 1 to 99 20 Second Direct/reverse operation Direct operation, reverse operation , Reverse None operation Alarm 1 type 0: Alarm function OFF 2 None 1: UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm 2: UpperĆlimit alarm 3: LowerĆlimit alarm 4: UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit range 5: UpperĆ and lowerĆlimit alarm with standby sequence 6: UpperĆlimit alarm with standby sequence 7: LowerĆlimit alarm with standby sequence 8: AbsoluteĆvalue upperĆlimit alarm 9: AbsoluteĆvalue lowerĆlimit alarm 10: AbsoluteĆvalueupperĆlimit alarm with standby sequence 11: AbsoluteĆvalue lowerĆlimit alarm with standby sequence Move to advanced funcĆ 0 None Ć1999 to 9999 tion setting level A-7
  • 120. APPENDIX Advanced function setting level Setting Parameter Name Symbol Setting (monitor) Value Display Default Unit Value Parameterinitialize ON, OFF , OFF None MultiĆSPuses ON, OFF , OFF None SP ramp set value OFF, 1 to 9999 , to OFF EU Standby sequence reset ConditionA, Condition B , ConditionA None method Alarm 1 open in alarm Open in alarm/Close in alarm , Close in None alarm Alarm 1 hysteresis 0.1 to 999.9 0.2 EU ST stable range 0.1 to 999.9 15.0 _C or _F α 0.00to 1.00 0.65 None MV upper limit MV lower limit +0.1 to 105.0 105.0 % (standard) 0.0 to 105.0 (heating and coolĆ 105.0 % ing) MV lower limit Ć5.0 to MV upper limit Ć0.1 Ć5.0 % (standard) Ć105.0to0.0(heatingandcoolĆ Ć105.0 % ing) Inputdigital filter 0.1 to 999.9 0.0 Second AdditionalPVdisplay ON, OFF , OFF None Manipulatedvariable disĆ ON, OFF , OFF None play Automatic return of disĆ OFF, 1 to 9999 , to OFF Second playmode Alarm 1 latch ON, OFF , OFF None Protect level move time 1 to 30 3 Second Output input error ON, OFF , OFF None Cold junction compensaĆ ON, OFF , ON None tionmethod MB command logic ON, OFF , OFF None switching Move to calibration level Ć1999 to 9999 0 None A-8
  • 121. PARAMETER OPERATIONS LIST Protect level Setting Parameter Name Symbol Setting (monitor) Value Display Default Unit Value Operation/adjustment 0 to 3 0 None protection Initial setting/ 0 to 2 1 None communications protection Setup change protection ON, OFF , OFF None Communications setting level Setting Parameter Name Symbol Setting (monitor) Value Display Default Unit Value Communication unit No. 0 to 99 1 None Baud rate 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2 . , . , . , . , . 9.6 kbps Data bit 7, 8 7 bit Stop bit 1, 2 2 bit Parity None, Even, Odd , , Even None A-9
  • 122. APPENDIX SENSOR INPUT SETTING, INDICATION AND CONTROL RANGES SpecificaĆ Set Input type Input Temperature Range Input Indication Range tions Value Platinum Platinum 0 Ć200 to 850 (_C) / Ć300 to 1500 (_F) Ć220 to 870 (_C) / Ć340 to 1540 (_F) resisĆ i resistance i ta Pt100 1 Ć199.9 to 500.0 (_C)/Ć199.9to900.0(_F) Ć199.9to 520 (_C) / Ć199.9 to 940 (_F) tance thermomeĆ thermomĆ eterinput ter 2 0.0 to 100.0 (_C) / 0.0 to 210.0 (_F) Ć20 to 120 (_C) / Ć40 to 250 (_F) type JPt100 3 Ć199.9 to 500.0 (_C)/Ć199.9to900.0(_F) Ć199.9to 520 (_C) / Ć199.9 to 940 (_F) 4 0.0 to 100.0 (_C) / 0.0 to 210.0 (_F) Ć20 to 120 (_C) / Ć40 to 250 (_F) SpecificaĆ Set Input type Input Temperature Range Input Indication Range tions Value ThermoĆ ThermocouĆ K 0 Ć200 to 1300 (_C) / Ć300 to 2300 (_F) Ć220 to 1320 (_C) / Ć340 to 2340 (_F) l couple plel 1 Ć20.0 to 500.0 (_C) / 0.0 to 900.0 (_F) Ć40 to 520 (_C) / Ć40 to 940 (_F) inputtype J 2 Ć100 to 850 (_C) / Ć100 to 1500 (_F) Ć120 to 870 (_C) / Ć140 to 1540 (_F) 3 Ć20.0 to 400.0 (_C) / 0.0 to 750.0 (_F) Ć40 to 420 (_C) / Ć40 to 790 (_F) T 4 Ć200 to 400 (_C) / Ć300 to 700 (_F) Ć220 to 420 (_C) / Ć340 to 740 (_F) 17 Ć199.9 to 400.0 (_C)/Ć199.9to700.0(_F) Ć199.9to 420.0 (_C)/Ć199.9to740.0(_F) E 5 0 to 600 (_C) / 0 to 1100 (_F) Ć20 to 620 (_C) / Ć40 to 1140 (_F) L 6 Ć100 to 850 (_C) / Ć100 to 1500 (_F) Ć120 to 870 (_C) / Ć140 to 1540 (_F) U 7 Ć200 to 400 (_C) / Ć300 to 700 (_F) Ć220 to 420 (_C) / Ć340 to 740 (_F) 18 Ć199.9 to 400.0 (_C)/Ć199.9to700.0(_F) Ć199.9to 420.0 (_C)/Ć199.9to740.0(_F) N 8 Ć200 to 1300 (_C) / Ć300 to 2300 (_F) Ć220 to 1320 (_C) / Ć340 to 2340 (_F) R 9 0 to 1700 (_C) / 0 to 3000 (_F) Ć20 to 1720 (_C) / Ć40 to 3040 (_F) S 10 0 to 1700 (_C) / 0 to 3000 (_F) Ć20 to 1720 (_C) / Ć40 to 3040 (_F) B 11 100 to 1800 (_C) / 300 to 3200 (_F) 0 to 1820 (_C) / 0 to 3240 (_F) NonĆcontact K10 to 70_C 12 0 to 90 (_C) / 0 to 190 (_F) Ć20 to 130 (_C) / Ć40 to 270 (_F) ttemperature K60 to 120_C t 13 0 to 120 (_C) / 0 to 240 (_F) Ć20 to 160 (_C ) / Ć40 to 320 (_F) sensor ES1A K115 to 165_C 14 0 to 165 (_C) / 0 to 320 (_F) Ć20 to 205 (_C) / Ć40 to 400 (_F) K160 to 260_C 15 0 to 260 (_C) / 0 to 500 (_F) Ć20 to 300 (_C) / Ć40 to 580 (_F) Analoginput 0 to 50mV 16 Oneoffollowingrangesdependingonthe Ć5 to 105% of the setting range resultsofscaling:Ć1999to9999,Ć199.9to (However, Ć1999 to 9999 or Ć199.9 to 999.9 999.9is displayed) • O is the default for both input types. • The applicable standards for each of the above input ranges are as follows: K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B : JIS C1602Ć1995, IEC 584Ć1 L : FeĆCuNi, DIN 43710Ć1985 U : CuĆCuNi, DIN 43710Ć1985 JPt100 : JIS C 1604Ć1989, JIS C 1606Ć1989 Pt100 : JIS C 1604Ć1997 IEC 751 Control Range • Platinum resistance thermometer and thermocouple input -20_C of temperature setting lower limit to +20_C of the temperature setting upper limit Or, -40_F of temperature setting lower limit to +40_F of the temperature setting upper limit • ES1A input Same as input indication range • Analog input -5% to +105% of scaling range A-10
  • 123. SETUP LEVELS DIAGRAM SETUP LEVELS DIAGRAM The following diagram shows an overview of the setup levels on the E5GN. To move to the advanced function setting level and calibration level, you must enter passwords. Some parameters are not displayed depending on the protect level setting and the conditions of use. Control stops when you move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Power ON Operation level Adjustment level + key key + key The PV display Less than 1 second min. flashes. 1 second key 3 seconds min. key 1 second min. key The PV display flashes afĆ ter one second. Control stops. + key 3 seconds min. CommuĆ Initial setting level nications Protect level setting level key Less than 1 second * The key pressing time can key Password input be changed in protect level 1 second min. set value Ć169 move time. Advanced function setting level Password input set value 1201 Control in progress Calibration level Control stopped A-11
  • 124. APPENDIX PARAMETER FLOW • If you press the mode key at the last parameter in each level, you return to the top parameter in that level. key 1 second min. key 1 second min. Advanced function setting level Initial setting level key 3 second min. Parameter initialize Input type MultiĆSP uses Scaling upper limit 0 to 50 mV Scaling lower limit SP ramp set value Decimal point Standby sequence reset method Reset conditions after standby sequence is canceled. _C/_F selection Limit the set point. Alarm 1 open in alarm Set the alarm output 1 ON/OFF states. Set point upper limit Alarm 1 hysteresis Set point lower limit ST stable range PID Ć ON/OFF Select the control system. α Standard heating/cooling control. 2-PID parameter ST SelfĆtuning MV upper limit Limited to MV calĆ Control period (OUT1) culation value MV lower limit Set the pulse output cycle. Control period (OUT2) Input digital filter Set the time constant in seconds. Direct/reverse operation Control the manipulated variable accordĆ ing to the increase/decrease in the PV. Additional PV display Displayed first in the operation level. Alarm 1 type Select the alarm mode. MV display Move to advanced function setting level Displayed only when Initial/ key Communications protect=0 Less than Automatic return of display mode 1 second Password input set value Ć169 Automatic return to operation level when the keys on the front panel are operated. Communications setting level Alarm 1 latch Alarm ON latch Communication key unit No. Less than 1 second Protect level move time Baud rate Input error output Data bit Cold junction compensation method Stop bit MB command logic switching Parity Move to calibration level Communications setup on other party personal computer is different. A-12
  • 125. PARAMETER FLOW Power ON key Less than 1 second Operation level Adjustment level key Less than 1 second Process value (PV) AT execute/cancel AutoĆtuning SP can be added in the additional PV Process value/Set point (PV/SP) display Communications writing parameter. Enable or disable writing by commuĆ nications. MultiĆSP Set point 0 Set point during SP ramp Set point 1 Set points used by multiĆSP Run/stop Set point 2 Alarm value 1 Set point 3 Set either of these Temperature input shift UpperĆlimit alarm value 1 parameters. 1Ćpoint shift UpperĆlimit temperaĆ LowerĆlimit alarm value 1 ture input shift value 2Ćpoint shift LowerĆlimit temperaĆ MV monitor (OUT1) ture input shift value Proportional band P MV monitor (OUT2) Integral time I PID settings + key + key Derivative time D 1 second min. 3* second min. * The key pressing time can be changed in protect level Cooling Protect level move time. coefficient Used by the heating and cooling controller Operation/adjustment protection Dead band Restricts display and modification of menus in the operation and adjustment levels. Initial setting/communications protection Manual reset value Restricts display and modification of menus Clear the offset during in the initial setup, operation level and adjustĆ stabilization of P or PD control. ment levels. Setting change protection Hysteresis (OUT1) Protects changes to setups by operaĆ tion of the front panel keys. Hysteresis (OUT2) A-13
  • 126. I NDEX (down) key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć3 Connecting the cold junction (level) key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć3 compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć4 + key combination .......... 1Ć3 Control adjustment .................. 1Ć5 (mode) key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć3 Control output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć5 Control period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć7 (up) key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć3 Numbers D Cooling coefficient . . . . . . . . . 4Ć9, 4Ć10, 5Ć15 1Ćpoint shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć2 Dead band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć9, 4Ć10, 5Ć15 1Ćpoint shift method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć4 Decimal point ............. 5Ć7, 5Ć19, 5Ć27 2ĆPID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć6 Derivative time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć12, 5Ć14 2Ćpoint shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć3 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć12 2Ćpoint shift method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć4 Determining PID constants 3Ćposition control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć10 (AT, ST manual setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć12 , A Dimensions ......................... 2Ć2 a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć30 Direct/reverse operation . . . . . . . . . 3Ć7, 5Ć23 Additional PV display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć32 Display ............................. 1Ć2 Adjustment level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced function 1Ć7, 5Ć10 E Error display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ4 setting level . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć7, 5Ć25, 6Ć2, AĆ8 Example of 2Ćpoint temperature Alarm 1 hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć29 input shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć5 Alarm 1 open in alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć29 Executing ON/OFF control . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć10 Alarm 1 type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć7, 5Ć23, 5Ć28 Executing the SP ramp function Alarm hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć6 (limiting the SP change rate) . . . . . . . . . 4Ć15 Alarm latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć6 F Alarm output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć17 Fixing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć8 Alarm type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć18 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć2 Alarm value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm value 1 ....................... 3Ć19, 5Ć7, 5Ć28 5Ć7 H Heating and cooling control . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć9 Analog input . . . . . . . . 1Ć5, 3Ć4, 4Ć8, 6Ć3, 6Ć10 How setup levels are configured and AT (autoĆtuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć12 operating the keys on the front panel . . . 1Ć6 AT execute/cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć12, 5Ć11 How to calculate input shift values Automatic return of display mode . . . . . 5Ć33 (2Ćpoint shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć3 C How to use keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć10 1Ć3 Calibrating analog input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć7 Hysteresis (cool) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć16 Calibrating input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć3 Hysteresis (heat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć16 I Calibrating platinum resistance thermometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć8 Calibrating thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć4 I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć4 Calibration level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć8 Initial setting level . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć7, 5Ć17, AĆ7 Changing the SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć9 Initial setting/communications protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć18 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ3 Initial setup examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć2 Checking indication accuracy . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć9 Input digital filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć32 Close in alarm/open in alarm . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć7 Input error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ4 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć6 Input sensor types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć5 Communications data length . . . . . . . . . 5Ć37 Input type . . . . . . . . 3Ć4, 5Ć7, 5Ć18, 5Ć27, AĆ10 Communications function . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć5, 1Ć9 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć2 Communications parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć37 Integral time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć12, 5Ć14 K Communications setting level . . . . 5Ć36, AĆ9 Communications setup level . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć7 Key protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć18 Communications stop bit . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć37 Communications unit No. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć37 L
  • 127. I NDEX LowerĆlimit temperature input shift value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć13 S M Scaling lower limit . . . . . . . . . 5Ć7, 5Ć19, 5Ć27 Scaling upper limit . . . . . . . . . 5Ć7, 5Ć19, 5Ć27 Manipulated variable display . . . . . . . . . 5Ć33 Selecting _C/_F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć5 Manual reset value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć16 Selecting parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć8 Manual setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć15 Selecting PID control or MB command logic switching . . . . . . . . . 5Ć36 ON/OFF control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć6 Memory error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ4 Sensor input setting, indication and control ranges . . . . . . . . AĆ10 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć3 Set point 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć11, 5Ć12 MultiĆSP (set point 0 to 3) ............ 5Ć5 Set point 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć11, 5Ć12 MV lower limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć31 Set point 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć11, 5Ć12 MV monitor (cool) ................... 5Ć9 Set point 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć11, 5Ć12 MV monitor (OUT1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć8 Set point during SP ramp . . . . . . . . 4Ć15, 5Ć6 MV upper limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć31 N Set point limitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć13 Set point lower limit ................. 5Ć6 Names of parts ...................... 1Ć2 Set point upper limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć6 No.1 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć2 Setting change protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć18 No.2 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć2 Setting heating and cooling control . . . 4Ć10 O Setting multiĆSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć11 Setting output specifications . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć7 ON/OFF control . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć6, 3Ć10, 3Ć11 Operate the keys on the front panel . . . . 3Ć4 Setting scaling upper and lower limits (analog input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć8 Operating the keys on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć8, 4Ć18 Setting the input type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć4 Operation at start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć16 Setting the PID / ON/OFF parameter . 3Ć11 Operation indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć2 Setting the SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć9 Operation Setting the SP by key operation . . . . . . 4Ć11 level . . . . . . 1Ć7, 3Ć11, 5Ć4, 5Ć10, 5Ć17, 5Ć33, AĆ6 Setting the SP upper and Operation/adjustment protection . . . . . 4Ć18 lower limit values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć13 P Setting up communications data . . . . . . . Setup levels diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ12 1Ć9 Panel cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć2 Shifting input values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć2 Parameter flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ13 SP ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć15, 4Ć16 Parameter initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć26 SP ramp set value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć27 Parameter operations list . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ6 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ2 Parameter structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć2 ST (selfĆtuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć13 PID / ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć21 ST selfĆtuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć22 PID constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć15 ST stable range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć14, 5Ć30 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć4 ST start conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć14 Precautions when wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć4 Standby sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć6, 5Ć28 Preparations ........................ 6Ć4 Standby sequence reset method . . . . . . . 5Ć28 Proportional band . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć12, 5Ć14 Summary of alarm operations . . . . . . . . . 4Ć7 Proportional operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć15 Protect level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć7, 5Ć3, AĆ9 T Temperature PV/SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć9, 5Ć5, 5Ć6, 5Ć33 R input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć5, 4Ć8, 5Ć7, 5Ć20, 5Ć27 Temperature input shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć13 Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ2 Temperature unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć2, 3Ć5 Registering calibration data . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć3 Terminal arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć4 Restart ............................. Restrictions during SP ramp operation 4Ć6 4Ć16 U UpperĆlimit temperature RSĆ485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć6 input shift value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć13 Run/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Ć7 User calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć3
  • 128. I NDEX W Using the key protection level . . . . . . . . 4Ć18 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć4
  • 129. Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual. Cat. No. H101ĆE1Ć03 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to previous version.
  • 130. Revision code Data Revised content 1 October 1998 Original production 2 January 2000 All Pages: Modified the level key mark. Page V: Changed Meanings of Abbreviations. Page 1-4: Modified the diagram in I/O configuration. Page 1-6: Modified the diagram in How Setup Levels Are Configured and Operating the Key on the Front Panel. Page 2-2: Modified the diagram in Panel cutout. Page 2-7: Added 2.3 Requests at Installation. Page 3-4: Modified the table in List of Input Types. Page 3-11: Added Setting the SP. Page 3-14: Modified ST start conditions. Page 3-17: Modified Alarm type. Page 3-20: Added 3.10 Requests during Operation. Page 4-6: Added Alarm latch. Page 4-9 to 10: Added new pages. Page 5-3: Modified the diagram in Protect Level. Page 5-4: Modified the diagram in Operation level. Page 5-9: Added MV monitor (OUT2). Page 5-10: Modified the diagram in Adjustment level. Page 5-17: Modified the diagram in Initial setting level. Page 5-18: Modified the table in Input type. Page 5-21: Added Standard/heating and cooling. Page 5-22: Changed the default in ST self-tuning. Page 5-23: Modified Alarm 1 type1. Page 5-25: Modified the diagram in Advanced Function Setting Level. Page 5-35 to 37: Added new pages. Page A-2: Modified the table in Ratings. Page A-3: Modified the table in Characteristics. Page A-6: Modified the table in Operation level and AdĆ justment level. Page A-7: Modified the table in Initial setting level. Page A-8: Modified the table in Advanced function setting level. Page A-9: Modified the table in SENSOR INPUT SETĆ TING AND INDICATION RANGES. Page A-9: Added Control range. Page A-10: Modified the diagram in SETUP LEVELS DIAĆ GRAM. Page A-11 to 12: Modified the diagram in PARAMETER FLOW. A-2
  • 131. Revision code Data Revised content 3 July 2000 Page V: Added Meanings of Abbreviations. Page VI: Added Appendix. Page 1-2: Modified Display description. Page 1-5: Modified Main functions description. Page 1-7: Modified Advanced function setting level. Page 2-3: Modified Mounting. Page 2-5: Modified illustration and Alarm output 1/control output 2. Page 2-6: Modified illustration. Page 3-2: Modified Initial setting level part. Page 3-4: Added Set value 17 and 18. Page 3-8: Modified Temperature unit and Direct/reverse operation. Page 3-10: Modified illustration Page 3-11: Modified table in Parameters. Page 3-18: Modified *4. Page 4-8: Modified illustration. Page 4-9: Modified Dead band. Page 4-11: Modified (1) in Setup. Page 5-4: Added description text. Page 5-5: Modified table and text in PV and PV/SP. Page 5-7: Modified Alarm value 1. Page 5-8: Modified Upper-limit alarm value 1 and MV monitor (out 1). Page 5-18: Added Set value 17 and 18. Page 5-31: Added Heating and cooling. Page 5-34: Modified Alarm 1 latch. Page 6-4: Added 17.18 to Input types. Page 6-6: Added 17.18 to Input types and modified (14). Page A-2: Modified Relay output in the table. Page A-4: Added Analog input to Meaning. Page A-5: Added diagram. Page A-6: Added Cooling coefficient and Dead band to Adjustment level. Page A-8: Modified table in Advanced function setting levĆ el. Page A-10: Added Input indication range to table. Added 17.18 to Input types. March 2002 Page 2-2: Modified the diagram in Panel cutout. Page A-7: Modified the table in Initial setting level. Page A-12 to 13: Modified the diagram in PARAMETER FLOW.
  • 132. OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC 1 Commerce Drive Schaumburg, IL 60173 USA 800.55.OMRON (66766) OMRON CANADA, INC. 885 Milner Avenue Scarborough, Ontario M1B 5V8 416.286.6465 OMRON ON-LINE Global - http://www.omron.com USA - http://www.omron.com/oei Canada - http://www.omron.com/oci H101-E1-3 Printed in U.S.A. ©2002 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC Specifications subject to change without notice.